JP6335417B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs various error notifications.

  Conventionally, when a front frame equipped with a glass door or a glass door is opened in a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine, a door opening error notification is made, a door opening error display by image and a voice There is one that uses a message and a siren sound so that a player or pachinko hall clerk can find the location of the game stand with the front frame and glass door open (for example, Patent Document 1 below). When this door opening error notification is detected, when the opening of the front frame or the glass door is detected, an error command for specifying the error that has occurred is transmitted from the main control unit to the production control unit, and when this error command is received, production control is performed. This is performed by the section executing an error notification effect corresponding to the error command.

  In the gaming machine handling the error notification described above, when the production control unit receives the error command, in order to cope with the error notification based on another error command, the priority order between the error commands is set. In addition, error notification is processed according to the priority order. For example, the notification based on the reception error command is performed only when the reception error command has a higher priority than the error command being executed.

Japanese Patent No. 4531856

However, the conventional gaming machine, for the case where different types of error report knowledge is duplicated occurred, can not be properly informed of these errors.

Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately perform error notification even when different types of error notification overlap.

  The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means. The parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(1) Error determination means for determining whether or not an error relating to a gaming machine has occurred (S55 (error management process) in FIG. 8, S078 (error notification management process) in FIG. 24);
When it is determined that an error has occurred by the error determination unit, an error notification control unit that executes and controls error notification using a predetermined rendering unit;
In a gaming machine comprising
The effect means includes a sound effect means (speaker 46) for executing sound effects, a light effect means (decorative lamp 45, other LEDs, etc.) for executing light effects, and an image display means for executing image display effects ( A plurality of types of production means including a liquid crystal display device 36),
For the error, a plurality of types of errors in which error notification is performed by the error notification control unit using a sound effect by the sound effect unit, a light effect by the light effect unit, and an image display effect by the image display unit. (FIGS. 33 and 34),
The error notification control means includes
When any one of the plurality of types of errors has occurred alone, single error notification control means (S703 in FIG. 27, S723 in FIG. 29) for executing and controlling error notification corresponding to the error being generated;
When at least two types of errors among the plurality of types of errors are duplicated, an error notification priority determination unit (in FIG. 27) that determines an error notification priority that is associated in advance with each error that is occurring. S705, S715 in FIG. 28, S725 in FIG. 29),
Based on the error notification priority determined by the error notification priority determination means, priority error notification control means for executing and controlling error notification for each error in which the overlap occurs,
The priority error notification control means includes
The error notification using the sound effect and the light effect is performed with priority given to the error notification corresponding to the error having a relatively high error notification priority among the errors in the overlap occurrence (S706 in FIG. 27). , S716 in FIG. 28, S726 in FIG. 29),
For error notification using the image display effect, error information that can identify each error occurring in the overlap is displayed on the image display means (S707 in FIG. 27, S717 in FIG. 28, S727 in FIG. 29),
It is characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, when different types of errors occur repeatedly, error notification can be appropriately performed.

It is a perspective view of the front side which shows the external appearance of the bullet ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the front side of the game board of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control apparatus of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the game state transition of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the prefetch notice effect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side main process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side timer interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start port check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 starting port check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer preparation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the second half part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electrically-powered article management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory operation | movement start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during operation of the special electric accessory in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory operation | movement continuation determination process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening over winning number confirmation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side timer interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the error command reception process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the error cancellation command reception process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the error alert management process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table selection table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern distribution designation | designated number table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the error classification which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, and its error alerting | reporting effect. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the error classification which concerns on another embodiment of this invention, and its error alerting | reporting effect. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the general error alerting | reporting form. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the error alerting | reporting effect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which illustrated the error alerting | reporting effect aspect at the time of the single error generation which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which illustrated the error alerting | reporting effect aspect in the time of the duplication error which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention (The case where the error whose error alerting priority is higher than the said specific error generate | occur | produced when the specific error generate | occur | produced). FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an error notification effect in a case different from the case of FIG. 38 (a case where an error having a lower error notification priority than the specific error occurs during the occurrence of a specific error). It is the figure which illustrated the error alerting | reporting effect aspect in FIG. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the error alerting | reporting effect which concerns on another embodiment (3rd Embodiment) of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the error alerting | reporting effect which concerns on another embodiment (4th Embodiment) of this invention.

  Hereinafter, a preferred embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a ball game machine according to the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
<1. Outline of Configuration: FIGS. 1 and 2>
With reference to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the outline | summary of a structure of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the game board.

  First, with reference to FIG. 1, the structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 has a frame-shaped front frame 2 attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, and a game is stored in a game board storage frame (not shown) attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. A board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted, and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 is faced to the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting a transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a.

  A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. When the key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the glass door 6 is locked to the front frame 2. When operated to the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and opened to the front side.

  A front operation panel 7 pivotally supported on the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) is disposed below the glass door 6. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing discharged game balls.

  The upper tray unit 8 includes a ball removal button 14 for removing the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 below the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a game ball lending device (not shown) on the pachinko hall island facility side. On the other hand, a ball lending button 11 for requesting payout of a game ball and a card return button 12 for requesting return of a valuable medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.

  The upper tray unit 8 is configured so that a player can operate, and is used when a specific effect (for example, player participation type effect) is changed before and after the operation. ), “Frame effect button 13 (effect operation means)” that is used as a second effect button (rotating lamp button) and a third effect button (rolling button). The frame effect button 13 can be operated by, for example, turning on the built-in lamp or displaying the effect button image on the liquid crystal screen during a predetermined input reception period when a specific effect occurs (input reception is possible). Thus, it acts as a “production operation means” for changing the production by pressing it during the operable period (during the input reception period). Examples of the production operation means include a button type, a jog dial type, a touch sensor type using a non-contact type sensor, and a touch panel type using a liquid crystal display device. There is no particular limitation as long as it can be used to give some kind of change to the production when it is performed (change the production before and after the operation). Further, the type and the number of installed operation means for production are not particularly limited.

  A firing operation handle 15 for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7. Speakers 46 that produce sound effects (sound effects) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and above the firing operation handle 15. A plurality of decorative lamps 45 (full color LEDs) that provide a light effect by decoration of light are provided at appropriate positions on the glass door 6.

(Game board: Fig. 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 3 shown in FIG. 2 is mainly composed of a substantially square wooden plywood or resin board. As shown in the figure, the game board 3 is provided with a ball guide rail 5 that guides the launched game ball in a ring shape as a board surface partition member, and a substantially circular region surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is formed. It is a game area 3a, and the four corners are non-game areas.

  In the substantially central portion of the game area 3a, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (design variation display areas), a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.) A liquid crystal display device 36 (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) is provided that is capable of variable display and stop display of the left symbol (corresponding to the left display area), middle symbol (corresponding to the middle display area), and right symbol (corresponding to the right display area). It has been. The liquid crystal display device 36 displays various effects as images under the control of an effect control unit 24 described later.

  Further, a center decoration 48 is provided in the game area 3a so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a distant manner. The center decoration 48 protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and is a member that enables the flow path of game balls to be distributed to the left and right according to the strength or stroke length of the game balls. A flow path distributing means), which is arranged at a substantially central portion of the game area 3a so that a game ball flow path is formed on both upper sides (left side and right side) of the game area 3a by the presence of the center decoration 48. ing. However, in the case of this embodiment, the center ornament 48 has a shape bulging slightly to the right.

  The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and forms a front mounting plate 48a that is fixed to the game board 3 by a fixing screw or the like, and forms an outer periphery of the center decoration 48, and is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. An armor frame portion 48b surrounding the screen is integrally provided. The armor frame portion 48b protrudes substantially from the front mounting plate 48a to the front side, and prevents the game ball from entering the inside, that is, the liquid crystal display device 36 side. A play area through which a game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball is guided to the right side. The game balls driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32 are distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and the left down flow path 3b on the left side of the center ornament 48 and the right down flow path 3c on the right side. Flow down either. Such a center ornament 48 functions as a game ball drop direction changing member (drop direction changing means) that changes the fall direction of the game ball.

  Although not shown in the figure, the center decoration 48 is provided with a game ball that is entered from a entrance (not shown) provided on the left side of the armor frame 48b at the front lower portion of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the horizontal direction. The stage is provided so that it can freely roll and drop from the center in the left-right direction (starting port guide path) or from both the left and right sides. In addition, the center ornament 48 is provided with a movable body accessory (a clock-type accessory 80, a flower-shaped accessory 90, a rotating lamp 62, a movable body 73, etc., which will be described later) that provides a visual effect according to its operation mode. It has been.

  In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a function display section, and a 7-segment display (with dots) is started with the upper start port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower start. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) which are arranged side by side in correspondence with the mouth 35 (for the second special symbol). Is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the special symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of “special symbol” expressed by 7 segments (variation display operation in which variation start and variation stop are set as one set). It has become. The liquid crystal display device 36 is a device that displays a decorative symbol by image in a synchronized manner in time with the variation display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. At the same time, a decorative symbol variation display game is executed (details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

  In the various function display units, a composite display device (holding composite display LED display) 38c including a 7-segment display (with dots) is disposed next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. The combination was called the display of the number of balls with special action 1, the number of balls with special action 2, the number of balls with special action 2, the variable time shortening function is active (short time), and the high probability state (high probability) This is because it is an on-hold / short-time / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as “composite display device”) having five display functions called status notification.

  The various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In this normal symbol display device 39a, a normal symbol change display operation expressed by two LEDs (for example, seesaw is alternately turned on and off alternately, and it is determined whether or not it is stopped by either side being lit). As a result, the normal symbol variation display game is executed. In addition, a round number display device 39b in which three LEDs (first to third round display LEDs) are arranged adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a is provided. This round number display device 39b functions as a “specified round notification means” for notifying the specified number of rounds related to the big hit (details of “big hit” will be described later). The specified number of rounds is notified.

  Below the center decoration 48, an upper start port 34 (first special symbol start port: first starter) and a lower start port 35 (second special symbol starter: second starter) are provided. The normal variation winning device 41 is provided at the top and bottom, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper start opening sensor 34a and lower start opening sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of the game ball are formed inside each. ing.

  The upper start port 34 which is the first special symbol start port is a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol 1”) in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device). This is a prize winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation of the variable display operation in some cases, which is abbreviated as “Special Figure 1”, and does not have a starting opening / closing means (means for opening or expanding the starting opening). It is configured as a winning device. In the present embodiment, a game ball dropping direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a is operated to the upper start port 34 to the left-down flow path 3b. The game balls that have flowed down the game are easy to win, whereas the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c have a configuration that makes it difficult or impossible to win.

  The normal variation winning device 41 is configured as a winning rate variation type winning device that can vary the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port by means of the starting port opening / closing means, and specifically, a second special symbol starting port. A certain lower starting port 35 is configured as a so-called “electric tulip type” winning device including a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 that can be opened or enlarged. The lower start opening 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol 2”) in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). The award area relating to the start condition of the variable display operation of the variable display operation of the lower start opening 35 is determined according to the operating state (operating or non-operating) of the movable blade piece 47. It is converted into an open state (easy winning state) that facilitates winning and a closed state (difficulty state that makes winning difficult) or impossible to win than the open state. In the present embodiment, when the movable blade piece 47 is inactive, a closed state (a state in which a prize cannot be awarded) in which a prize cannot be awarded to the lower start port 35 is maintained.

  Below the normal variable winning device 41 (lower start opening 35), a special variable winning device 42 (first first prize winning device 42) configured such that the lower large winning port 40 (first large winning port) can be opened or expanded by the open door 42b. A special variable winning device) is provided, and a lower large winning opening sensor 42a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball is formed therein.

  Further, on both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, there are four general winning openings 43 on the left side and one on the right side, four in total. A mouth sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed.

  Further, a normal symbol start opening 37 including a passing gate (specific passing area) through which a game ball can pass is provided diagonally right above the normal variation winning device 41, that is, above the middle portion of the right flow path 3c. . The normal symbol starting port 37 (third starting means) is a winning port related to a normal symbol variation display operation in the normal symbol display device 39a, and a normal symbol starting port for detecting a passing game ball is provided therein. A sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol start port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side, and is not formed on the left flow path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be formed only in the left flow path 3b, or may be formed in each of both flow paths.

  In the middle of the path from the normal symbol starting port 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right flow down path 3c, the right big winning port 50 (second big winning port) is opened by the retractable opening door 52b. A special variable winning device 52 (second special variable winning device) configured to be expandable is provided, and a right big prize opening sensor 52a for detecting a game ball that has entered the right big prize opening 50 is provided therein. (See FIG. 3).

  Around the right big prize opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms the downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. ing. And if the right big prize opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (large prize opening closed state), the downstream guide part of the right flow path 3c is formed by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging part 55. A part of (upper side 55a) is formed. Further, in the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, the flow path correction is made almost parallel to the flow direction of the game ball in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, more precisely, in the game area above the right big prize opening 50. A board 51 d is provided so as to work to bring the game ball flowing down toward the right big prize opening 50.

  The process of entering a game ball into the right grand prize opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the play area between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5 projects on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. Come down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correcting plate 51d protruding from the surface of the game board 3, so that the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction of the right big winning opening 50 (downward). . At this time, if the right big prize opening 50 is covered with the retractable open door 52b (the big prize opening closed state), the game ball rolls over the predetermined arrangement (not shown). Are guided in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower start opening 35) and the special variable winning device 42 (lower large winning port 40). At this time, if the lower start opening 35 or the lower large winning opening 40 is in a winable state (open state), a game ball can win the winning opening. On the other hand, if the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the right big prize opening 50 is open (right big prize opening state), the game ball is guided into the right big prize opening 50.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player aims the launch position on the special variable prize winning device 52 side (when the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c), the upper start is performed. The game ball is difficult to be guided to the mouth 34 side or is not guided. Therefore, if the right big prize opening 50 is in the closed state, it is difficult or impossible to win the start openings 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 is operated. .

  When the winning means described above belong to which of the left and right flow paths, that is, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b or the right flow path 3c can be won, the winning means belonging to the left flow path 3b The upper start opening 34, the lower start opening 35, the lower large prize opening 40, and the three general winning openings 43 on the left side include the upper start opening 34, the lower start opening, and the winning means belonging to the right flow path 3c. 35, a normal symbol start opening 37, a right large winning opening 50, a lower large winning opening 40, and one general winning opening 43 on the right side.

  Note that the lower start port 35 belongs to both the left flow down path 3b and the right flow down path 3c as long as the movable blade piece 47 is in the open state (start port open state). It is possible. However, since the movable wing piece 47 of the lower start opening 35 has the operating condition for the passage (winning) of the game ball to the normal symbol start opening 37 located on the right side of the game area 3a, it is substantially the right flow It can be said that it belongs only to the path 3c.

  In addition, the upper start port 34 generally belongs only to the left flow down route 3b or the left flow down route 3b, and it is difficult or impossible to win a game ball from the right flow down route 3c. That is, the arrangement of the game nail and other game parts in the game area 3a is the same as that of the game ball that has flowed down the left flow path 3b (including the game ball that has passed through the stage of the center decoration 48). However, the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c are arranged so as to form a guide path that makes it difficult or impossible to guide the game ball to the upper start opening 34.

  Further, the lower large winning opening 40 belongs to both the left flow down path 3b and the right flow down path 3c, and it is possible to win from any of the left and right flow down paths. However, the right big winning opening 50 belongs only to the left flow path 3b, and only a game ball from the right flow path 3c can win.

  Each winning opening such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the lower large winning opening 40, the right large winning opening 50, or the general winning opening 43 is arranged in the game area 3a. It functions as a winning means, and also detects the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the lower large winning opening sensor 42a, the right large winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, etc. The switch (winning detection switch) functions as a winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the winning means. The winning detection switch can be constituted by a non-contact switch such as a photo switch or a proximity switch, or a contact switch such as a micro switch.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, among the various winning holes provided in the gaming area 3a, if there is a winning in a winning opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37, it is promised for each winning opening. The number of winning balls per winning ball (for example, three for the upper start opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35, 13 for the large winning opening 40, 10 for the general winning opening 43) is the game ball payout device 19 (FIG. 3)). Note that the game balls that have not won each winning opening are discharged from the gaming area 3 a through the out opening 49. Here, “winning” is not a structure in which a winning opening takes a game ball inside, or a winning opening takes a game ball inside, but a winning opening made of a pass-through gate (for example, a normal symbol start opening 37). If the game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning slot, a winning prize is displayed at the winning slot. It is treated as having occurred. The game ball related to the winning is also referred to as “winning ball”.

<Movable object> Normal button, refreshing button,
In the area of the game board, a plurality of movable objects that provide visual effects are arranged at positions that do not obstruct the flow of the game ball. In this example, a first movable body accessory (clock-type accessory) 80 is disposed at an upper right side in the center case 48, that is, at a position that does not obstruct the flow of the game ball passing through the right flow path 3c. A second movable body accessory (flower type accessory 90) is arranged on the side. A third movable body accessory (semi-transparent spherical movable body 73 containing the rotating lamp 62 and the light emitting device) is integrally incorporated in the frame effect button 13 so as to be swingable and rotatable. Although details will be described later, the frame effect button 13 is a normal button 13A (first effect button) or a rotating light button 66 (first operation button) depending on the direction of the built-in movable body 73 when it is stationary (the position of the surface visible to the player). 2 function button: lucky pad), and when the movable body 73 is rotating forward, it functions as a refreshing button 70 (third effect button: rolling button).

(First movable body accessory 80)
The first movable body accessory includes a clock panel portion (numerical display portion) 81 composed of a numerical display portion divided into twelve numerical sectors with numerals of Roman letters “I” to “XII”, and this watch. It has a clock hand 82 composed of a short hand and a long hand that can rotate on the board 81 and can indicate the hour and minute as required, and is configured as a clock-type accessory 80 as a whole. The clock panel 81 has a full-color LED on the back side or inside for each sector division location (number sector from Roman letters “I” to “XII”) indicated by the short hand, or the number sector itself is composed of a full-color LED. The number sectors marked with the Roman letters “I” to “XII” can individually emit light in different colors.

  The timepiece-type accessory 80 functions as a “main actor” that operates under predetermined conditions in the case of a big hit or a loss. The clock hand 82 of the clock-type accessory 80 rotates at a high speed, and the number sector of the clock panel 81 is colored with a predetermined “color and number”, which shows the player's winning expectation degree. For example, it is configured such that the winning winning expectation degree for the player increases in the order of the light emission color of the LED of the number sector in the clock panel portion (number display portion) 81 in the order of white (normal color), blue, yellow, green, and red.

  Here, the clock hands 82 of the clock-type accessory 80 continue to rotate until the symbol variation display operation stops, but the clock hands 82 are configured to stop in the middle of the symbol variation display operation. Thus, the winning winning expectation may be indicated by the number of the number sector indicated by the short hand of the stopped clock hand 82 or by the number and the color of the number sector to be colored. Further, when the emission color of the LED of the number sector in the clock panel (number display unit) 81 emits rainbow color (premium color), the big hit can be determined.

(Second movable body accessory 90)
The second movable body accessory 90 includes a plurality of petals A2 around the flower heart A1, moves the flower heart A1 and the flower crown A2 in the vertical direction (falling movement), and moves in the horizontal direction (lateral movement). ) The first movable body 91 that can be configured and the bud B1 is attached to the tip of the stem B2 so as to be located around the outside of the corolla A2, and the bud B1 and the stem B2 can be moved in the left-right direction (projecting movement) The second movable body 92 configured as described above. In the case of this embodiment, the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 can operate independently from each other, and are arranged so that the combined position of both is located near one side (right side) of the liquid crystal screen.

  In terms of the operation mode, the first movable body 91 is normally located at a home position (original position) “above” the solid line position (combined position described later) in FIG. The movable body 92 is usually positioned at the “right” home position (original position) with respect to the liquid crystal screen from the solid line position in FIG. 2. Then, the first movable body 91 can move (drop) so that the flower crown A2 comes from the original upper position alone to the solid line position in FIG. 2 at the upper right of the liquid crystal screen, and the second movable body 92 can be independently moved to the right. From the home position (original position), it can move (projection movement) so that 萼 B1 comes to the solid line position in FIG. When the drop movement of the first movable body 91 and the protruding movement of the second movable body 92 occur simultaneously and move to the solid line position (merged position) in FIG. 2, the corolla A2 and the bud B1 overlap here. Combined, a flower crown A2 is arranged around the flower heart A1, and a bud B1 is arranged around the outside to form a “flower-shaped part” having double flower coats. In this sense, the second movable body accessory 90 is also referred to as a “flower type accessory”. Further, after the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 are merged, the flower heart A1, the flower crown A2 and the bud B1 move to the left in the merged state, and temporarily wait at the broken line position (development position) in FIG. It is also possible to move back to the solid line position.

  The flower-shaped accessory 90 functions as a “sub-object” that operates under predetermined conditions in the case of a big hit or a loss. When the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 are combined, the first movable body 91 (flower heart A1 and flower crown A2) rotates at the tip of the stem portion B2 of the second movable body 92 and the translucent flower heart. A1, the corolla A2 and the bud B1 are illuminated from behind by a lamp or a full-color LED and lightly shines beautifully. Under special conditions, the flower heart A1, the corolla A2, and the eyelid B1 move between the combined position and the developed position. These actions increase the expectation of winning the game for the player. When the symbol variation display operation is stopped (the symbol variation display game is ended), the flower-shaped accessory 90 returns to the origin position from the effect position (merged position) indicated by the solid line in FIG.

  In the case of this embodiment, the first movable body 91 can be dropped and moved from the upper original position to the solid line position (merged position) in FIG. 2 and laterally moved from the merged position to the broken line position (developed position) in FIG. The second movable body 92 can independently project and move from the right home position (original position) to the solid line position (merged position) in FIG. 2, and a part of the second movable body 92 (１B1) is independently illustrated in FIG. It is assumed that it is possible to move laterally from the solid line position (union position) to the broken line position (development position) in FIG. However, the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 may appear or protrude in the liquid crystal screen area and may be combined there. As an operation in the case of such a configuration, the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 are normally stationary at an original position (not shown) determined on the edge inside the liquid crystal screen or on the side outside the liquid crystal screen. ing. However, when a win based on a big win or a win related to a loss occurs and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first movable body 91 moves downward from above and the second movable body 92 moves from the right direction to the liquid crystal screen. Projecting and moving to an approaching position or an effect position (a position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 2) covering a part of the liquid crystal screen, the two are united. This coalescence operation is an aspect of the movable body effect that particularly wins the winning expectation feeling (winning expectation degree), and the higher the expectation effect (for example, during the SP reach effect described later), the higher the probability. Can appear. An effect effect with impact is exhibited by the operation mode of such a movable body accessory.

(Third movable body accessory 73: FIG. 2)
As shown schematically in FIG. 2, the frame effect button 13 includes a transparent push button type cylinder 72 having a relatively large surface area in a transparent frame 71 configured so that the surface of the tray unit 8 is integrated. The movable body 73 as a third movable body accessory can be rolled in the push button cylinder 72 or below (hereinafter simply referred to as the press button cylinder 72). In other words, it is structured to be rotatable and swingable in a plurality of directions.

  The movable body 73 (third movable body accessory) is disposed in the push button cylinder 72 and is translucent and can be rotated about the horizontal axis as viewed from the player and can be swung left and right. A spherical empty frame, and a rotating lamp 62 and a light emitting device housed in the empty frame. When the push button type cylinder 72 is pressed, or at a predetermined timing before and after that, the movable body 73 rolls (rotates and swings), and the operation is illuminated with colored light from inside or around the empty frame. Thus, the player can visually recognize from the outside.

  The frame effect button 13 having the above structure has a “normal button” depending on whether the operation mode of the movable body 73 at the time of operation is “normally stationary”, “waiting for a rotating lamp”, or “rolling operation”. 13A (first effect button) ”,“ rotating lamp button 66 (second effect button: lucky pad) ”, and“ exhilarating button 70 (third effect button: rolling button) ”.

  Here, “normally stationary” means that the rotational angle position of the movable body 73 in a stationary state is 0 degree, and the light emitting body (the top surface of the envelope body 64) of the rotating lamp 62 moves up through the push button cylinder 72. In this state, when the push button type cylinder 72 is pressed, the frame effect button 13 functions as a normal button 13A (first effect button). . In this specification, “normal button 13A” refers to the frame effect button 13 when operating in the “normally stationary” state.

  “Waiting for rotating lamp” means that the rotational angle position of the movable body 73 in a stationary state is switched from the normal stationary position (0 degree) to the position rotated 90 degrees toward the front (90 degrees). The light-emitting body of the lamp 62 (the top surface of the enclosure 64) is in a state where it can be seen from above (a position visible to the player) through the push button cylinder 72. Under this condition, the push button cylinder 72 When is pressed, the frame effect button 13 functions as a revolving light button 66 (second effect button). When working as the revolving light button 66 (second effect button), since the revolving light 62 is visible from above through the push button type cylinder 72, it can be urged to operate and, for example, the revolving light 62 is instantly operated. The operating state can be visually confirmed through the push button type cylinder 72. Therefore, it is suitable for producing a one-notice notice effect, and a very tense moment can be produced. When the period of “waiting for a rotating lamp” has elapsed, the movable body 73 rotates 90 degrees toward the back, and returns to the “normally stationary” position (0 degrees).

  In addition, “rolling operation” refers to a state in which the movable body 73 continues to rotate forward, that is, a state in which the movable body 73 rotates with the horizontal axis as the rotation center axis as shown in FIG. When the push button type cylinder 72 is pressed while the movable body 73 is rotating, the frame effect button 13 works as a refreshing button 70 (third effect button). When acting as a refreshing button 70, the spherical movable body 73 can be seen from the outside through the transparent frame 71 and the push button type cylinder 72 so that the rolling operation (high-speed rotation) is performed, so the player has operated the rolling button 70. When the normal button 13A or the rotating lamp button 66 is pressed, a very satisfying pleasure can be obtained. When the “rolling operation” period elapses, the movable body 73 stops and returns to the “normally stationary” position.

  In the lower part of FIG. 2, among the three types of button functions used properly as described above, the functional parts of the rotating lamp button 66 (lucky pat) and the refreshing button 70 (rolling button) are shown separately. Here, in order to facilitate understanding, the switch 65 dedicated to the rotating light button 66 (lucky pad) and the switch 74 dedicated to the refreshing button 70 (rolling button) are illustrated, but in actuality, Only switches are used properly.

  The revolving light button 66 (lucky pat) is provided with a lamp (or LED) 62a as a light source and a reflecting mirror 62b as a reflector for reflecting light from the lamp 62a in a red translucent enclosure 64. The rotating lamp 62 is configured to change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light source by rotating the reflecting mirror 62b. The third movable body accessory 73 acts as an effect means for making a big hit final announcement (so-called one-shot notification) during the big symbol change display game (special symbol change display operation). When making a single announcement, a notification sound (determined sound) at a predetermined timing during a symbol variation display game (for example, at the beginning of symbol variation, during a predetermined timing of a predetermined notice effect such as reach production or pseudo-ream) Is generated, and the rotating lamp 63 is operated for a predetermined production time from the generation (notification sound generation), or the notification sound is not generated, but the rotating lamp 63 is generated at a predetermined timing in the symbol variation display game. Operated for a predetermined production time. For example, with a notification sound, an effect mode in which the rotating lamp 63 operates over a long fluctuation period from the start of change of the special symbol change display operation to the stop of the change, or with the generation of the notification sound or without the notification sound. There is an effect such that the lamp 63 is turned on and the operation lamp 62a is turned on. That is, during the one-shot notification effect, the lamp 62a of the rotary lamp 62 continues to be lit with a predetermined effect time width, and the reflecting mirror 62b is continuously rotated by the stepping motor 62c. Thus, the player can shockly know that the winning game is won before the result of the symbol variation display game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

  Further, in the left side view of FIG. 2, the rotating lamp 62 is illustrated as having a rotating lamp switch 65 in the case of acting as a push button type rotating lamp button 66, and the enclosure 64 of the rotating lamp 62 at a predetermined timing. When the pressing operation is performed, the rotating lamp switch 65 is turned on, a hit notification sound is generated, and the rotating lamp 62 is activated. However, in practice, the rotating lamp 62 is housed in the empty frame (the shell portion of the movable body 73) in the right side of FIG. 2, and therefore it is not the enclosure 64 that functions as the operating portion of the rotating lamp 62. This is a push button type cylinder 72. When the push button type cylinder 72 is pressed to "waiting for a rotating lamp", the switch 74 is turned on and the rotating lamp switch 65 is turned on with the same result. The lamp 62 is activated. The normal button 13 </ b> A that operates during “normally stationary” is an effect button that is frequently used and does not necessarily operate all the effect means. On the other hand, the rotating lamp button 66 is for one notification. For this reason, although the ratio that the revolving light button 66 is selected is not high, a larger effect than that of the normal button, for example, the blinking operation of the revolving light 62 and the sound are generated, and a larger number of effecting units are operated simultaneously. This is used as an effect button (also referred to as a “lucky pat button” in this specification) for notifying and confirming that “16R probability variation big hit” is in the initial stage of symbol variation.

  When functioning as an exhilarating button 70, as schematically shown in the right side view of FIG. 2, the movable body 73 becomes “during rolling operation” in which the movable body 73 continuously rotates at a high speed in the push button type cylinder 72, and the operation is performed. Illuminated with colored light from the inside or the surroundings, a state appears in which the player can visually recognize this state from the outside through the push button type cylinder 72. Since the refresh button 70 is operated on the premise of the appearance of this state, when the refresh button 70 is operated at the time of a big hit, a very great pleasure is given to the player due to a synergistic effect with the big hit effect that occurs after the operation. be able to.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device that controls the game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

  The control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment receives an effect control command from the main control unit (main control board) 20 and the main control unit 20 that is responsible for overall game operation control, and receives images, light, and sound. A production control unit (production control board, liquid crystal control board) 24 for overall control of production operation control (production appearance control for production means), a payout control board 29 for performing prize ball payout control, and an external power supply ( A power supply control board (not shown) that generates and supplies power necessary for the gaming machine from a not-shown machine is mainly configured. In addition, a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. In FIG. 3, the power supply route is omitted.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), a ROM 202 (main control ROM), and a RAM 203 (main control RAM). ).

  The CPU 201 is a CPU of Z80 (manufactured by Zylog Corporation or an equivalent thereof). Z80 is a CPU with a data bus of 8 bits and an address bus of 16 bits, but does not require a large memory space, and it is ideal for controlling pachinko machines that do not require high-speed processing or complicated numerical operation processing. It is. The CPU 201 also includes a plurality of types of registers for reading and writing data necessary for executing processing.

  The ROM 202 functions as storage means (main control side storage means) for storing game data related to game operation control, and stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program describing a game operation control procedure. ing. The RAM 203 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for the progress of the game is stored and used according to the processing state. The RAM 203 functions as a random number counter used for a predetermined lottery (for example, a variation pattern lottery related to a special symbol), and functions as a random number generation unit that generates random numbers in software.

  Although not shown in the figure, the main control unit 20 provides a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit), which gives a periodic interrupt, a pulse output generation function (bit rate generator) and a time measurement function to the Z80 system, and a CPU. It also has an interrupt controller circuit, a counter circuit, etc. that exhibit an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt that gives an interrupt signal. The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number within a certain range in hardware, and a sampling circuit that samples a random value from the random number generation circuit at a predetermined timing, and as a whole a 16-bit counter work. The CPU 201 sends an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, thereby obtaining the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random value (random number size: 65536), and winning the random value Use for lottery.

  The main control unit 20 detects the passage of the upper start opening sensor 34a for detecting the winning to the upper start opening 34, the lower starting opening sensor 35a for detecting the winning to the lower starting opening 35, and the normal symbol starting opening 37. An ordinary symbol start opening sensor 37a, a lower large winning opening sensor 42a for detecting a winning at the lower large winning opening 40, a right large winning opening sensor 52a for detecting a winning at the right large winning opening 50, and a general winning opening. A general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting a winning at 43 and a fraud detection sensor 99 are connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these.

(Unauthorized detection sensor 99)
Here, the fraud detection sensor 99 is a general term for sensors such as a vibration sensor, a magnetic sensor, and a radio wave sensor that detect fraudulent acts (got acts) on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The upper start opening sensor 34a, the lower start opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, the lower large winning opening sensor 42a, the right large winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the like are contact type or non-contact type games. Consisting of a switch that reacts to the ball, the direct purpose is to detect the game ball, but the vibration sensor, magnetic sensor, and radio wave sensor detect the game ball with the direct purpose of capturing vibration, magnetism, and radio waves. It is not directly aimed to do. Therefore, vibration sensors, magnetic sensors, radio wave sensors and the like are particularly referred to as “fraud detection sensors” and are handled separately from other sensors.

  The vibration sensor is attached so as to be able to detect a vibration state (illegal vibration) given to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the magnetic sensor is, for example, a magnetic field when a magnet or the like is brought close to a predetermined area of the game board 3. Attached to detect changes. The radio wave sensor is attached so as to be able to detect radio waves (illegal radio waves) irradiated to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since the main control unit 20 determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine based on the detection information from the fraud detection sensor 99, it functions as an abnormality determination unit.

  Which state is determined to be fraudulent using these fraud detection sensors is appropriately determined according to the model and game playability.

  For example, the following forms of fraud are considered. As a fraudulent act related to vibration (so-called “dokkigoto”), the game ball is guided to a specific winning opening or winning area (a winning opening or winning area that affects profit status) by giving vibration to the gaming machine from the outside. And cheating forcibly winning (passing).

  In addition, as an illegal act related to a magnet (magnetic force) (so-called “magnet goto”), a magnet is used to induce a game ball to win (pass) a game ball in a specific winning opening or a winning area, Using an array, a plurality of game balls (so-called “grape” state) are created to facilitate winning (passing) of game balls at a specific winning opening or a winning area, or causing malfunction of gaming electronic components, etc. And cheating.

  In addition, as a fraudulent act related to radio waves (so-called “radio wave”), a gaming machine is irradiated with illegal radio waves, malfunctioning sensors and switches to obtain prize balls illegally, or malfunctioning gaming operations. For example, illegal acts such as forcibly hitting the jackpot directly.

  Whether or not there has been a fraudulent act as described above is determined by whether or not the fraudulent act is determined by the vibration sensor, whether or not the vibration detected by the vibration sensor is equal to or greater than a reference value, It is determined whether or not there has been a fraudulent act such as throbbing on the basis of whether or not it has been detected continuously for a period of time. In addition, vibrations of a predetermined level or more, but with a short time width that is not determined to be fraudulent, are intermittently detected within a time exceeding the predetermined time by the vibration sensor, and the detected cumulative number reaches a predetermined value. In such a case, it is determined that there has been an illegal act in which vibration is locally applied to the glass surface and the local portion is moved to guide the game ball to the winning hole.

  The same applies to the case where fraud is determined by the magnetic sensor. When the magnetic sensor detects a change state of a predetermined magnetic field (for example, when it is detected that the magnitude of the magnetic field exceeds a predetermined reference value), Alternatively, when the change state is detected continuously for a predetermined time, it is determined that there has been an illegal act by the magnet.

  In addition, when a fraudulent act is determined by the radio wave sensor, it is determined that there has been a fraudulent act due to an illegal radio wave when a radio wave having a specific frequency or a specific frequency band is detected. In addition, in order to prevent false detection, if the number of times of detection is detected a predetermined number of times (for example, two times or more), or if the detection time is detected for a predetermined period of time, fraudulent acts caused by unauthorized radio waves Judge that there was.

  The main control unit 20 also includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower start opening 35 and a large winning opening solenoid for controlling the opening and closing of the open door 42b of the lower large winning opening 40. 42c and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling opening / closing of the open door 52b of the right large winning opening 50 are connected, and the main control unit 20 sends a control signal to these to control opening / closing appropriately.

  In addition, a special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 sends a control signal to the special symbol display device 38b to appropriately display and control the special symbols.

  In addition, a composite display device (not shown) is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of various information displayed on the main display unit. Here, the composite display device displays the number of suspended balls for special symbol 1, the number of suspended balls for special symbol 2, the variable time shortening function being activated (during time reduction), and the high probability state (during high probability). It is a hold / short time / high-accuracy composite display device having five display functions called status notification. In addition, a round number display device is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of a specified number of rounds by jackpot.

(External centralized terminal board for frame 21)
Further, the frame external concentration terminal board 21 is connected to the main control unit 20. The main control unit 20 can transmit information related to the game progress (for example, information on winning a winning game, information on the number of winning balls, information on the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed) to the hall computer HC via the external concentration terminal board 21 for the frame. It has become. The hall computer HC is a management computer that manages the operating status of pachinko hall gaming machines based on information sent from the main controller 20, and is arranged outside the gaming machine.

(Discharge Control Board (Discharge Control Unit) 29)
The main control unit 20 is connected to a payout control board (payout control part) 29. The payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control part) 28 for controlling the launching device 32, and a game ball payout. Is connected to a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19. The main control unit 20 can transmit a control command related to payout (payout control command for designating the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29.

  The main control unit 20 also has a transmission function unit that transmits various effect control commands including information related to the special symbol variation display game and information related to errors to the effect control unit 24 according to the processing state. This transmission function unit is configured to transmit the production control command from the main control unit 20 to the production control unit 24 by one-way communication, whereby an illegal signal due to an external goto action is transmitted via the production control unit 24. Thus, the input to the main control unit 20 is prevented.

  The payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is equipped with a microprocessor having a payout control CPU, and a payout control ROM storing a control program describing a payout control procedure for game balls, and a payout in which a work area is formed A control RAM is mounted to constitute a one-chip microcomputer. The main role of the payout control board 29 is to receive a payout control command from the main control unit 20, award ball payout control of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, and transmission of a payout state signal to the main control unit 20. Etc.

  On the payout control board 29, a full detection sensor 60 (a detection sensor for detecting a storage state of game balls in the ball tray (in this embodiment, the upper tray 9)) that detects that the upper tray 9 is full of game balls, A front door opening sensor 61 (in this embodiment, a detection sensor for detecting the open state of the front frame 2 and / or the front operation panel 7) and the game ball payout device 19 are connected.

  The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a supply replenishment detection sensor 19a for detecting supply shortage of game balls and a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting game balls (prize balls) to be paid out. These detection signals can be received. The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 19c for driving a ball payout mechanism (not shown) for paying out game balls. The payout control board 29 controls the payout motor 19c. The control signal can be transmitted.

  In addition, the payout control board 29 is connected to the main control unit 20 based on detection signals from the full detection sensor 60, the front door opening sensor 61, the replenishment detection sensor 19a, or the ball counting sensor 19b. The front operation panel 7 has an open / close state signal, a full detection signal, a replenishment out signal, a payout shortage error signal, a payout status signal, and other payout status signals. Based on this payout state signal, the main control unit 20 determines whether or not the game ball payout device 19 is functioning normally (for example, a prize ball payout failure (payout error), and the upper tray 9 is full of game balls. Whether it is or not is monitored.

  Further, a discharge control board 28 is connected to the payout control board 29 so that a discharge control signal can be transmitted to the discharge control board 28. The launch control board 28 controls energization to a launch solenoid (not shown) provided in the launch device 32 based on the launch control signal, and realizes a game ball launch operation by operating the launch operation handle 15. .

(2-3. Production control unit 24)
The production control unit 24 includes a microprocessor with a built-in CPU 241 (production control CPU), and is mainly configured by a microcomputer with a ROM 242 (production control ROM) and a RAM 243 (production control RAM). An interrupt controller circuit having an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a sound source IC, a CTC, and a timer interrupt, a counter circuit for generating a random number in hardware, and the like are provided. The ROM 242 functions as storage means (effect control side storage means) for storing game data related to effect operation control, and stores various data necessary for effect operation control in addition to the effect control program in which the effect control procedure is described. Has been. Further, the RAM 243 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for producing an effect is stored and used according to the processing state. The RAM 203 functions as a random number counter for effect lottery random numbers used for effect lottery, and functions as a random number generating means for generating random numbers in software.

  The main roles of the production control unit 24 are reception of production control commands from the main control unit 20, selection of production based on production control commands, image display control of the liquid crystal display device 36, sound control of the speaker 46, decorative lamps. 45, light emission control of various LEDs (production LED: not shown), operation control of a movable body accessory, and the like.

  The effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display control of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit is an image ROM storing VDP (Video Display Processor) that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, and image data (effect image data) on which the VDP performs image development processing. A VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores image data developed by the VDP, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs control data necessary for the VDP to perform display control, and a display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU. A liquid crystal control ROM that stores the described program and various data necessary for display control thereof, and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area and a buffer memory are mainly configured.

  In addition, the production control unit 24 displays a clock board (numerical display unit) of the decorative lamp 45 and the clock-type accessory 80 in order to display various productions (light production, sound production, and movable body production using a movable body accessory). ) A light display control unit for the light display device 45a including 81 and various LEDs, an acoustic control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generation device 46a including the speaker 46, various movable body objects (clock-type object 80, flower-type object) A drive control unit (motor drive circuit) for the movable body accessory motors 80c, 91c, 92c, 62c, 73c for operating the object 90, the rotating lamp 62, the movable body 73, and the like. Here, the movable body accessory motor 80c is for driving the clock hands 82 constituting the clock-type accessory 80, and the movable body accessory motors 91c, 92c are for driving the movable bodies 91, 92 constituting the flower-shaped accessory 90. The movable body accessory motor 62 c is for driving the reflecting mirror 62 b constituting the rotating lamp 62, and the movable body accessory motor 73 c is for driving the movable body 73 constituting the rolling button 70. The effect control unit 24 can transmit control signals related to the effect means to these drive control units.

  In addition, a position detection sensor 82a for the clock hand 82 and position detection sensors 91a and 92a for the second movable body 92 are connected to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 can receive detection signals from these. The production control unit 24 controls the operation mode while monitoring the current operation position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position) of the movable body accessory based on the detection signals from the position detection sensors 82a, 91a, and 92a. In addition, the malfunction of the movable body accessory (whether or not it is a normal operation (for example, whether or not it has correctly returned to the origin position after the operation)) is monitored. If a malfunction occurs, such as when the movable object has stopped in the middle of an operation where it overlaps the liquid crystal screen, the production control unit will report the error notification as light, sound, or image, assuming that a sub error has occurred. Or it is performed by the effect by the combination of these plural types.

  The effect control unit 24 is connected to switches of the first and second effect buttons that can be operated by the player, that is, the switch of the frame effect button 13 and the rotary lamp switch 65. The effect control unit 24 is connected to these effect buttons. The operation detection signals from 13A and 66 can be received.

  The effect control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, and controls various effect means at a necessary timing. To do. Thereby, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, and the lighting and blinking driving of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED are realized. The production of “production scenarios” in a broad sense is realized. The above error notification effect by the combination of light, sound, and image is performed in the demonstration screen display mode using the decoration lamp 45, LED, speaker 46, and liquid crystal display device prepared for the above normal operation effect. It will be.

  The effect control command defines a function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and an event (EVENT) of 1-byte length. In order to distinguish MODE from EVENT, MODE Bit 7 is Bit 7 of ON and EVENT is set to OFF. When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time elapses from this setting. The strobe signal is transmitted. Furthermore, event (EVENT) information is set and output after the elapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second time of the strobe signal is transmitted after the elapse of the predetermined time from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be in an active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (production control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

  Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal and executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing so that the effect control command is acquired in this interrupt processing. It has become. Unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process based on another interrupt (timer interrupt process executed periodically). Even in such a case, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if another interrupt occurs simultaneously.

<3. Outline of operation>
Next, a gaming operation related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol change display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, based on a predetermined start condition, specifically, the game ball enters (wins) the game ball into the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35, the main control unit 20 The “big hit lottery” is performed by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in a variable manner to start the special symbol variation display game. Derived and displayed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

  Here, in this embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning to the upper start opening 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning to the lower start opening 35 are performed separately and independently. For this reason, the big hit lottery result regarding the upper start port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the big hit lottery result regarding the lower start port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, on the condition that a game ball has entered the upper start opening 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed and the first special symbol variation display game is started. On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, on the condition that a game ball has entered the lower start opening 35, the special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol variation display game is started. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game in the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, if the big win lottery result is “big hit” after the predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the predetermined “big hit” is given. In this mode, in other cases, the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in a predetermined “losing” mode, whereby the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived and displayed.

  In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 38b side. The variation display game is referred to as “special symbol variation display game 2”. Unless otherwise required, “special symbol 1” and “special symbol 2” are simply referred to as “special symbols” (sometimes abbreviated as “special symbol”), and “special symbol variation display game 1” and “special symbol” The symbol variation display game 2 ”is simply referred to as“ special symbol variation display game ”.

  In addition, when the above-described special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbol variation display game is started by variably displaying the decorative symbol (proactive game symbol) on the liquid crystal display device 36. Various developments are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorated design is derived and displayed. In other words, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the stunning ornamental symbol variation display game including the decorative symbol variation display operation.

  Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is “big hit” (when the big hit lottery result is “hit”), the decoration symbol variation display game develops an effect reflecting the result. In the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the special symbol is a big hit (for example, the 7-segment display state is “7”), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays “left”, “middle”, “right”. In each display area of “”, the display pattern in which the decorative symbol reflects “big hit” (for example, in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” display areas, the three decorative symbols are “7”, “7”, “ 7 ”display state).

  When this “big hit” is reached, specifically, the special symbol variation display game is terminated, and the decorative symbol variation display game is terminated accordingly. As a result, the symbol pattern of “hit” is derived and displayed. After that, the lower large prize opening solenoid 42c (see FIG. 3) provided in the special variable prize winning device 42 is operated to open / close the open door 42b in a predetermined operation pattern, and thereby the lower big prize opening 40 is opened / closed. Alternatively, the special prize opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable prize winning device 52 is operated to open and close the open door 52b in a predetermined operation pattern, thereby opening and closing the right big prize opening 50, and the normal game A special gaming state (big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the state occurs. In this jackpot game, the number of game balls won in the big prize opening (the winning ball in the big prize opening) until the opening time of the big prize opening reaches a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 29.8 seconds, for example) or Until the number reaches the predetermined number (maximum number of winnings: the entrance is opened by one operation of the character or the upper limit of the number of winning balls allowed for the expanded winning opening: for example, 9) A “round game” in which the area is opened or expanded and the winning prize opening is closed when any of these conditions is met is repeated a predetermined number of rounds (for example, a maximum of 16 rounds). The conditions for closing the lower grand prize opening 40 and the right major prize opening 50 are not limited to this, and may be based only on the opening time of the big prize opening, or the number of game balls won in the grand prize opening. It may be based on only.

  When the jackpot game is started, an opening effect is provided to notify that the jackpot is started. After the opening effect is finished, the round game is performed a plurality of times with a predetermined number of rounds as an upper limit. Then, after the specified number of rounds is finished, an ending effect for notifying that the jackpot is finished is performed, and thereby the jackpot game is finished. That is, the jackpot game is roughly composed of game periods of an opening effect, a round game, and an ending effect. However, the round game execution period excluding the opening effect period and the ending effect period in the closed state of the big prize opening may be regarded as a big hit game period.

  Regarding the information necessary for the execution of the decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 is based on the fact that a game ball enters (wins) the upper start opening 34 or the lower start opening 35. Whether the game is detected by the upper start sensor 34a or the lower start sensor 35a and the start condition (the start condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied, whether the game is “big hit” or “lost” 'Lottery lottery (win / fail type lottery)', and if it is a 'big hit', the big hit type is drawn, and if it is' losing ', the lottery type is lottered' symbol lottery (win (winning) type lottery) A big hit lottery including 'is performed, and based on the lottery result information, a variation pattern of the special symbol and a special symbol (special stop symbol) to be finally stopped and displayed are determined. Then, as an effect control command for specifying the processing state, a “variation pattern designation command” including at least a special symbol variation pattern information (for example, information on the jackpot lottery result and the special symbol variation time) is provided to the effect control unit 24 side. Send. Thereby, basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In the present embodiment, in order to enrich the production variations, a “decorative design designation command” including information on the special stop symbol (design lottery result information (information on the hit type)) is also transmitted to the production control unit 24. ing.

  The special symbol variation pattern information may include information for designating the occurrence of a specific notice effect (a reach effect via a reach state, which will be described later, or a pseudo-continuous effect with a pseudo-variable display operation). To explain in detail, the variation patterns of special symbols are roughly divided into “hit variation pattern” in the case of winning and “losing variation pattern” in the case of loss, according to the big hit lottery result information. For example, a variation pattern for designating a reach effect (for example, a reach variation pattern, a reach variation pattern with a pseudo-continuous effect (described later)), a non-reach effect specification that does not specify the occurrence of a reach effect Fluctuation patterns (for example, a normal fluctuation pattern, a normal fluctuation pattern with pseudo-continuations, etc.) are included. Regarding the variation time for each variation pattern, basically, the reach variation pattern is a variation pattern that specifies an effect that makes you expect to win big hits. Also has a long variation time.

  The effect control unit 24 performs time series during the decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in the effect control command (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. Deciding the contents to be developed (effect scenario) and the decoration pattern (decoration stop pattern) to be finally stopped and displayed, and the decoration pattern fluctuation display game by changing the decoration symbols according to the time schedule based on the variation pattern of the special symbols Is executed. As a result, the decorative symbols by the liquid crystal display device 36 are variably displayed in synchronism with the special symbol variation display by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game are in progress. Are substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generation device 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. Thereby, the reproduction of the image (image effect), the reproduction of the sound effect (sound effect), and the lighting and blinking drive (light effect) of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED, etc. are realized on the liquid crystal display device 36.

  In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display reflecting the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decoration symbol variation display game. These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as “symbol variation display games” unless otherwise required.

(3-1-2. Normal symbol fluctuation display game)
Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the passing (winning) of the game ball through the normal symbol starting port 37, “main lottery” is performed by the random number lottery in the main control unit 20. Based on the lottery result, the normal symbol displayed on the LED is displayed in a normal symbol display device 39a in a variable manner to start a normal symbol variation display game. After a certain period of time, the result is converted into a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. And stop display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is “per assist”, the display part of the normal symbol display device 39a is in a specific lighting state (for example, all the two LEDs 39a are in a lighting state, or “O” and “ The display is stopped when the “○” side LED among the LEDs representing “x” is in a lighting state).

  When this "subsidiary hit" is reached, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is actuated, thereby opening the movable blade 47 in a reverse "C" shape and opening the lower start port 35. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to enter a state in which the game ball is likely to flow in (opening opening state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as “general power open game”) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this open electric game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 won the open time of the lower start opening 35 until a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses or the lower start opening 35 was won. Until the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4), the winning area is opened or expanded, and when one of these conditions is satisfied, the lower start opening 35 is closed a predetermined number of times (for example, , Up to 2 times). The condition for closing the lower start opening 35 is not limited to this, and may be based only on the opening time of the lower start opening, or only based on the number of game balls won in the lower start opening. Also good.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the special / decorative symbol variation display game, during the regular symbol variation display game, during the big hit game, or during the open-circuit game, the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35 or the normal symbol start port 37, when a winning occurs, that is, when a detection signal is input from the upper start sensor 34a, the lower start sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start sensor 37a, and the corresponding start condition (symbol game start condition) is satisfied As a data relating to the right to start the variable display game, except for the data related to the variable display, the maximum storage number (for example, a maximum of four) which is a predetermined upper limit value is reserved and stored. . The on-hold hold data that has not been subjected to the symbol variation display operation or a game ball related to the hold data is also referred to as an “operation hold ball”. In order to clarify the number of the operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a holding provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 Turn on the indicator.

  Further, in the present embodiment, up to four operation holding balls relating to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are each stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are held as the fixed number of times of change of the special symbol or the normal symbol. In addition, the maximum memory number (maximum reserve memory number) of the number of the operation reservation balls regarding the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited, and the maximum reserve memory number of each symbol may be different (for example, The maximum number of reserved memories on the special symbol 1 side is 4, the maximum number of reserved memories on the special symbol 2 side is 2, the maximum number of reserved memories on the normal symbol side is 6, etc.). Moreover, regarding the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the maximum number of reserved memories on the symbol side where the profit obtained by the big hit lottery is relatively high may be set. In the present embodiment, since the jackpot lottery related to the special symbol 2 can obtain a jackpot type that is relatively profitable for the player, for example, the maximum number of reserved memory on the special symbol 1 side is two, the special symbol 2 side The maximum number of reserved memories may be set to 4 more than that.

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the gaming state will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the jackpot that is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to occurrence of various gaming states will be described.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a “probability variation (hereinafter, abbreviated as“ probability variation ”) function” that the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) serves as a function unit. There are two types, a probability changing function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol probability changing function”) and a probability changing function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol probability changing function”).

  The special symbol probability changing function changes the probability of winning a big hit from a low probability (for example, 1/399) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 1/3 of 19.9). Is a function that generates an advantageous “high probability state”. Under the gaming state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability changing function is in operation, the big hit lottery probability is high, so that the big hit is likely to occur. Therefore, it can be said that the gaming state expected by the player is a gaming state in which this special symbol probability changing function is operating. The details of the operation start condition and the operation end condition of the special symbol probability changing function will be described later.

  The normal symbol probability changing function changes the low probability (for example, 1/256) to a high probability (for example, 255/256) that the lottery probability per auxiliary is a predetermined probability (ordinary probability), so that it is more than the normal gaming state. This is a function for generating an advantageous “probability change state per auxiliary”. Under the game state in which this normal symbol probability changing function is operating (probability per assist change state), since the lottery probability per auxiliary is in a high probability state, auxiliary hits are likely to occur, and open-game games frequently occur. Thus, the operating rate is improved so that the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol probability changing function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol time-shortening function described later, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time-shortening function. This is the same condition as the operation end condition.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a “variable time reduction (hereinafter referred to as“ time reduction ”) function” in which the main control unit 20 serves as its function unit. There are two types of time-shortening functions relating to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol time-shortening functions”) and time-shortening functions relating to ordinary symbols (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol time-shortening functions”).

  The special symbol time reduction function shortens the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts to change until it is fixedly displayed (average fluctuation time of the special symbol)). This is a function that generates a special symbol short-time state. Under the gaming state in which the special symbol time reduction function is activated (special symbol short time state), the average variation time of the special symbol in one special symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, the average time required for the variation without reach) Is reduced from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), a lottery number improvement state is achieved in which the number of big lotteries per unit time is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol may be shortened due to the difference in the number of suspended balls, but in this case, the special symbol short-time state does not occur, This is due to the control process.

  The normal symbol time shortening function is the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from the start of normal symbols to the final display (average fluctuation time of normal symbols)) This is a function to generate a shortened "normal symbol time short state". Under the game state in which the normal symbol short-time function is activated (normal symbol short-time state), the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol fluctuation display game is shortened (for example, from 10 seconds to 1 second). In other words, the number of lotteries is improved so that the number of lotteries per auxiliary time per unit time is improved as compared with the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation time may be shortened due to the difference in the number of suspended balls, but in this case, the normal symbol short-time state does not occur. This is due to the control process. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol short-time function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol short-time function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol short-time function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions.

  Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with an “open extension function” in which the main control unit 20 serves as its function unit.

  The open extension function is a function for generating an “open extension state” in which the opening operation period (at least one of the opening time and the number of opening times of the movable blade piece 47) of the movable blade piece 47 of the normal variation prize winning device 41 is extended. is there. This open extended state is referred to as a so-called “electric chew support state”. Under the gaming state (open extended state) in which the open extension function is operating, the opening operation period (starting port open state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from 0.2 seconds to 1.7 seconds, for example. The number of times of opening and closing is extended, for example, from once (when the opening extension function is not in operation) to twice (when the opening extension function is in operation), and the movable wing piece 47 per unit time than in the normal gaming state. The operating rate is improved so that the operating rate is improved. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the opening extension function is the same condition as the operation start condition of the special symbol time shortening function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time shortening function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions. Therefore, during the open extended state, the normal symbol probability changing function and the normal symbol time-shortening function also act, so that a gaming state in which the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 is remarkably improved occurs.

  By operating one or more types of the functions as described above, it is possible to change the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. Here, in this embodiment, the operation start conditions of the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol short-time function, and the open extension function are the same conditions as the operation start conditions of the special symbol short-time function, so each function operates at the same opportunity. Will do. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability changing function, the special symbol time shortening function, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time shortening function, and the open extension function are referred to as “probability changing state”. A gaming state from which the special symbol probability changing function is removed is referred to as a “short-time state”, and a gaming state in which only the special symbol probability changing function is activated is referred to as a “latent probability varying state (latent probability or latent probability state)”, and not all functions are in operation. The (non-operating) state is referred to as “normal gaming state”. Therefore, when paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, if the gaming state is “short-time state” or “normal gaming state”, the jackpot lottery probability becomes “low probability state” and the gaming state becomes “latency probability”. In the case of “state” or “probability change state”, the jackpot lottery probability becomes “high probability state”. In addition, a winning game is generated when the big prize opening is opened and closed during the winning, but all the functions are deactivated and basically placed under the same gaming state as the normal gaming state.

(3-2-1. High base gaming state)
In the present embodiment, the functions related to the normal symbol, that is, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol short-time function, and the open extension function are the same conditions as the operation start conditions of the special symbol short-time function. Will operate at the same opportunity. However, when attention is paid to the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time-shortening function, and the open extension function, respectively, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operating rate of the movable blade piece 47 is improved. Since the operating rate is improved and the winning frequency at the lower start opening 35 is increased, the gaming condition is that the starting condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the big win lottery result is higher than the normal gaming state. "Base gaming state (starting condition improved state)". The “high base gaming state” here refers to a gaming state when a function relating to a normal symbol is activated, and a function relating to a special symbol, that is, at least one of a special symbol probability changing function and a special symbol time-shortening function is activated. It is different from the game state when doing.

  On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to special symbols (special symbol probability changing function and special symbol short-time function) individually, when the above special symbol probability changing function is activated, the jackpot lottery probability becomes “high probability state” which is higher than the normal gaming state. When the special symbol short-time function is activated, the special symbol variation display game has a “special symbol short-time state” in which the digestion time of the special symbol variation display game is earlier than the normal gaming state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the “high base gaming state” in which the starting frequency of the special symbol variation display game is higher than that in the normal gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, as an example of the “high base game state”, an electric chew support state to which at least an extension function is provided is treated as a “high base game state”. Under the electric chew support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normally variable winning device 41 is improved, the winning rate to the lower start opening 35 is increased, and the winning frequency per unit time is increased. Therefore, the game state is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the electronic chew support state is not set (low base game state). Focusing on the presence / absence of the electric chew support state, if the game state is “normal game state” or “latent probability state”, “no electric chew support state” (hereinafter referred to as “no electric support state”) is obtained. When the game state is “time-short state” or “probability change state”, the state is “electric chew support state present (hereinafter referred to as“ electric support state ”)”. In addition, the gaming state that pays attention to the operating status of each function (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time shortening function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time shortening function, and open extension function) related to the determination of jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support Is referred to as “internal gaming state”.

  Here, in this embodiment, in order to realize various effects related to the internal game state such as the normal game state, the latent state, the short time state, the probability change state, etc., one internal game state is further classified and managed. doing. For example, the above-mentioned “normal game state (low probability / no electric support)” includes a plurality of normal game states such as “normal state” and “CHANCE ZONE state (hereinafter abbreviated as“ CZ ”)”, and different games Managed as a state.

  As a result, the operating status of each function (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time shortening function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time shortening function, and open extension function) related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability or the presence or absence of electric support, etc. In the case of paying attention to the “game state”, the “normal state” and “CZ (internal game state is the normal game state CZ: CZ (normal)) regarding the variation pattern of the special symbol even though it is the same“ normal game state ”. ) ”(A variation pattern selection mode (a variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) described later: see FIG. 32)), and a desired variation pattern can be selected from one or more types of variation patterns. Due to this, on the side of the production control unit 24, the production mode corresponding to each game state of “normal state” and “CZ” is provided. (The details of the effect mode will be described later.) As a result, on the effect control unit 24 side, the “normal state” is provided. And “CZ” are provided corresponding to each game state, and an effect under these effect modes can be generated (details of the effect mode will be described later). For the “latent state”, a plurality of types of game states (variation pattern selection modes) of “latent state” and “CZ (internal gaming state is CZ: CZ (latent probability))” are provided, They are managed as different game states.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the “internal gaming state” includes a normal gaming state, a latent probability state, a short time state, and a probability variation state, and a gaming state relating to the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol (in other words, regarding the determination of the effect) The types of “gaming state (variation pattern selection mode)” when paying attention to (gaming state) are larger than the types of internal gaming state, normal state, CZ (normal), latent state, CZ (latent state), A short-time state and a probability variation state are included. In this way, the “internal gaming state” focusing on the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support is different from the “gaming state (variation pattern selection mode)” focusing on the determination of the variation pattern of special symbols (decision of production). By managing it as a game, you can select a special symbol variation pattern that corresponds to the variation pattern selection mode even under the same internal gaming state, so the variation time of the symbol variation display game (game digestion time) And can make a big change to the production. For convenience of explanation, unless otherwise specified in the present specification, the internal game state is distinguished from a game state (variation pattern selection mode) when attention is paid to determination of a special symbol variation pattern (decision of production). In some cases, it is simply referred to as a “gaming state”.

<4. About winning>
Next, “winning” of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

(4-1. Type per hit)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs a big hit lottery (win lottery) for multiple types of hits. The hit types are “16R long open probability variable big hit”, “12R long open positive variable big hit”, “12R long open non-probable big hit”, “5R long open positive variable big hit”, “5R long open non-probable big hit”, “2R Plural types of hits such as “short open latent big hit”, “2R short open non-probable big hit A, B”, and “small hit (small hit A, small hit B)” are included.

  Among these hits, "16R long open probability variable big hit", "12R long open positive variable big hit", "12R long open non-probable big hit", "5R long open positive variable big hit", "5R long open non-probable big hit", "2R short "Open-latency big hit" and "2R short open non-probable big hit A, B" are hits belonging to the "big hit" type that triggers the operation of the condition device, and "small hit" does not trigger the condition device. Is a hit belonging to the category. Here, the “condition device” is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for performing a round game, in which a combination of specific special symbols is displayed or a game ball is displayed. The one that operates when it passes a specific area in the big prize opening. Each of the hits belonging to the above-mentioned “big hit” type and the hits belonging to the “non-big hit” type (small hits) both have an opportunity to shift to a special gaming state (winning game) with opening / closing operation of the big prize opening (occurrence trigger) It is a hit. Therefore, hits belonging to the “non-big hit” type are different from simple “losing”.

  Of the hits belonging to the above "big hit" type, "16R long open probability variable big hit", "12R long open positive change big hit", "5R long open positive change big hit", and "2R short open latent positive big hit" are the end of the big hit game This is a jackpot type belonging to “probability big hit” in which a later gaming state is shifted to a gaming state with at least a high probability state (in this embodiment, a probability variation state or a latent probability state). In addition, “12R long open non-probable big hit” and “2R short open non-probable big hit A, B” indicate that the game state after the big hit game is at least a game state with a low probability state (in this embodiment, a normal game) The big hit type belonging to the “non-probable big hit” to be shifted to a state or a short-time state). The small hits A to B are hit types for continuing the gaming state at the time of winning. The “small hit” is a hit belonging to the “non-big hit” type, but for convenience of explanation, unless otherwise necessary, it is treated as one of the big hit types in the same row without being distinguished from the above big hit.

  Among the above-mentioned hit types, the hit types for the big hit lottery on the special figure 1 side (special symbol fluctuation display game 1 side) include “12R long open probability variable big hit”, “12R long open non-probable big hit”, “5R “Long Open Probability Big Hit”, “5R Long Open Non-Probable Big Hit”, “2R Short Open Latent Profit Big Hit”, “2R Short Open Non-Probable Big Hit”, and “Small Hit AB” are included (see FIG. 30). In addition, the hit types of the big hit lottery on the special figure 2 side (special symbol variation display game 2 side) are “16R long open probability variable big hit”, “12R long open positive variable big hit”, and “2R short open non-probable big hit B”. (See FIG. 30).

  In the present embodiment, the winning type relating to the special figure 1 side executes a hit game for opening the “lower big prize opening 40”, and in the case of the winning type relating to the special figure 2 side, the “right big prize opening 50”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special figure 1 side may include a winning type for executing a hit game in which the “right big prize opening 50” is opened as the winning type, and the hit type on the special figure 2 side may be “lower big winning opening 40”. The hit type for executing the hit game may be included. Further, it may include a special hit type that opens either the “right big prize opening 50” or the “lower big prize opening 40” according to the number of rounds. For example, in the case of a 16R type big hit type, for example, the lower major winning opening 40 is opened from the 1Rth to a predetermined number of rounds (for example, the 8th round), and the subsequent rounds (for example, the 9th to the 9th rounds) In the 16th round, a big hit game such as opening the right big prize opening 50 can be executed.

(4-2. Per game)
Next, the winning game based on each hit described above will be described.

(4-2-1.16R long opening chance change hit game)
The winning game with 16R long open probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “16R probability variable big hit game”) is a big hit with a prescribed number of rounds of 16 rounds. The maximum opening time is set to “29.8 seconds” of “long opening time”. Here, the “long open time” means that there is a possibility that the number of winnings in the big winning opening within the time will reach the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9) (the possibility of reaching the maximum number of winnings is sufficient). It is determined as a time span. The opening / closing pattern in which the maximum opening time is set to the “long opening time” is referred to as a “long opening pattern”.

  After the start of the round game and the right big prize opening 50 is opened, when the above maximum opening time has elapsed, the right big prize opening 50 is closed and the current round game is finished, and the specified number of rounds is 16 rounds. If it has not reached, after a predetermined time (interval between rounds) has elapsed, the next round game is entered. However, if the number of game balls (the number of winning balls) won in the right big prize opening 50 reaches the maximum number (for example, 9) even before the maximum opening time has elapsed, the right big prize opening 50 is closed. Then, after the current round game is finished and a predetermined time (interval time between rounds) has elapsed, the next round game is entered. In other words, when the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed, or when the number of game balls won in the grand prize opening reaches the maximum number of winnings, the opened big prize opening is met Is closed, and the game is shifted to the next round game with a predetermined interval time ("12R long open probability variable big hit", "5R long open non-probable big hit", "2R short open latent" described later) The same applies to the "probable hit", "12R long open non-probable big hit", and "2R short open non-probable big hit A, B").

  The above-mentioned “interval time between rounds” between round games is “remaining ball discharge time” and “interval time before opening” after the remaining ball discharge time elapses until the next round game starts. Consists of. The above “remaining ball discharge time” refers to an extra time (for example, 1980 ms) for discharging the remaining balls inside the big winning opening after the closing of the big winning opening. As the time width, the big winning opening is closed. Sufficient time is ensured until the game ball won immediately before passing through the winning detection switch (the lower large winning port sensor 42a or the right large winning port sensor 52a) formed in the large winning port. Also, the “interval before opening” means that after the above-mentioned remaining ball discharge time has passed and the remaining balls in the big winning opening are considered discharged, the big winning opening in the next round game is released. A time width (for example, 20 ms) that defines the interval interval. Even if the lower major prize opening sensor 42a or the right major prize opening sensor 52a detects a game ball during the pre-opening interval, the game ball is regarded as an illegal prize due to fraud, and predetermined error processing (error due to illegal prize) Process). In the present embodiment, an illegal winning can be monitored more strictly by providing the pre-opening interval time after the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed.

(4-2-2.12R Long Opening Probability Game by Winning Big Hit)
The winning game with 12R long open probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “12R probability variable big hit game”) is basically the same as the content of the 16R probability variable big hit game described above except that the prescribed number of rounds is twelve. Therefore, the 12R probability variable big hit game is a big hit game to which a relatively lower profit is given than the 16R probability variable big hit game (in this embodiment, there is a difference in the number of winning balls for four rounds). In the case of the present embodiment, as already explained, in the case of 12R probability variation big hit game on the special figure 1 side, a winning game is executed in which the “lower prize winning opening 40” is opened, and the 12R probability variable big hit on the special figure 2 side is executed. In the case of a game, the game is executed when the “right prize opening 50” is opened.

(4-2-312R long open non-probable big hit game)
The winning game with 12R long open non-probable big hit (hereinafter referred to as “12R non-probable big hit game”) is a big hit with a prescribed round number of 12 rounds, but the big hit game mode differs depending on the number of rounds. Specifically, in the period when the jackpot game is executed, the first half section (first half) from the first round to the specific number of rounds, and the second half section (second half) from the next round to the last round The game operation mode is different.

  Specifically, out of 12R (round) which is the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds), the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to “29.8 seconds” of the long winning time up to the 10R of the first half. On the other hand, after the 11th R in the second half, the maximum opening time of the big prize opening is set to a short opening time of “0.1 second”. The “short opening time” is defined as a time width in which it is difficult to win the big prize opening itself, unlike the above long opening time. Unless specifically required, the opening / closing pattern in which the maximum opening time is set to the “short opening time” is referred to as a “short opening pattern”. However, an opening / closing pattern in which the maximum opening time is set to be shorter than the “long opening time” may be referred to as a “short opening pattern”.

  In the present embodiment, a prize is awarded within the “short opening time” according to the performance of the game ball falling direction changing member or the launching device (for example, the rate of continuous firing speed of the game ball per unit time) or the position where the big prize opening is formed. It is difficult or impossible to reach the “maximum winning number” which is one of the mouth closing conditions. In the 12R non-probability big hit game, it is only possible to obtain award balls (profit) up to the 10th R in the first half where the maximum opening time is set to the long opening time.

  Therefore, in the case of the above-mentioned “12R non-probable big hit game”, the first half (from 1R to 10R) is “12R probable big hit game” and the mechanical game action that appears on the appearance (open / close operation pattern of the lower prize winning opening 40) ) Are the same (may be substantially the same) hit game operation mode, but the second half (after 11R) has a different hit game operation mode (short open pattern). The 12R non-probability big hit game is a big hit game to which a relatively lower profit is given than the 12R probable big hit game (in this embodiment, there may be a difference in the number of winning balls for three rounds).

(4-2-3.2R short-release latent big hit, 2R short-open non-probable big hit A, B hit game)
2R short open latent hit per game (hereinafter referred to as “2R latent open big hit game”) and 2R short open non-probable big hit (2R short open non-probable big hit A, B) per game (hereinafter referred to as “2R normal Is called a big hit with a prescribed number of rounds, and in this embodiment, the maximum opening of the big winning opening (the lower big winning opening 40 or the right big winning opening 50) in one round game is opened. The time is set to 0.1 seconds of “short open time”. Therefore, in 2R latent big hit games or 2R short-open non-probable big hits, the big prize opening is only opened for a short open time (0.1 seconds), and the number of round games is also small, which is practically two rounds. Is a big hit game with almost no prize balls (Accurately, there is a possibility of winning a big prize opening, but the maximum opening time of the big winning opening of each round game is short opening time ) Is less likely, and virtually no prize balls are obtained.

  In addition, the hit effect during the 2R latent probability hit game of the special figure 1 side (the effect that appears during the hit game) is the hit in the 2R short open non-probable big hit A of the hit type of the special figure 1 side. An effect that is substantially the same (same or very similar) as the medium effect appears. In other words, the action related to the hit game including the mid-game effect due to the 2R short-opening latent big hit shows substantially the same behavior as the game action related to the 2R short-open non-probable big hit A. It is difficult or impossible to identify whether or not a hit game is being executed. As a result, even if the 2R short-open uncertain big hit A is won, it is possible to give the player a sense of winning expectation for the “2R short-open latent big hit” that will trigger the transition to the high probability state. It has become.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the number of award balls in the big hit game, in other words, the number of game balls that can be obtained by the player (the number of winning prize balls) is different according to the type of the big hit. Yes. In addition, although it has been described that the maximum opening time is set to the short opening time in the 2R latent probability big hit game and the 2R short opening non-probability variable big hit, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same long open time as 16R probability variable big hit game or 12R probability variable big hit game or the like may be set so that a winning to the big prize opening is allowed to some extent, and it is difficult or impossible to reach the maximum winning number. Although it is possible, it is set to an opening time (intermediate opening time shorter than the long opening time and longer than the short opening time: for example, 5 seconds) that can secure a certain number of winning balls to the big winning opening. Also good. Further, in order to vary the number of winning balls (special prize number: T1Y), the maximum number of winning prizes may be set to a different number depending on the type of jackpot.

(4-2-4. Winning game with small hits (A / B with small hits))
In the hit game with small hits A and B (hereinafter referred to as “small hit game”), the big prize opening is opened twice, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening per round is 2R latent big hit game It is set to 0.1 seconds, which corresponds to the maximum opening time, and the interval time between the closing of the first big winning opening and the opening of the second big winning opening is between rounds of 2R latent big hit games and 2R normal big hit games The same time width as the interval time is set. Regarding the closing condition of the big prize opening 50 in the small hit game, the maximum opening and closing operation time of the big prize opening 50 (opening and closing operation time for executing the opening of the big prize opening 50 twice) has passed or the large winning opening 50 is closed. This is a case where one of the conditions is satisfied when the number of game balls won in the winning opening 50 reaches the maximum number (for example, 9). In the case of this embodiment, since the number of game balls won in the big winning opening 50 does not reach the maximum winning number within the maximum opening / closing operation time, the maximum opening / closing operation time of the big winning opening 50 actually passes. After that, specifically, after a series of opening / closing operations of the big prize opening is executed, the small hit game is ended. In other words, during the small hit game, the opening / closing operation of the big prize opening 50 captured from the appearance is controlled in substantially the same manner of operation as the 2R latent big hit game or the 2R normal big hit game. Yes. Since the small hits A and B are the big hit lottery objects on the special figure 1 side, the lower big prize opening 40 is controlled to open and close during the small hit game.

  Since this “small hit” is a hit type that does not trigger the operation of the “condition device”, a round game like “big hit” is not executed. However, by controlling the opening and closing of the big prize opening in substantially the same manner of operation as the 2R latent big hit game, a pseudo round game is realized, and it looks as if 2R short open latent big hit and 2R short open non- It makes it possible to disguise as if you were won by a promising big hit.

  In the case of the present embodiment, since the small hits A and B are the big hit lottery objects on the special figure 1 side, the hit during the small hit game is the hit in the 2R latent big hit game or the 2R normal big hit game A An effect that is substantially the same (same or very similar) as the effect appears. In other words, the action related to the small hit game including the hit effect shows substantially the same behavior as the game action related to the 2R short open latency big hit or the 2R short open non-probable big hit A, and as viewed from the player side, It is difficult or impossible to identify whether or not a hit game is being executed. As a result, even when winning a small hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of winning expectation for the “2R short open latent big hit” that is a trigger for the transition to the high probability state. Further, if the player is in a high probability state, the player can be given a sense of tension to fall to the low probability state by winning the 2R short-open uncertain big hit A.

(4-3. Game state after the end of the game)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the gaming state to be transferred after each winning game will be described. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state that shifts after each winning game. Each game state shown is not an internal game state but a game state in which attention is paid to the variation pattern selection mode.

(4-3-1.16R, 12R, 5R game state after the end of the game with a promising big hit)
After the end of the 16R, 12R, or 5R probability variation big hit game, as shown in the figure, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the win, it is shifted to the “probability changed state”. When this “probability change state” is reached, until the next big hit is confirmed (until “big hit is confirmed”, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the big hit, and the occurrence of the big hit game is confirmed. Or, it may be a case where a big hit is won.

  Note that the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of special symbol variation display operations (hereinafter abbreviated as “special symbol variation frequency”)) is a predetermined number of times (the special symbol variation display game 1). 2 and the total number of executions (total number of fluctuations of the special symbols 1 and 2)): 70 times) until the end or until the big hit is determined within the predetermined number of times, the certain variation state is continued. When the special symbol variation display game is finished without confirming the big win, the probability variation state is terminated and the next game is shifted to the “normal state (the internal game state is the normal game state)”. May be. In this case, it becomes a so-called “frequency change probability changer”.

(4-3-2.5R, 12R non-probable big hit game state after the game)
After the 5R, 12R non-probable big hit game, as shown in the figure, the game is shifted to the “time saving state” regardless of the game state at the time of winning the win. When this “short time state” is reached, the short time state until the special symbol variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 60 times) or until the big hit is determined within the predetermined number of times. When the special symbol variation display game is finished without determining the big hit within the predetermined number of times, the short time state is finished and the next game is shifted to the “normal state”.

(4-3-3.2R gaming state after the end of the game with a big hit probability)
After the 2R latent large hit game, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of winning the hit. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning is “normal state”, it is “CZ (latency probability)”, and if it is latent state, it is “latent probability state”. If it is, the state is shifted to the “probable change state”. If the game state at the time of winning is a latent probability state, the game may be shifted to a probability change state instead of the latent probability state.

  In the present embodiment, when the game state at the time of winning is “CZ”, the following transition control is performed according to the internal game state. If the game state at the time of winning is “CZ (normal)” in which the internal game state is the normal game state, the internal game state is shifted to “CZ (latency)” in the latent state, and the internal game When the state is the latent state “CZ (latent state)”, the state is shifted to the “latent state”. Note that “CZ (latency probability)” in which the internal gaming state is in the latent state is managed as the same gaming state (variation pattern selection mode) as “CZ (normal)” in which the internal gaming state is in the normal gaming state. The entity is “CZ” whose internal gaming state is “latent state”.

  In the case of “CZ (latency probability)” after the end of the 2R latent probability winning game, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game is until a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) or within the predetermined number of times. The “CZ (latency probability)” continues until a big hit is made, and when the special symbol fluctuation display game is finished without the big hit being determined within the predetermined number of times, the “CZ (latency probability)” is finished and the next The game is shifted to the “latent state”, and the fact that it is in the latent state is revealed to the player from the standpoint of production. In the drawing, “CZ (4 times: latent probability)” is indicated. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, after the 2R latent large hit game is finished, in order to give a sense of expectation of transition to the latent probability state, the 2R short open latency is related to the game state after the small hit game described later. The number of continuations of “CZ” due to the big hit is set to a larger number of continuations than those due to the 2R short open non-probable big hit or the small hit.

(4-3-4.2R game state after the normal big hit game)
After the 2R normal big hit game, as shown in the drawing, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of winning the hit. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning is “normal state”, it is “CZ (normal)”; It is supposed to be migrated. If the gaming state at the time of winning is “CZ”, the game is shifted to “CZ (normal)”.

  In addition, when it becomes “CZ (normal)” after the end of the 2R normal big hit game, the big hit is made until the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game ends a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) or within that number. The “CZ (normal)” continues until the game is confirmed, and when the special symbol variation display game is finished without confirming the big hit within the number of times, the “CZ” is finished and the “normal state” is started from the next game. From the standpoint of production, the player is clarified that the normal state is reached. However, the number of CZ continuations set by the 2R short open non-probable big hit is set to be smaller (3 times) than the number set by the 2R short open probable big hit (4 times).

  In this embodiment, the 2R latent big hit game and the 2R normal big hit game have the same or substantially the same hit game operation mode, and the game state after the end of the hit game is different in internal game state, but the variation pattern is determined. With regard to (decision of production), it is possible to shift to “CZ” managed as the same gaming state (variation pattern selection mode). Therefore, not only during the winning game but also during the predetermined game period after the winning game (in the case of this embodiment, at least three times), the player side does not know which winning is won I have to. This makes it possible to give a sense of expectation and tension to a high probability state.

(4-4. Game state after the small hit game)
After the small hit game, the internal gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is, and the transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small hit winning is not performed. Therefore, the internal game state at the time of winning the small hit and the internal game state after the small hit game are both the same internal game state. This is different from “big hit” in which the transition control of the internal gaming state can be performed.

  However, in the present embodiment, the transition control of the “internal game state” due to the small win is not performed, while the “game state (variation pattern selection mode (variation pattern change mode) related to determination of the variation pattern of special symbols (decision of production)” is not performed. The transfer control of the minute designation number (Tcode))) 'is performed. Using such a transition mode, for example, when the gaming state after the small hit game and the gaming state after the 2R latent large hit game are shifted to the same gaming state, the effect mode in which both perform the same presentation Even after the small hit game, it is possible to generate an effect under the same effect mode as after the 2R latent large hit game. As a result, the player can be given a sense of rushing into a high-probability state that the player may win the 2R short-release latent big hit and move to the “latent state”. ing. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 4, the gaming state after the end of each small hit game when the small hits A and B are won will be described in detail.

  Here, the “variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)” is data that functions as a “variation pattern selection mode” and identifies the current gaming state. The “variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)” is mainly used when a variation pattern of a special symbol is selected (see step S412 (special symbol variation pattern creation processing) in FIG. 12 described later). Work as a 'mode'. Referring to the variation pattern allocation designation number table of FIG. 32, when the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is “00H”, it indicates “normal (normal state)”, and when it is “01H”. “Probability change state (probability change)” is indicated, “02H” indicates “latent probability state”, “03H” indicates “time reduction state (time reduction)”, and “06H” indicates CZ. This variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is changed when there is a change in the gaming state. Therefore, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is different from data identifying the internal gaming state itself, such as a gaming state determination number (YJ) described later, in that it identifies the gaming state as described above.

(4-4-1. Game state after the small hit game when the small hit A is won)
After the small hit game by the small hit A, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of winning the hit. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning is “normal state” or “CZ”, the game state is shifted to “CZ”, and another game state (latency probability state, short time state, or probability change state) In this case, there is no transition of the gaming state, and the gaming state at the time of winning is continued.

  With regard to the small hit A, when the game state at the time of winning is “normal state”, when shifting to “CZ”, the number of times that CZ is continued (hereinafter referred to as “CZ continuation number”), A predetermined number of times (for example, twice) is set. When the game is shifted to “CZ” by winning the small hit A, the “CZ” is displayed until the end of the CZ continuation number in which the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game is set or until the big hit is determined within the number of times. "" Is continued, and when the special symbol variation display game is finished without determining the big hit within the number of times, "CZ" is finished. When the game state when “CZ” is ended is “CZ (latency probability)”, the game is shifted from the next game to “latency probability state” and is “CZ (normal)”. The game is shifted from the next game to the “normal state” (the same applies to the small hit B described later).

(4-4-2. Game state after the small hit game when winning the small hit B)
After the small hit game by the small hit B, the same shift control as in the case of the small hit A is performed (see the column of the small hit B in FIG. 4). However, the number of CZ continuations set by the small hit B is set to be larger than the small hit A (two times) (for example, three times).

  The “CZ” is a gaming state that can be shifted to even after the 2R latent big hit game is over. For this reason, when the game is shifted to “CZ” due to the 2R short open latent large win or the small hit A or the small hit B win, an effect mode (CZ effect mode) that produces an effect corresponding to “CZ”. In the production, it is concealed whether the internal gaming state is a “latency probability state”, that is, whether the jackpot winning probability state is a high probability state or a low probability state. . In this embodiment, although there is a difference in the operating state of the special symbol probability changing function which is an internal function between the normal gaming state and the latent probability state, the mechanical gaming operation state appearing on the appearance is the same state. Give attention to the player in a high-probability state by paying attention (both are 'no power support state') and not allowing the player to perceive what kind of game state they are in terms of performance. Can be done.

  Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the number of CZ continuations, when “2R short open latency big hit” is won, the CZ continuation number “4 times” is set, and as a result, the variation number is limited to 4 times CZ (CZ 4 times) Will be transferred to. Then, after this CZ is completed (however, when CZ is completed four times without winning a big or small hit during CZ), the gaming state is shifted from CZ to the latent state. In other words, with respect to the production mode, the CZ production mode (secret production mode) in which the current jackpot lottery probability state (internal game state) is a secret state is shifted to a production mode in which the game state is definitely notified. Therefore, when “CZ” continues four times, the “latent state” becomes clear. In this connection, if you win either small hit A or small hit B where the big win lottery probability state does not change, depending on the winning small hit, from 4 times by 2R short open latent big hit The number of CZ continuations (2 to 3 times) is set to be smaller. Thereby, every time the game in the CZ is digested, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension that the “hidden state” may reach four times when it becomes deterministic. Thereby, whenever the game in CZ is digested, the expectation that the jackpot lottery probability state is a high probability state increases, and it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement.

(4-5. About winning in CZ)
In this embodiment, when winning 2R short open uncertain variation latent big hit or small hit A or B in “CZ”, CZ continuation corresponding to the won win is set as the new CZ continuation count. The number of times is reset. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of CZ continuations is 4 or more when the 2R short-open latent probability is won. For example, if you win the small hit B and move to CZ (CZ: 3 times), and you win the small hit B again in the third time in the CZ, the CZ continuation count 3 times will be reset by the small hit B win, The CZ period is extended to a maximum of 6 times of “CZ period 3 times + reset 3 times”. In other words, even if CZ is continued four times, it is not always clear that the state is in a latent state, and a surprisingly rich game can be created.

  Of course, when “CZ” is continued four times, it may be configured that it is clear that the state is in the latent state. For example, in the normal state, after shifting to “CZ (normal)” due to winning at the small hit, as long as the user stays in the “CZ (normal)”, 2R short open non-probability latent big hit, Even if one of the small hits A and the small hit B is re-winned, the “CZ (normal)” can be configured so that the number of continuations does not exceed a maximum of three. In addition, when “CZ (latency probability)” is selected as one of 2R short open non-probability variation latent large hit, small hit A, and small hit B, the CZ continuation count corresponding to the hit type is not newly set. It can be configured. Thereby, if “CZ” is continued four times, it is possible to create a game such that it is clear that the state is in the latent state.

  It is also possible to create a situation where the latent state becomes clear when the number of CZ continuations is less than 4. For example, if you win a 2R short open latent big hit during CZ and win a small hit A for the first time after the transition to “CZ (latent)”, the CZ continuation count “2 times” will be re- Once set, the CZ period will be reduced to “3 times”, which is less than the original “4 times”, once after the transition to “CZ (latency)” + 2 times re-set by winning a small hit. The After the CZ period ends, the gaming state is shifted from CZ to the latent state, and the effect mode described later can be shifted to the “latent state effect mode” for definite notification of the latent state. it can. Thereby, even if CZ does not continue four times, the latent state can be clarified, and thus it is possible to create a surprisingly rich game. As already explained, if the winning state is a 2R short-opening latent big hit and the gaming state at the time of winning is “CZ (latent probability)”, the game is shifted to the latent state after the winning game. Therefore, with respect to the production mode, the concealment production mode is terminated and the upgrade is made to the latent production mode. In this case as well, the latent state can be clarified with less than 4 CZ continuations.

  In “CZ” of the present embodiment, the number of CZ continuations is set to 4 times (the maximum number of the operation-suspended balls). The reason for ending “CZ” in a short period of time is that it is bothersome for the player to keep the gaming state secret for a long period of time because of the production relationship of encouraging the expectation of the high probability state. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of CZ continuations is stopped to be equal to or less than the maximum number of reserved balls, and a “short-term settlement-type production mode (production mode in which a gaming state is revealed in a short period)” is set.

(4-6. About fluctuation patterns in CZ)
In the present embodiment, for the “normal state”, the “short time state”, and the like, a variation pattern that defines a different variation time according to the number of suspended balls can be selected. However, a single loss variation pattern (CZ loss variation) is selected as the loss variation pattern that can be selected during CZ, regardless of the number of suspended balls. That is, the variation pattern of the same variation time is selected as the loss variation pattern selected during the CZ, regardless of the number of active balls. Thereby, when it is “losing” in CZ, the same time width, that is, the same effect time width is secured. In the case of winning, a hit variation pattern (CZ hit variation) having a longer variation time than the loss variation pattern is selected because the hit is reported. As described above, the reason why the variation variation pattern selected during CZ is set to the same variation time regardless of the number of operating balls is as follows.

  In general, even if there is no electric support, the number of balls that can be suspended can be changed in a relatively short time (in a general ball game machine, the operation is suspended during a single symbol variation display game. If there are many cases where the number of balls is increased by about 1 to 3), and if this is used to select a variation pattern according to the number of suspended balls, the presentation time (design) for each symbol variation display game The execution time of the variable display game) can be changed, and various effects can be generated. Such a gaming state includes a “normal state” and a “short-time state”.

  However, if the effect time of the symbol variation display game is made different depending on the number of activated balls, the effect time of the current symbol variation display game and the effect time of the next symbol variation display game are likely to be different. In a short period of time, the production time of the symbol variation display game changes frequently, and there is a continuous relevance effect (for example, a story-style production of a story tailored) across multiple symbol variation display games. It will be difficult to deploy. For example, in the CZ effect mode, when a story-like effect including a related story effect of multiple stories is displayed, if the effect times of all story effects are the same, this is continuously developed. It is easy to proceed (the process of selecting an effect on the effect control unit 24 side is facilitated and the effect control burden is reduced), but if the effect time changes according to the number of reserved balls, In relation to the development, for each story production, it is necessary to provide many productions corresponding to the number of active suspension balls of 0 to 3, and it is also necessary to produce productions with different production times and related expressions. As a result, the types of production patterns increase, and the production control burden associated with production selection processing on the production control unit 24 side increases.

  In addition, when a narrative-like effect such as the above is displayed, it is conceivable to use a pre-reading notice effect. However, since the pre-reading notice effect is a continuous notice effect for the number of active suspended balls, Depending on the start timing of the production, the number of existing operation hold memories will be different each time, and as in the case described above, the production time of the symbol variation display game will change frequently and the production with close relations will be developed continuously. It will be difficult to follow. In addition, since the pre-reading notice effect is a continuous notice effect that targets the number of currently activated balls, the number of executions of the pre-reading notice effect is likely to be different every time depending on the start timing of the pre-reading notice effect. For this reason, as in the present embodiment, the expectation of the latent state is increased as the number of continuous times of the CZ effect mode continues, or when the CZ effect mode continues for a predetermined number of times, the mode is shifted to the latent effect mode. It is impossible to make a definite notification that the state is in the latent state. In particular, the CZ effect mode works as an effect mode that can conceal the probability of winning a lottery, so under such an effect mode, it is possible to develop a narrative-like effect that enlivens the expectation of a high probability state. This is extremely effective in improving the fun of the game. In addition, the above-mentioned “story-style production” is, for example, a “battle production” in which a battle is developed while confronting the enemy, or a “story” (story) in which the contents of old stories and fairy tales are developed. Some sort of relationship between productions that can be developed during a specific period (during CZ), such as “production” and “participation (mission) production” of a player participation type that gives a predetermined command to the player every time the symbol variation display game is executed There is no particular limitation as long as an expression having a property can be made.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of the length of the production time as much as possible, a specific game state (CZ) in which the same variation pattern with the same variation time is selected regardless of the number of activated balls. The number of fluctuations that the specific gaming state can continue is fixed according to the winning type (2R short open latent big hit, 2R short open non-probable big hit, small hit A, small hit B) The development of the wind production is made easy so that the production control burden can be reduced.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as already demonstrated, the expectation to the latent state transition can be enhanced in accordance with the number of CZ continuations. And the upper limit number of times is set to 4 times of the same value of the maximum reserved storage number. The reason is as follows.

  First, when the secret effect mode such as the CZ effect mode is continued for a long period of time (for example, for several tens of games), until the player can be sure that the player is not in a latent state (high probability state) (for example, The secret production mode ends and the normal state is changed to the normal production mode where the normal state becomes definitive), and the game is placed in a situation where the number of games has to be consumed for a long period of time, which is disadvantageous for the player. . In particular, in recent years, there are many players who refrain from gaming machines in which the concealment effect mode continues for a long period of time. It is considered preferable to set the mode.

  Second, when determining the number of times that the concealment effect mode such as the CZ effect mode is to be continued, it is interesting that the effect made under the concealment effect mode is a continuous notice effect such as a “prefetching notice effect” described later. It is effective in improving. In other words, it can be said that it is preferable that the effect made in the concealment effect mode is pretending to be like the pre-reading notice effect. This will be described as follows.

  Since the pre-reading notice effect is a continuous notice effect for the existing operation holding ball, the number of executions is limited to the maximum number of reserved memories (four times). Focusing on this point, the CZ continuation count is set within a range of four times of the maximum reserved storage number so that the player can perform the performance under the CZ production mode as if the pre-reading notice production is performed. . This is not because many players are engaged in the game while paying attention to the on-hold display that informs the number of balls on hold, but the game is usually performed while paying attention to the notice effect that is displayed at a position that is larger than the on-hold display and easy to see. As mentioned above, and as described above, the number of active reserved balls increases by 1 to 3 even during the period of one symbol variation display game, and the number of active reserved balls changes in a short period of time. This is because, for example, there is a high possibility that the number of operation holding balls increases to 2 to 4 at the start of the next game even if there is one operation holding ball at the time of entering the CZ. In this embodiment, by limiting the number of CZ continuations within the range of the maximum number of reserved memories, an effect made in the CZ effect mode is made to look like a pre-reading notice effect (continuous notice effect), can do.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, an effect mode (effect state) will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes for causing an effect related to the gaming state to appear, and is configured to be able to go back and forth between the effect modes. Specifically, the above-mentioned effect modes include “normal effect mode” when the game state is “normal game state”, “CZ effect mode” when “CZ”, and “latency state”. There are multiple types of performance modes according to each gaming state, such as “latent probability effect mode”, “short time effect mode” in the case of “short time state”, and “probability effect mode” in the case of “probability change state”. Is provided. In addition, “CZ (normal)” and “CZ (latency probability)”, which are the above “CZ”, are managed as the same gaming state, and in the case of “CZ (normal)” or “CZ (latency probability)” Are placed under the same “CZ (CHANCE ZONE) effect mode”. Thereby, from the standpoint of production, the current jackpot lottery probability state (internal game state) is set in a concealed state. The “CZ effect mode” serves as a “secret effect mode” in which the jackpot lottery probability state is concealed from the effect. Such a “secret display mode” works as an effect mode that gives the player an expectation of a high probability state.

  The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) includes a function unit (effect state transition control means) that controls transition between a plurality of types of effect modes. The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) designates a specific effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifically, the current gaming state (including the internal gaming state), or the gaming state "Specific effect control command (in this embodiment, a variation pattern designation command, a decoration symbol designation command, a game state designation command, a short-time end command, a predetermined command transmitted during hitting" (Applies to effect control commands including information related to gaming state managed by the main control unit, such as “big hit start interval command (big hit start command)” and “big hit end interval command (big hit end command)”) ” Transition control between multiple types of performance modes in a manner that maintains consistency with the gaming state managed on the main control unit 20 side And it is configured to function. The production control unit 24 has a function unit (production state management means) for managing the production mode related to the gaming state. Specifically, the above-mentioned specific production control command is used to grasp the internal gaming state and the variation pattern selection mode managed on the main control unit 20 side, and maintain this in a form consistent with the main control unit 20 side. Configured to be manageable.

(5-1-1. About production under each production mode)
In each effect mode, for example, the background display as the background of the decorative symbol variation display screen is different so that it can be understood what kind of game state the player is staying in the effect mode. A background image effect appears. In addition to changing the background image effect according to each effect mode, each effect mode can be achieved by using a decorative pattern with a different pattern corresponding to each effect mode, or by changing sound effects, light effects, etc. Can also be suggested.

  In addition, in the “CZ effect mode” corresponding to “CZ (normal)” and “CZ (latency probability)” of the present embodiment, the internal gaming state is the latent state (high probability state) or the normal gaming state (low probability). Although it has been described that it is the same production mode regardless of whether the state is), the present invention is not limited to this. “Genuine CZ effect mode (first secret effect mode)” under the latent state (high probability state) and “Gasse CZ effect mode” under the normal game state (low probability state) according to the internal game state (Second secrecy effect mode) "may be provided, and transition control to these effect modes may be possible. In this case, by changing the appearance rate of a specific effect (for example, a specific character image) between the “genuine CZ effect mode” and the “gase CZ effect mode”, any effect is given to the player. An inference element as to whether you are staying in the mode can be given.

(5-2. Advance notice)
Next, the notice effect will be described. The effect control unit 24, under the above-described effect mode, includes the contents of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, the variation pattern information included in at least the variation pattern designation command (for example, winning lottery result, reach effect) Based on the presence / absence and the variation time of the special symbol, etc., a function unit (notice performance appearance control means) that controls various notice effects related to the big hit lottery result under the aforementioned effect mode is provided. The notice appearance appearance control means of the present embodiment includes information (for example, winning lottery result information, presence / absence of reach effect, special stop symbol type information (information on the hit type) included in the variation pattern designation command and / or the decorative symbol designation command. , Various notice effects can be controlled on the basis of special symbol variation time information).

  Such notice effect forms include not only notice effects represented by “reach effects (effect forms related to reach variation patterns)” but also those that occur in association with these effects or independently. Basically, these production modes are such that a plurality of notice productions are generated in duplicate to increase the game content, and the reliability or expectation level (hereinafter, “ It is called “big win winning expectation”), and serves as a “drinking effect” for encouraging the player's winning expectation (winning winning expectation). Representative examples of the notice effect include “reach effect”, for example, “pseudo-continuous effect” and “prefetching notice effect”.

(5-2-1. Reach Production)
The “reach effect” refers to an effect mode with a so-called “reach state” (variable display mode with a reach state). Specifically, an effect mode in which the final result is derived and displayed via the reach state. Say. This reach production is a notice (suggestion) of the jackpot winning expectation degree (that there is a possibility of being a big hit), and includes a plurality of types of reach effects associated with the jackpot winning expectation degree. For example, when a reach effect with a specific reach state appears, the expectation of winning a big hit is relatively higher than when a reach effect with a normal reach state ('normal reach (N reach)') appears There is. Such reach production with a specific reach state is referred to as “super reach (SP reach)”. Many of these SP reaches have a longer production time (variation time) than the N reach in order to increase the expectation of a big hit. In addition, the SP reach can include a plurality of types of SP reach with different big win winning expectations. For example, “Weak SP Reach” and “Strong SP Reach”, which has a higher expectation of winning than the weak SP reach type. In addition, the weak SP reach type and the strong SP reach type include, for example, a plurality of types of weak SP reach such as weak SP reach 1 to 5 (the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation) and strong SP reach 1 to 3. A plurality of types of strong SP reach may be included.

(5-2-2. Pseudo-continuous production)
“Pseudo-ream” refers to a production mode with a pseudo continuous variation display state (pseudo variation) of a decorative symbol. “Pseudo variation” refers to a part or all of a decorative symbol in a decorative symbol variation display game. Is temporarily stopped (a change stop operation that looks as if it has been stopped), and a display operation such as executing a re-change display operation of the decorative symbol from the temporary stop state is performed once or multiple times (this In the embodiment, it means a variable display mode that is expressed as if a variable display operation to be set as one set is executed a plurality of times by repeating a maximum of four times. This is different from a “prefetching notice effect (continuous notice effect)” described later that is developed over a plurality of variable display operations.

  When performing this pseudo-variation, for example, a temporary reach state (a change display state that suggests that there is a possibility of a reach state before the temporary stop state, or that the reach symbol appears to stop) is formed. However, once it is temporarily stopped with a combination of symbols that are lost, it is displayed again, or it is replaced with a normal decorative symbol. A re-variable display operation can be performed after a temporary stop state with a combination of symbols including a special decorative symbol (pseudo continuous activation chance symbol). Such “pseudo-reams” are mainly determined in terms of their occurrence rate (probability of pseudo-reams corresponding to the number of pseudo-reams) so that the greater the number of pseudo-reams, the higher the chance of winning a big hit. It is used as a notice effect that suggests the possibility of production (expecting reach production) (in the case of this embodiment, it can be generated at the stage before the reach state is formed (the stage before reach production)). The higher the number of times, the higher the winning expectation level, that is, the occurrence of an SP reach type with a relatively high winning expectation level. The fluctuation display operation developed after the pseudo fluctuation is finished is also referred to as “main fluctuation”. For example, in the case of passing through the reach state, the reach state is formed by this main fluctuation, and the reach effect appears. The final game result is derived and displayed.

(5-2-3. Pre-reading notice effect)
In addition, the effect is that there is a possibility of winning a big hit for an operation holding ball (undigested operation holding ball) that has not been provided for the execution of the symbol change display game (the change display operation of the special symbol). There is a pre-reading notice effect that informs the degree of expectation in advance. Regarding the pre-reading notice effect, first, in the main control unit 20, when an operation holding ball is generated (when a start condition is satisfied), the operation holding ball is used for executing the symbol variation display game (variable display operation of a special symbol). Before being provided, a “pre-fetching determination” is performed to determine in advance the jackpot lottery result related to the operation-reserved ball (steps S319 to S320 in FIG. 10, S339 to S340 in FIG. 11 (random number determination process to special stop). Symbol data creation process), Steps S409 (random determination process for special electric accessory operation determination) to S410 (special stop symbol creation process) in FIG. 12).

  Furthermore, by using the result of the “pre-reading determination”, a “pre-reading variation pattern determination” is performed to determine in advance the variation pattern of the special symbol when the operation-pending ball is used for the execution of the symbol variation display game in the future. (Refer to S323 in FIG. 10 and S343 in FIG. 11 (starting port winning random number determination process)). The variation pattern of the special symbol determined in advance is referred to as a “prefetch variation pattern”. In this look-ahead variation pattern determination, for example, what reach state is reached through the “reach variation pattern” (for example, what reach production (for example, N reach, weak SP reach, strong SP reach), etc.) It is determined in advance whether it is a reach variation pattern to be issued) or a “normal variation pattern” that does not go through the reach state. Since the prefetch variation pattern is determined using at least the winning lottery result, the prefetch variation pattern information transmitted to the effect control unit 24 includes information such as the presence / absence of reach, the presence / absence of pseudo-ream and the number of times. In addition, information on whether the variation pattern at the start of variation is a “hit variation pattern” at the time of winning a big hit (including a small hit) or “losing variation pattern” at the time of winning a loss is also included. When the information about the prefetch variation pattern is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 performs effect control processing related to the prefetch notice effect. A series of processes for determining the prefetch variation pattern through the prefetch determination in this way is referred to as “prefetch determination”.

  Specifically, a “hold addition command” including information on the prefetch determination result (at least prefetch determination result information (information obtained by prefetching the winning result)) is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, and the hold addition command When the effect control unit 24 receives the effect, the effect control process related to the pre-reading notice effect based on the contents of the pre-reading determination result included in the command is performed. The upper byte side data for specifying the number and the lower byte side data for specifying the contents of the look-ahead variation pattern (see FIG. 5). However, the presentation control unit 24 does not necessarily perform pre-reading prediction when a pending addition command is received. If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided by lottery and the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executable, the design variation display that is performed at the timing when the action holding ball is generated or first is performed. At the same time as the start of the game or at a predetermined timing during the game, a pre-reading notice effect for the current operation holding ball is displayed.

  Note that the “look-ahead variation pattern” obtained by the pre-reading determination when the operation holding ball is generated does not necessarily need to be the “variation pattern at the start of variation” obtained when the operation holding ball is actually subjected to the change display operation. Absent. For example, a case where the variation pattern at the start of the variation is a variation pattern designating “SP reach 1” will be representatively described. In this case, the content specified by the look-ahead variation pattern is not the type of reach production of “strong SP reach 1”, but the “strong SP reach” type, which is the main point, specifically “strong SP reach”. It is possible to specify that the variation pattern (strong SP reach 1 to 3) of the same system as “SP reach” is classified as “strong SP reach type”. In the pre-reading notice effect related to this case, an effect mode related to the pre-read “strong SP reach type” appears. Therefore, the main information that is notified by the pre-reading notice effect is highly likely to occur in the future (a strong SP reach type in this case) for the symbol variation display game to be executed in the future. It is information such as whether it is low, in other words, whether or not the possibility of winning a big hit is high, by informing the player in advance before such action information is digested, In addition to the current symbol variation display game, the interest of the player is improved not only for the symbol variation display game to be executed in the future, but also for the fun of the game.

(Pre-reading notice effect: Fig. 5)
Next, referring to FIG. 5, the pre-reading notice effect mode will be described. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the prefetching notice effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 5, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of operation reserved balls on the special symbol 1 side in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (below the display area of the decorative symbol in the drawing). And a holding display area 77 for displaying the number of the operation holding balls on the special symbol 2 side are provided, and the presence or absence of the operation holding balls is lit (the operation holding balls are present: In the figure, “◯ (white circle mark)”) or in an unlit state (no action hold ball: circle shown by a broken line in the figure), information on the current number of hold balls is notified.

  The display regarding the presence / absence of the operation holding ball (hereinafter referred to as “holding display”) is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and a maximum of four holding displays can be displayed in each holding display area 76, 77. It has become. Specifically, in each of the hold display areas 76 and 77, the leftmost action hold ball is the action that occurred first (that is, the oldest) on the time axis among all the action hold balls in the hold display. Displayed as a holding ball. In the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, on-hold display units a1 to d1 (icon images) each including a hold icon (icon image) provided in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 by the same number (four) as the maximum hold storage number. A2-d2 (corresponding to the special symbol 2 side) are provided. These hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 are normally switched to the operation state (lighted state) by the same number, for example, three, as the number of operation hold balls existing when the prefetch determination is made. Therefore, this hold display unit functions as a hold display means for displaying the number of hold operations. However, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, the hold display mode of the corresponding one of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined prefetch notice display mode (dedicated hold display mode). As a result, this works as a means for generating a pre-reading notice effect.

  When receiving the hold addition command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 performs a pre-reading notice lottery for drawing whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is performed as part of the display control process related to the hold display. Do. In this pre-reading notice lottery, the action-holding ball related to the winning becomes the action-holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect (for example, the holding display part b2 with hatching in FIG. 5 is applicable). In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice lottery execution condition is based on the condition that there is no reach fluctuation pattern type among the pre-reading fluctuation patterns related to the existing operation holding ball. This is in order to avoid the fact that other reach effects intervene in the middle of the pre-reading notice effects that are continuously generated, the original look-ahead notice effects are cut off, and the effect of the effects becomes dilute. . The winning probability of the above-mentioned pre-reading notice lottery is higher than that of “losing”, and the probability of winning a hit type with a relatively high expectation degree of winning big wins is higher. Depending on whether or not to do, winning expectation degree to the big hit is shown.

  When the pre-reading notice lottery is won, among the holding icons in the holding display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the holding icon that is the object of the prefetching notice is notified from, for example, the blue color of the normal holding display. A “holding display changing system” pre-reading notice effect is performed in which the display changes to a special holding color such as yellow, green, red, or rainbow. Here, the blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors on the hold icon mean that the winning expectation is high in the order of these colors. (Accurate) This is a premium hold icon. This reserved color is determined by lottery based on the contents of the prefetch fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the “big hit” is more likely to be selected than the “losing”, and if the reach type has a relatively high expectation level for winning the big hit, the reserved color having the higher expected level of winning the big hit is selected with a high probability. It is like that. Note that the pre-reading notice effect mode of the “holding display changing system” is not limited to changing the holding color as described above, but may be changed to an icon imitating a special character. Such “holding display changing system” pre-reading notice effect is displayed when an operation holding ball is generated, and is therefore referred to as a “winning change system” pre-reading notice effect.

  The existing operation holding balls are sequentially digested with the execution of the symbol variation display game. At this time, in order to express that one operation hold ball has been consumed, the display position of the hold display portion corresponding to the existing operation hold ball is moved up (sequentially shifted to the left), and the display number is reduced. Although the control is performed, the above-described hold display mode different from normal continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the hold display. In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect of the above-described hold display change system (change system at the time of winning) makes a special notice effect appear over a plurality of symbol variation display games (multiple symbol variation display operations). It can be said that this is an aspect of “continuous notice effect”. This continuous notice effect is executed across a plurality of symbol variation display games, and is different from the notice effect performed during one symbol variation operation like a pseudo-ream.

  In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned “previous change system” pre-reading notice effect, the “variation start changing system” pre-reading notice effect that is triggered by the start of the symbol variation display game can be displayed. It has become. The “change start time change system” pre-reading notice effect is, for example, displaying a pre-reading-only notice image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, which is executed over a plurality of symbol fluctuation display games and continuously displayed. This is a pre-reading notice effect of “image display change system”. In other words, the pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system” is a symbol variation display game related to establishment of a start condition when a game ball wins a start opening and a start condition is satisfied during one symbol change display game. In addition to temporarily storing the right to execute and pre-fetching notice lottery regarding whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice effect, if this pre-reading notice lottery is won, all or a part of the reserved memory existing at that time, The symbol variation display game is expressed with some relevance. For example, in all or some of the symbol variation display games relating to the existing operation holding balls from the oldest operation holding ball to the operation holding ball subject to the pre-reading notice in the storage order, a pre-read-only notice image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (A preview image imitating the lightning bolt shown) is displayed. In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect of the “variation start change system” is the same as the “previous change system” pre-reading notice effect. It can be said that this is one aspect of the “notice effect”. In each symbol variation display game, a different preview image dedicated to prefetching may be used.

  In addition, the execution form of the pre-reading notice effect can be set to the following form. For example, (a) only the winning change system (holding display changing system) is executed, (b) only the change starting change system (image display changing system) is executed, (c) winning change system and change starting change Various execution forms such as executing both of the systems can be adopted. In the present embodiment, the configurations (a) to (c) are configured to be executable. Specifically, through the pre-reading notice lottery, the pre-reading notice effect of the winning change system and the pre-reading notice effect of the changing system at the start of variation are each independently drawn by lottery, and any of the pre-reading of (i) to (c) above is performed. It is determined whether to execute the notice effect or not to execute the prefetch notice effect itself. In other words, at least one look-ahead notice effect of the change system at the time of winning and the change system at the start of change can appear (the change system at the time of winning and the change system at the start of change can appear independently). .

  Therefore, even if the “previous change system” look-ahead notice effect appears, the “variation start change system” look-ahead notice effect does not necessarily appear, and vice versa. Even if the “system” prefetching notice effect appears, the “previous change system” prefetching notice effect does not necessarily appear. In addition, a pre-reading notice effect of “change system at winning (holding display changing system)” and a pre-reading notice effect of “change system at start of change (image display changing system)” may occur simultaneously. In addition, it is not necessary to configure any of the execution modes (b) to (c) above, and at the time of the pre-reading notice, only the winning change system (holding display changing system) is executed, (Indication display change system) only, or both the change system at the time of winning and the change system at the start of change are always executed. The execution form can be determined as appropriate. Note that the pre-reading notice effect may be displayed by other directing means. For example, the movable body accessory is operated in a pre-reading-only operation pattern, and is displayed as a pre-reading effect over a plurality of symbol variation display games. You may comprise so that it can be taken out.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the pre-reading notice effect mode woven by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

  In the figure (1), during the symbol variation display game (“↓” in the figure indicates that the ornamental symbol is being varied and displayed), the upper start opening 34 is won to win the special symbol 1 side operation holding ball. Suppose that the number has become three, and among the third, the action holding ball on which the second movement start operation is executed is the target of the pre-reading notice effect (in this case, the pre-reading notice lottery and change of the winning change system This shows a case in which a winning change was made in the pre-change notice lottery at the start. In addition, here, it is assumed that the first operation hold ball previously held and the third operation hold ball held later are operation hold balls that have not been pre-selected for the pre-reading notice lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 1A, the production control unit 24 displays a hold display of the second operation hold ball that has been subject to the pre-read notice, and a hold display dedicated to pre-read that is different from normal (hereinafter, “dedicated hold display”). (Referred to as). At this time, the hold display corresponding to the first and third operation hold balls that are not subject to the pre-reading notice is maintained as a normal hold display (hereinafter referred to as “normal hold display”). In the figure, when the display mode of the hold display of the second operation hold ball subject to the pre-reading notice is changed from the normal hold display (white circle (◯) mark) to the dedicated hold display (hatched circle). Show. This notifies the player that the pre-reading notice effect has been started. FIG. 1 (1) shows that the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is finished and the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed with “246” (the result is “lost”).

  The game progresses to (2) in the same figure, and the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol variation display game based on the operation reservation ball on the special symbol 1 side which is the first (oldest operation reservation ball). The action control ball 24 digests the action hold ball, and the production control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each action hold ball to the left with the start of the special symbol variation display game. It is set as the hold display mode which shows the state digested by one, and the decoration symbol fluctuation display game based on the first operation hold ball is started. At this time, as a pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system”, a background image for the pre-reading notice effect (for example, a lightning effect by displaying a lightning image simulating lightning: a dedicated notice image) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. Display. Thereby, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 has a display mode as shown in FIG.

  Then, the game progresses to FIG. 3 (3), and the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is terminated and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with “351” (the result is “lost”).

  Subsequently, the game progresses to FIG. 4 (4), and the main control unit 20 plays a special symbol variation display game based on the second operation holding ball, that is, the operation holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. The action control unit 24 starts and digests the operation hold ball, and at the same time as the start of the special symbol variation display game, the production control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each operation hold ball to the left, respectively. The decorative symbol variation display game based on the actuated holding ball is started. At this time, the “dedicated hold display” of the change system at the time of winning disappears from the screen at the time of the shift, and is terminated when the current symbol variation display game is started (with the digestion of the operation hold ball). In addition, a special notice image (in this case, lightning effect) of the change system at the start of the change is ended at the end of the generation in the symbol change display game. FIG. 4 (4) shows the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 immediately after the start of the symbol variation display game. In this way, a series of pre-reading notice effects has been completed. After that, if there is a roaring effect (pseudo-ream or reach effect (SP reach)) that increases the expectation level for winning a big hit during this symbol variation display game, the expectation for the big hit is combined with the content of the pre-reading notice effect. The feeling will be further enhanced.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate the pre-reading notice effect as described above as one aspect of the continuous notice effect. Thereby, since the variation of production can be made rich, the fun of the game can be improved.

(5-3. Production means)
Various effects by the pachinko gaming machine 1 are manifested by the rendering means arranged in the gaming machine. Such directing means may be any stimulus transmitting means that can exert a directing effect by appealing to human perception such as visual, auditory, and tactile sensations. Light generating means such as a decorative lamp 45 and an LED device, a speaker 46, and the like Sound generating device, production display device such as liquid crystal display device 36, vibration device for transmitting vibration to the operator's body, wind pressure device for applying wind pressure to the player's body, or the visual effect of the operation is exhibited. A movable body accessory is a representative example. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the eye like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it also includes an image-independent display device (for example, a 7-segment display). The term “image display device” refers mainly to a type that produces an effect by displaying an image, and a device that produces an effect other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is included in the concept of the effect display device. Further, the operation of the frame effect button 13 (manual operation means) is not performed in a specific period (for example, a predetermined operation effective period during a roaring effect with a relatively high expectation degree of winning a big hit) in an inoperable state (for example, a frame effect) The button 13 may not be pressed), or a special effect unit that is placed in an operation difficult state (for example, it is difficult to press the frame effect button 13) may be provided. An apparatus may be provided.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has the above-mentioned first movable body accessory (clock-type accessory 80), second movable body accessory (flower-type accessory 90), and third as the movable body accessory. The movable body accessory (rotating lamp 62) is mounted. The rolling button 70 has a structure in which the movable body 73 is incorporated so as to be rotatable and rollable in or below the push button cylinder 72, and thus functions as a third movable body accessory. This third movable body accessory particularly functions as an effect means for making a big hit confirmation notice (single notice) during the symbol variation display game. This single notification is displayed when the hit fluctuation pattern is a hit fluctuation pattern related to the big hit, and is not displayed when the hit fluctuation pattern is related to the small hit. In the case of the present embodiment, it is determined that among the jackpot types, the hit rate is higher as the jackpot has a relatively high profit state. Specifically, one notification can be generated with a higher probability in the 12R long open probability variation big hit than in the 12R long open uncertain big hit. However, in the big hit type, for the big hit belonging to the 2R short open big hit, one-shot notification is not generated from the point that the profit state is relatively lower than other big hits (the number of acquired balls cannot be expected). . However, in the case of 2R short-release latent chance big hit, one notification may be generated because it is a big hit type that triggers a transition to at least a gaming state with a high probability state (here, latent state). On the other hand, in the case of 2R short open non-probable big hit, it is preferable not to generate one notification from the point of being a fall transition trigger from the probabilistic state to the short time state.

  When the symbol game is not performed and a predetermined time has elapsed, a demo screen appears.

(5-4. Demo screen)
The demonstration screen is usually an effect display for explanation and introduction (demonstration) of the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the symbol game has not been performed for a certain time (for example, 60 seconds) or more. During the period in which the demonstration screen is displayed, in addition to the demonstration image display effect, it is also possible to execute an effect in which the movable object is operated in the operation pattern for the demonstration screen. For example, in the operation pattern for the demonstration screen, an operation effect is performed in which the flower-shaped accessory 90 reciprocates from the origin position to the development position via the merged position, or the clock hand 82 rotates. .

(5-5. About errors and error notifications)
(About errors)
Errors (types) are roughly classified into two types: main errors whose occurrence is grasped by the main control unit 20 and sub-errors whose occurrence is grasped by the production control unit 24. Therefore, there are a case where the main control unit 20 becomes a judgment subject, that is, an abnormality determination means, and a case where the presentation control unit 24 becomes a judgment subject, that is, an abnormality determination means. The main control unit 20 functions as an abnormality determination unit when it receives detection information from various sensors (such as the fraud detection sensor 99 and the position detection sensors 82a, 91a, and 92a) connected to the main control unit 20. is there. When the main control unit 20 determines that an error has occurred, an error command is sent from the main control unit 20, and the effect control unit 24 controls the error notification means according to the error command to perform error notification. This error notification may be a dedicated one prepared especially for error notification, but in the present embodiment, the LED, the decoration lamp 45, the speaker 46, and the liquid crystal display device 36 provided for production are controlled. The error notification is executed.

  Although details regarding the case where the effect control unit 24 is a determination subject will be described later, an error (sub error) that is a determination subject of the effect control unit 24 is, for example, an abnormality related to the effect means (such as an abnormal operation of a movable body accessory). There is. The production control unit 24 does not receive an error command on the main control unit 20 side for errors detected directly on the production control unit 24 side, and determines whether or not the production control unit 24 side has an error on its own. It has a configuration that can be determined.

(Main error and error notification)
The main control unit 20 determines whether or not a main error has occurred by comparing various types of detection information with predetermined error determination conditions. That is, detection information from the fraud detection sensor 99 (various sensors including a vibration sensor, a magnetic sensor, and a radio wave sensor) and designation information of the “status signal” from the payout control board 29 are determined in advance according to the type of error. It is determined whether or not an error of abnormality or state abnormality has occurred on the main control unit 20 side depending on whether or not the determination reference value is exceeded. Here, the “status signal” from the payout control board 29 is based on detection signals from the payout control board 29 such as the full detection sensor 60, the front door opening sensor 61, the replenishment detection sensor 19a, or the ball counting sensor 19b. This is a signal for sending information relating to the state such as the payout operation state and the full state of the upper tray 9 to the main control unit 20 in the form of a command or a detection signal. When the main control unit 20 determines that an illegal or abnormal state error has occurred, the main control unit 20 transmits a “main error command” to notify the effect control unit 24 that such a main error has occurred. This main error command includes error information that can specify the type of fraud or abnormal state.

  When the production control unit 24 receives the main error command from the main control unit 20, the production control unit 24 controls the LED, the decoration lamp 45, the speaker 46, and the liquid crystal display device 36, which are production means, based on the information included in the received main error command. Then, as one aspect of the effect, an “error notification effect” for notifying that an error has occurred is displayed. A characteristic feature of this error notification effect is that a light effect (hereinafter referred to as “error light effect” if necessary) that causes the decorative lamp 45, which is one of the effect means, to emit light in a predetermined pattern, A sound effect (hereinafter referred to as “error sound effect” if necessary) that outputs a warning sound or a sound from the speaker 46 that is one of the means, and an image display effect that displays a warning text on the liquid crystal display device 36 ( In the following, it is called “error image display effect” as required), or one or more types, or a combination of all types of effects. Therefore, an error notification effect consisting of a combination of these light, sound, and image with different notification modes is executed corresponding to the type of error that has occurred.

(About sub error and error notification)
The effect control unit 24 determines whether or not a sub error for which the effect control unit 24 is a determination subject has occurred, based on detection information from switches connected to the effect control unit 24. That is, detection information from the position detection sensors 82a, 91a, and 92a for each movable body accessory (clock-type accessory 80, flower-type accessory 90) and production (sound, light, image display) are displayed. Whether the output information from the device (the sound source IC (audio output circuit), the rendering device including the RTC function unit (Real Time Clock function unit)) exceeds a predetermined criterion value according to the type of error. Then, it is determined whether an illegal or abnormal state error has occurred on the main control unit 20 side. Then, when the production control unit 24 determines that an injustice or a state abnormality has occurred, the type of the sub error is specified, and based on the type of the sub error, the LED, the decoration lamp 45, the speaker 46, and the liquid crystal display device 36, which are the production means. To display an error notification effect. The error notification effect is also performed by combining the error light effect, the error sound effect, and the error image display effect in the same manner as the error notification effect for the main error.

(About specific errors)
Next, an error notification mode belonging to the main error and the sub error will be described in detail with reference to the table of FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 33, the error notification priority order shown is not a priority order for error commands transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, but a main error and an effect for which the main control unit 20 is a determination subject. This is the priority order of errors including sub-errors for which the control unit 24 is the main subject of determination. Further, tables defining different error notification priorities for all errors are stored in the main control ROM 202 of the main control unit 20 and the effect control ROM 242 of the effect control unit 24 with the same contents. As shown in FIG. 33, there is a number in which the error notification priority is skipped, but this is because the error notification priority for an error that occurs for another type of pachinko gaming machine having a gameability different from the present embodiment is excluded. It is. An error about another type of pachinko gaming machine 1 will be specifically described later as another embodiment.

(1. Error belonging to main error and its notification)
The errors belonging to the main error include a RAM (RWM) clear error, a big prize opening illegal prize error, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a door opening error, a ball clogging error, a replenishment error, and a payout shortage error. Further, regarding the presence / absence of occurrence of a main error, detection information from the fraud detection sensor 99 for the fraud detection sensor 99 (various sensors including a vibration sensor, a magnetic sensor, and a radio wave sensor) connected to the main control unit 20. And based on a “status signal” transmitted from the payout control board 29 to the main control unit 20 under a predetermined error determination condition determined according to the main error type (details will be described later) ) Determine whether an error has occurred. The “status signal” is determined based on the detection signal from the full control sensor 29, the front door opening sensor 61, the replenishment detection sensor 19a, or the ball counting sensor 19b. This is a control command or a detection signal for transmitting information related to the full state or the like to the main control unit 20.

(1-1) RAM clear error (error notification priority 1)
The RAM clear error is an error that is issued when the stored contents of the RAM 203 are all erased by operating a “RAM clear switch” formed inside the gaming machine, and is one of main errors. This RAM clear is an act of erasing all stored contents of the RAM 203 by operating the RAM clear switch, and a RAM clear error is an error that occurs when the RAM is cleared when it is not necessary to clear the RAM.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 acquires a big hit determination random number used for the big hit lottery when a detection signal of a game ball is input from the upper start port sensor 34a or the lower start port sensor 35a. doing. The jackpot determination random number is acquired from a random number generation circuit, and is basically a random number. Therefore, the player hits and acquires the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the jackpot in the jackpot lottery. It is impossible. However, for example, by performing an unauthorized operation of resetting the main control unit 20 with an unauthorized circuit attached to the random number generation circuit, the jackpot determining random number can be obtained illegally. In order to prevent such fraud, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the RAM clear switch is operated to reset the main control unit 20, this operation is regarded as fraud and an error notification is made. It has become so.

  That is, when the above-described RAM clear is executed, a RAM clear command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as a main error command from the main control unit 20 that monitors the RAM clear switch. On the effect control unit 24 side, when this command is received, error notification corresponding to the RAM clear error is started, and when 30 seconds have elapsed after receiving the command, this error notification is terminated. Note that a release command for ending the error notification is not transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24.

  In addition, the main control unit 20 transmits error information not only to the effect control unit 24 but also to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21. Specifically, in addition to the error command, error information designating that the RAM clear has been executed is transferred to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21 until 30 seconds have elapsed since the RAM clear occurred. Is sending to. For this reason, the pachinko hall clerk can also recognize that a RAM clear error has occurred via the hall computer HC.

(Error notification mode of RAM clear error)
Error notification based on the RAM clear error is performed by a combination of the light effect, the sound effect, and the image display effect for the error. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 45 blinks in white at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms, and the sound effect is performed in a manner in which a RAM clear warning sound is emitted from the speaker 46. In addition, the image display effect is performed in the liquid crystal display device 36 in such a manner that the liquid crystal screen is set as a default screen (demo screen) and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with a combination of “731”.

(1-2) Unusual prize winning error (error notification priority 2)
The big prize entry illegal prize error is an error that is notified when an abnormal prize (illegal prize) is detected for a prize of the big prize mouth (the lower grand prize mouth 40, the right major prize mouth 50). One of the errors. This incorrect prize winning prize error is forcibly opened using a plastic plate or a piano wire to the prize winning opening, and the prize detection switch (lower prize winning sensor 42a, right prize winning sensor 52a) is forced. This is an error provided to prevent the goto action (selgoto) that is continuously on and is aimed at excessive winnings. There are two cases where the winning time for the big prize opening is “when a game is played per game” and “when the game is not a game per game”, and each of them wins a prize (detection of a game ball by the big prize port sensor). It is divided as follows whether or not it is regarded as an illegal winning based on.

(1-2-1. Unusual prize winning error when not winning game)
One of the big prize opening illegal prize errors is an error that is generated when there is a prize at the big prize opening even though the game is not played. For example, in the case of “not playing a game, that is, when the special variable winning device is not activated (the special electric accessory actuating flag described later is in an OFF (≠ 5AH) state)”, the winning detection switch detects a game ball. In this case, it is regarded as an illegal winning based on an illegal act, and it is a large winning mouth illegal winning error for which an error notification is issued.

(1-2-2. Big prize opening incorrect prize error in case of winning game)
In addition, when “a winning game is in progress, that is, when the special variable winning device is in operation (the special electric accessory actuating flag described later is ON (= 5 AH) state)”, the game is released according to the type of the winning game. If the winning detection switch that is not the type of the big winning opening to be detected detects a game ball, this is regarded as an illegal winning based on an illegal act, and an error notification of the big winning opening illegal winning error is issued. Specifically, in the case of “12R probability variation big hit game” on the side of FIG. 1, the right big prize opening sensor 52a detects a game ball even though the right big prize opening 50 is not opened, or “16R probability variation big hit game”. If the lower major prize opening sensor 42a detects a game ball even though the lower major prize opening 40 is not opened, it is considered that an illegal prize has occurred.

  Similarly, if the winning detection switch detects a gaming ball that exceeds the number of winnings that are assumed during the period when the big winning opening is open during the winning game, an illegal winning based on fraud is also generated. In view of this, an error notification of an incorrect prize winning error is issued. Specifically, winning holes such as “Small per game”, “2R short-open latency big hit game”, and “2R short-open non-probable big hit game” will be released only for a short open time (0.1 seconds). In the case of a game, the fraud determination level is set to two, and if there are two winnings during the winning game, it is considered that an illegal winning has occurred.

  In addition, after a game ball wins a prize winning opening and the winning prize closing condition is satisfied by the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9) after the winning prize opening is opened, it is assumed Similarly, when the winning detection switch detects a gaming ball exceeding the number of winning prizes, it is considered that an illegal winning based on an illegal act has occurred, and an error notification of a large winning mouth illegal winning error is issued. The game ball that will reach the maximum number of winnings has entered the grand prize opening, but until the gaming ball is detected by the winning detection switch or until the gaming ball is detected by the winning detection switch, Just before the mouth is closed, a game ball may accidentally enter the big winning opening, and an over winning may occur. If this over-winning occurs beyond the permissible range and cannot be assumed, it is considered an illegal winning. Specifically, the case of the lower university winning opening 40 will be described as an example. In the case of the lower university winning opening 40, if the lower university winning opening 40 is operating normally, approximately two over winning prizes are made. If so, it is tolerated as accidental. In other words, the allowable winning limit is determined on the assumption that the number of over-winnings that can normally occur in the lower large winning opening 40 is about two. Therefore, the number of over-winnings in one round that is excessively larger than the allowable limit number (2) (for example, 4) is determined as the “fair discrimination level”, and an over-winning number equal to or higher than this illegal discrimination level is detected. If this is the case, this is regarded as an illegal prize based on fraud, and an error is notified. In addition, the right big prize opening 50 is designed so that over-winning is more likely to occur than the lower big prize opening 40, and it is assumed that about three over-winning numbers are accidentally generated, and the over-winning is allowed. The limit number is set to 3. Therefore, when the number of over winnings in one round is excessively larger than the allowable limit number (3) (for example, 5) as the fraud determination level and an over winning number equal to or higher than this fraud determination level is detected, This is regarded as an illegal prize based on an illegal act, and an error is notified. The occurrence of an over-winning game is determined by the arrangement of gaming members on the game board (for example, the position of a prize opening, center decoration, etc., gauge configuration (arrangement of game nails), etc.) Depending on the length of the path to the detection switch) and the open pattern (for example, the length of the maximum open time), in order to prevent unexpected special prizes from being generated, The rate of occurrence is suppressed, and over-winning does not occur easily.

  When an illegal prize winning error occurs, the main control unit 20 that monitors the winning detection switch (the lower big prize opening sensor 42a, the right big prize opening sensor 52a) receives a big prize opening as a main error command corresponding to the error. An unauthorized winning error command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. For example, when the main power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by a pachinko hall clerk during a winning game, the big prize opening illegal prize error is canceled. In this case, the hit game is started again after the power is restored.

(Error notification mode of large prize opening illegal prize error)
The error notification based on the occurrence of the big prize opening illegal prize error is performed by an error notification effect combining a light effect, a sound effect, and an image display effect. The light effect in this case is performed in such a manner that the decorative lamp 45 blinks red at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms. The sound production is performed in such a manner that an illegal winning warning sound is emitted from the speaker 46. The image display effect is performed in such a manner that a warning message “Error 19: Please call a clerk who has received a prize in the big prize opening” is displayed on the liquid crystal display of the liquid crystal display device 36. The error information is transmitted to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21.

(1-3) Magnetic sensor error (error notification priority order 7)
The magnetic sensor error is an error that occurs when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor, and is one of main errors. This magnetic sensor error is an error mainly provided to prevent a “magnet goto” action, and when a magnetic abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor, this is reported as an error.

  When a magnetic sensor error occurs, a magnetic sensor error command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 that monitors the magnetic sensor to the effect control unit 24 as a main error command corresponding to the error. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts error notification corresponding to the magnetic sensor error. This error notification is performed until an error cancellation command is received by the effect control unit 24, and the error cancellation command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 30 seconds after the magnetic abnormality is no longer detected by the magnetic sensor. It has become. In this way, the error notification is terminated after 30 seconds by continuing the magnetic sensor error notification even after the magnet goto action is finished, so that the pachinko hall clerk who has discovered the error notice has the magnet goto action. This is for recognizing that it was being executed. Therefore, the eyes of the pachinko hall clerk are more strict and it is possible to make it difficult to execute various goto actions including a magnet goto action.

(Magnetic sensor error error notification mode)
Error notification based on the magnetic sensor error is performed by a combination of the light effect, the sound effect, and the image display effect for the error. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 45 blinks red at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms, and the sound effect is performed in a mode in which a magnetic sensor error sound is emitted from the speaker 46. The image display effect is performed in such a manner that a warning message “Error 15 Magnetic sensor error” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. The error information is transmitted to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21.

(1-4) Radio wave sensor error (error notification priority order 8)
The radio wave sensor error is an error that occurs when an illegal radio wave is detected by the radio wave sensor, and is one of main errors. This radio wave sensor error is an error mainly provided to prevent the “radio wave” act, and when an illegal radio wave is detected by the radio wave sensor, this is notified as an error.

  When a radio wave sensor error occurs, a radio wave sensor error command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as a main error command corresponding to the error from the main control unit 20 that monitors the radio wave sensor. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts error notification corresponding to the radio wave sensor error. This error notification is performed until an error cancellation command is received by the effect control unit 24, and the error cancellation command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 30 seconds after the detection of unauthorized radio waves by the radio wave sensor is lost. It has become. In this way, the error notification is terminated after 30 seconds by continuing the radio wave sensor error notification even after the radio goto action is completed, so that the pachinko hall clerk who has discovered the error notification is This is for recognizing that it was being executed. Accordingly, the eyes of the pachinko hall clerk are more strict and it is possible to make it difficult to execute various goto acts including radio wave goto acts.

(Error notification mode of radio wave sensor error)
The error notification based on the radio wave sensor error is performed by a combination of the light effect, the sound effect, and the image display effect for the error. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 45 blinks red at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms, and the sound effect is performed in a manner in which a radio wave sensor error sound is emitted from the speaker 46. The image display effect is performed in such a manner that a warning message “Error 14 radio wave sensor error” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. The error information is transmitted to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21.

(1-5) Vibration sensor error (error notification priority 9)
The vibration sensor error is an error that occurs when an illegal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor, and is one of main errors. This vibration sensor error is an error that is provided mainly to prevent “dodging” actions, and when an abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor, this is reported as an error.

  When a vibration sensor error occurs, a vibration sensor error command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as a main error command corresponding to the error from the main control unit 20 that monitors the vibration sensor. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts error notification corresponding to the vibration sensor error. This error notification is performed until an error cancellation command is received by the effect control unit 24, and the error cancellation command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 30 seconds after the detection of the improper vibration by the vibration sensor is lost. It has become. In this way, the error notification is terminated after 30 seconds by continuing the vibration sensor error notification even after the throbbing action is ended, and the throbbing action is executed by the pachinko hall clerk who has discovered the error notification. This is for recognizing what was happening. Therefore, the eyes of pachinko hall clerk's monitoring become strict, and it is possible to make it difficult to execute various goto acts including the doggy goto action.

(Error notification mode of vibration sensor error)
Error notification based on the vibration sensor error is performed by a combination of the light effect, the sound effect, and the image display effect for the error. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decorative lamp 45 blinks red at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms, and the sound effect is performed in a manner in which a vibration sensor error sound is emitted from the speaker 46. The image display effect is performed in such a manner that a warning message “Error 16 Vibration sensor error” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. The error information is transmitted to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21.

(1-6) General prize opening illegal prize error (error notification priority 10)
The general prize opening illegal prize error is an error that occurs when the general prize opening sensor 43a detects an ON state for a certain time (for example, 2 seconds), and is one of main errors. The general prize opening illegal prize error is, for example, an error provided to prevent an illegal benefit due to clogging in the general prize opening 43, and when the general prize opening sensor 43a continues to output a detection signal of a game ball. This is reported as an error. The general prize opening illegal prize error is often caused by a clogged ball in the general prize opening 43, so the cause is basically eliminated by a pachinko hall clerk.

  When a general prize opening illegal prize error occurs, a general prize opening illegal prize error command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control part 24 as a main error command corresponding to the error. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts an error notification corresponding to the general prize opening illegal prize error. This error notification is performed until an error cancellation command is received by the effect control unit 24, and the error cancellation command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 30 seconds after the last detection by the general winning opening sensor 43a. It has become. In this way, the error notification is terminated after 30 seconds, and the error notification is discovered by continuing the general winning port illegal winning error notification even after the clogging in the general winning port 43 is resolved. This is to make the pachinko hall clerk recognize that a ball clogging has occurred. Therefore, when this general prize opening illegal prize error occurs many times, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is easily maintained by the pachinko hall or the manufacturer as a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is easily clogged with balls.

(Error notification mode for general winning mouth illegal prize errors)
The error notification based on the general prize opening illegal prize error is performed by a combination of the light effect, the sound effect, and the image display effect for the error. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decorative lamp 45 blinks red at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms, and the sound effect is performed in a manner in which a vibration sensor error sound is emitted from the speaker 46. Further, the image display effect is performed in such a manner that a warning message “Error 13 general winning opening illegal winning error” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. The error information is transmitted to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21.

(1-7) Door open error (error notification priority 12)
The door opening error is an error that occurs when the opening of the front frame 2 or the glass door 6 is detected by the front door opening sensor 61, and is one of main errors. This door opening error prevents fraudulent acts such as opening the front frame 2 or the glass door 6 and winning a game ball in a winning opening (starting openings 34 and 35, large winning openings 40 and 50, general winning openings 43). If the opening action is detected by the front door opening sensor 61, this is notified as an error.

  As to whether or not a door opening error has occurred, a “state signal” indicating the state of the front door opening sensor 61 is transmitted from the dispensing control board 29 to which the front door opening sensor 61 is connected to the main control unit 20. Based on the signal, the main control unit 20 determines whether or not a door opening error has occurred. When a door opening error occurs, a door opening error command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24 as a main error command corresponding to the error. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts error notification corresponding to the door opening error. This error notification is performed until an error release command is received by the effect control unit 24, and the error release command is received when the front door 2 sensor 61 confirms that the front frame 2 and the glass door 6 have been closed. Are transmitted from the main control unit 20. However, after receiving the error cancellation command, the effect control unit 24 may execute a light effect for error notification (for example, an effect of blinking red at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 800 ms) extended for 30 seconds. By continuing the light production for 30 seconds, the pachinko hall clerk who has discovered the error notification can recognize that some kind of error has occurred, and the pachinko hall clerk can be strictly monitored and fraud can be suppressed. Can do.

(Error notification mode for door opening error)
Error notification based on the door opening error is performed by a combination of the light effect, the sound effect, and the image display effect for the error. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 45 blinks red at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms, and the sound effect is performed in a manner in which a sound “the door is open” is emitted from the speaker 46. The image display effect is performed in such a manner that a warning message “Error 01 door is open” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36.

(1-8) Payout control board error (error notification priority 13)
The payout control board error is an error that occurs when it is detected that transmission / reception between the main control unit 20 and the payout control board 29 cannot be performed, and is one of the main errors. As described above, the main control unit 20 can transmit a control command related to payout to the payout control board 29, and the payout control board 29 can transmit information related to the payout operation state to the main control unit 20. It has become. When these transmission / reception errors, specifically, serial communication errors are detected by the main control unit 20, they are reported as errors. This payout control board error is an error caused by a malfunction in the main control unit 20 or the payout control board 29, a component for transmission / reception, or a gaming part such as a communication cable connecting the main control unit 20 and the payout control board 29. is there. Therefore, it is necessary to exchange those gaming parts.

  When a payout control board error occurs, a payout control board error command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24 as a main error command corresponding to the error. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts error notification corresponding to the payout control board error. This error notification is not ended until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. Further, the error cancel command is not transmitted from the main control unit 20. The payout control board error is resolved by exchanging the gaming parts that have caused the payout control board error and restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(Error notification mode of payout control board error)
Error notification based on the payout control board error is performed by a combination of the error light effect and the image display effect. The sound production for error is not performed, and the sound production by the speaker 46 appearing during the game is given priority. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 45 blinks in white at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms. The image display effect is performed in such a manner that a warning message “error 04 payout control board error” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36.

(1-9) Main board error (error notification priority 14)
The main board error is an error that occurs when an abnormality is confirmed in the random number generation circuit of the main control unit 20, and is one of the main errors. As described above, the random number generation circuit is a device that generates a certain range of random numbers in terms of hardware, and the generated random number is acquired as a random value for internal lottery at a predetermined timing and used for jackpot lottery. . If an abnormality is detected in this random number generation circuit, this is notified as an error.

  When the main board error occurs, the main board error command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24 as a main error command corresponding to the error. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts error notification corresponding to the main board error. This error notification is not ended until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. In addition, an error cancellation command is not transmitted from the main control unit 20 for a main board error. For this reason, in order to eliminate the main board error, it can be eliminated only by replacing the main control board 20 with a new one.

(Main board error error notification mode)
The error notification based on the main board error is performed by a combination of the light effect for the error and the image display effect. The sound production for error is not performed, and the sound production by the speaker 46 appearing during the game is given priority. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 45 blinks in white at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms. The image display effect is performed in such a manner that a warning message “Error 11 main board error” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36.

(1-10) Disconnection detection error (error notification priority 15)
The disconnection detection error is an error that occurs when detection is made when the wiring (harness) that connects the substrates or the various sensors to the substrates is disconnected or short-circuited, and is one of the main errors. For example, if the wiring between the main control unit 20 (main board) and the payout control board 29 is disconnected or the wiring between the main control unit 20 and the upper start port sensor 34a is disconnected, it becomes impossible to transmit and receive signals. Therefore, when a disconnection or a short circuit is detected, this is notified as an error.

  When a disconnection detection error occurs, a disconnection detection error command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24 as a main error command corresponding to the error. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts error notification corresponding to the disconnection detection error. This error notification is performed until the error release command is received by the effect control unit 24, and the error release command indicates that the disconnection or short circuit has been released by replacing the harness (normal transmission or reception). When it is confirmed, it is transmitted from the main control unit 20.

(Error notification mode of disconnection detection error)
Error notification based on the disconnection detection error is performed by a combination of the light effect for the error and the image display effect. The sound production for error is not performed, and the sound production by the speaker 46 appearing during the game is given priority. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 45 blinks in white at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms. The image display effect is performed in such a manner that a warning message “Error 12 switch is disconnected” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36.

(1-11) Payout shortage error (error notification priority 16)
The payout shortage error is an error that occurs when an abnormality (shortage of payout) is detected in the payout of the number of prize balls from the game ball payout device 19 by the ball counting sensor 19b, and is one of the main errors. When the ball counting sensor 19b does not detect a game ball as a payout operation by the payout motor 19c, the payout motor 19c is operated again to perform a predetermined number (for example, three times) of paying out the insufficient game balls, If the number of game balls to be paid out is still not detected by the ball counting sensor 19b, this is notified as an error. When a payout shortage error occurs, the movement of the payout motor 19c is stopped.

  Whether or not a payout shortage error has occurred is detected by the payout control board 29 via the gaming ball payout device 19 to which the ball counting sensor 19b is connected. A “status signal” indicating the number of paid-out game balls based on the signal is transmitted, and based on the “status signal”, the main control unit 20 determines whether or not an insufficient payout error has occurred. When a payout shortage error occurs, a main payout error command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24 as a main error command corresponding to the error. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts error notification corresponding to the payout shortage error. This error notification is performed until an error cancel command is received by the effect control unit 24, and the error cancel command is provided in the game ball payout device 19 after a problem such as ball clogging is solved by a pachinko hall clerk. When an error release switch (not shown) is pressed, it is transmitted from the main control unit 20.

(Error notification mode for payout shortage error)
Error notification based on the payout shortage error is performed by a combination of the light effect for the error and the image display effect. The sound production for error is not performed, and the sound production by the speaker 46 appearing during the game is given priority. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 45 blinks in white at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms. The image display effect is performed in such a manner that a warning message “Error 03 Game ball cannot be paid out.

(1-12) Replenishment error (error notification priority 20)
The replenishment error is an error that occurs when it is detected by the replenishment detection sensor 19a that a prize ball cannot be paid out from the game ball payout device 19, and is one of the main errors. Although not shown, on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a “game ball storage tank” for storing game balls supplied from the game ball supply device of the pachinko hall side island facility is formed. Yes. A game ball payout device 19 is provided in connection with a tank rail for guiding game balls from the game ball storage tank. When a game ball to be supplied from the game ball replenishing device to the game ball storage tank is replenished due to a clogged ball or the like, and there is a shortage of game balls in the game ball storage tank, an out-of-supply error occurs. . If there is a shortage of game balls in the game ball storage tank, no prize balls can be paid out from the game ball payout device 19. Therefore, if insufficient supply of the game balls is detected by the supply shortage detection sensor 19a, this is notified as an error.

  As to whether or not a replenishment error has occurred, a detection signal is transmitted to the payout control board 29 via the game ball payout device 19 to which the replenishment detection sensor 19a is connected, and the payout control board 29 to the main control unit 20 A “state signal” indicating the state in the game ball storage tank based on the detection signal is transmitted, and based on the “state signal”, the main control unit 20 determines whether or not an out-of-supply error has occurred. When a replenishment error occurs, the main control unit 20 transmits a replenishment error command to the effect control unit 24 as a main error command corresponding to the error. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts an error notification corresponding to the replenishment error. This error notification is performed until an error release command is received by the effect control unit 24, and it is confirmed that the game ball in the game ball storage tank has been supplied by the out-of-supply detection sensor 19a. At this time, it is transmitted from the main control unit 20.

(Error notification mode for out-of-supply error)
The error notification based on the replenishment error is performed by a combination of the error light effect and the image display effect. The sound production for error is not performed, and the sound production by the speaker 46 appearing during the game is given priority. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 45 blinks in white at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms. The image display effect is performed in such a manner that a warning message “Error 02 Insufficient game balls. Please call a staff member” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36.

(1-13) Right / left strike warning notification (error notification priority 21)
The right / left-handed warning notification is a notification that warns that a game area in which a game ball launched by a player flows down is not preferable in the progress of the game. This right / left strike warning notification is not particularly harmful to the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the progress of the game, but it causes damage to the player, so it is regarded as a kind of main error. Yes. For example, when the gaming state changes to the high base gaming state of “electric support” after the big hit game is over, a game ball is launched to enter the normal symbol starting port 37 provided in the gaming area on the right side of the gaming board. (So-called “right-handed”) The game is played. If the detection switch on the left side of the board detects a game ball in this right-handed state, the player's ball may be consumed significantly unless the launch direction is instructed. "Launching position guidance effect (right-handed notification effect)" that reports information (instruction information that prompts the normal symbol start port 37 to win a prize)) is executed.

(Right / left strike warning error notification mode)
As an error notification (right strike notification effect) of right / left strike warning notification, an image prompting the player to “right strike” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, or “right strike” is displayed. In other words, the speaker 46 emits a sound “please right-handed” as a unique sound (right-handed instruction sound).

(1-14) Ball clogging error (error notification priority 22)
The ball clogging error is an error that occurs when the upper tray 9 that stores game balls is full, and is one of the main errors. This clogging error is detected by the full detection sensor 60. When the upper tray 9 is filled with game balls to some extent, it becomes impossible to pay out prize balls from the game ball dispensing device 19, so when the storage amount of the game balls in the upper tray 9 is determined to be full by the full detection sensor 60, This is reported as an error. When the ball clogging error continues for a predetermined time, the firing control board 28 stops the firing operation by the launching device 32.

  As for the presence or absence of a clogging error, a “status signal” indicating the status of the fullness detection sensor 60 is transmitted from the payout control board 29 to which the fullness detection sensor 60 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the “status signal”. The main control unit 20 determines whether or not a ball clogging error has occurred. When a ball clogging error occurs, a ball clogging error command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24 as a main error command corresponding to the error. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts error notification corresponding to the clogging error. This error notification is performed until the error control command is received by the effect control unit 24, and the error control command is sent to the main control unit 20 when it is confirmed by the full detection sensor 60 that the full state has been eliminated. Is sent from. Specifically, when the player himself operates the ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game ball stored in the upper tray 9 to the lower side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game ball stored in the upper tray 9 is moved downward. Since it moves to the dollar box, the full tank state can be eliminated. That is, the ball clogging error is an error that can be canceled by the player himself, unlike the errors (1-1) to (1-12).

(Error notification mode of ball clogging error)
Error notification based on a ball clogging error is performed by a combination of a sound effect for the error and an image display effect. The light effect for the error is not performed, and the light effect by the decorative lamp 45 appearing during the game is given priority. The sound production is performed in such a manner that a sound “Please pull out the sphere” is emitted from the speaker 46. The image display effect is performed in such a manner that a warning message “please pull out the sphere” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36.

(2. Errors belonging to sub error types and their notifications)
The errors belonging to the sub error include a movable object error, a sound source IC error, and a production board error. Further, regarding the presence / absence of the occurrence of a sub error, the position detection sensors 82a, 91a, and 92a connected to the effect control unit 24 perform sound effects based on the detection information from the position detection sensors 82a, 91a, and 92a. A sound source IC (sound output circuit) for display is based on output information from the sound source IC, and an RTC circuit (Real Time Clock circuit) related to image display effects is based on output information from the RTC circuit. Whether or not an error has occurred is determined under a predetermined error determination condition determined in accordance with the sub error (details will be described later).

(2-1) Movable object error (error notification priority 17)
The movable body accessory error is an error that occurs when an abnormality is detected by the position detection sensors 82a, 91a, and 92a, and is a sub-error. This movable body accessory error is an operation (for example, a sudden operation from a place that is not the origin position or a production scenario) that does not correspond to the production scenario by the movable body accessory (clock-type accessory 80, flower-type accessory 90). This is an error provided to prevent an operation that does not exist in the operation, such as a malfunction in the operation (for example, a malfunction that has stopped in the middle of the operation after the operation and overlapped in the liquid crystal screen, or whether the operation has returned to the origin position correctly) Is detected as an error.

  In general, the production control unit 24 detects one or more positions on the machine body side (stationary side) for each movable body accessory (movable side) in order to grasp the origin positions of the plurality of movable body accessories. Sensors 82 a, 91 a, and 92 a are provided, and output signals from the position detection sensors 82 a, 91 a, and 92 a are input to the effect control unit 24. Further, on the side of the production control unit 24, in order to detect the rotation angle of the drive motor (provided for each movable big object) that drives the movable body accessory, the rotation axis of the stepping motor constituting the drive motor or this An encoder is attached to a rotating shaft that rotates in synchronization with the output signal, and an output signal of the encoder is input to the effect control unit 24.

  Therefore, the production control unit 24 determines whether the sub error has occurred based on the output signals from the position detection sensors 82a, 91a, 92a and the encoder, in accordance with a predetermined error determination condition determined in advance according to the type of the sub error. Determine whether it occurred. Specifically, based on output signals from the position detection sensors 82a, 91a, 92a for detecting the origin position and the encoder for detecting the current position, whether or not the stop time at the current position other than the origin position has exceeded a predetermined time. Are determined sequentially for each interrupt timing, and the case where the vehicle stays in one place beyond the predetermined time is determined to be abnormal. Then, when determining that a sub error has occurred, the effect control unit 24 controls the effect means to perform an error notification effect in a predetermined error notification effect mode corresponding to the type of error that has occurred.

  When a movable body accessory error occurs, a signal indicating that the clock-type accessory 80 or the flower-type accessory 90 is not located at the origin position from the position detection sensors 82a, 91a, 92a is output to the effect control unit 24. The production control unit 24 starts error notification corresponding to the movable body accessory error. This error notification is performed until the cause of the movable body accessory error is removed. Further, the error notification may be terminated when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the error notification.

(Moveable object error error notification mode)
Error notification based on the movable body accessory error is performed by a combination of the light effect, the sound effect, and the image display effect for the error. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decorative lamp 45 blinks in white at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms, and the sound effect is performed in a manner in which a movable body accessory error sound is emitted from the speaker 46. Further, the image display effect is performed in such a manner that a warning message “Error 21 movable object error” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. In the case of the present embodiment, the warning sentence is different depending on the type of the movable object and the error content (for example, abnormal operation location and abnormal content), and at least any movable object has an error. Specifically, it is possible to display information that can specify whether or not a movable body accessory type (clock-type accessory 80, flower-type accessory 90, rotating lamp 62, movable body 73 in which an error has occurred is shown. Etc.) and the error content can be specified. As for the error content display, the error content may be displayed directly as character information (for example, “Return to origin position. Please call a staff member” is displayed as character information). Identification information (specific identifier, identification ID, etc.) associated with the content may be displayed (for example, when the clock hands 82 of the clock-type accessory 80 have not returned to the origin position normally, “HH1 "Such).

  In the present embodiment, the name of the type of the movable object such as “Error 21 Clock-type object error” or “Error 22 Flower-type object error” is indicated or “ "Error 23 Flower type character error A" (for example, abnormality of petals inside flower type character 90), "Error 24 Flower type character error B" (for example, abnormality of petals outside flower type character 90) Thus, by displaying information that makes it possible to specify the movable part of the movable object, it is possible to specify the type of movable object and / or the movable part of the movable object that is an error target. The information is displayed, and thus an error notification related to the movable body accessory by the image display effect is executed. As a specific example, as shown in FIG. 33, “Error 21 first movable body accessory error (for example, indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the clock-type accessory 80)”, “Error 22 second movable object Body character error A (for example, indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the flower-shaped character 90), “Error 23 First movable body character error B (for example, a petal inside the flower-shaped character 90) "Indicating that an abnormality has occurred)", "Error 24 first movable body accessory error B (for example, indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the petals outside the flower-shaped accessory 90)" It is.

(2-2) Sound source IC error (error notification priority 18)
The sound source IC error is an error that occurs when an abnormality is detected in the sound control unit (sound source LSI or sound source IC) for the sound generation device 46a including the speaker 46, and is one of the sub errors. If an abnormality of the sound control unit is detected based on a signal output from the sound control unit to the effect control unit 24, this is notified as an error. When this sound source IC error occurs, the acoustic control unit may need to be replaced.

  When a sound source IC error occurs, the effect control is based on the fact that a signal notifying the abnormality is output from the sound control unit to the effect control unit 24, or based on the fact that no signal is output from the sound control unit to the effect control unit 24. The unit 24 starts error notification corresponding to the sound source IC error. This error notification ends when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses.

(Sound source IC error error notification mode)
The error notification based on the sound source IC error is performed by a combination of the light effect for the error and the image display effect. Since the sound source IC is abnormal, no sound production for error is performed. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 45 blinks in white at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms. The image display effect is performed in such a manner that a warning message “Error 41 sound source IC error” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36.

(2-3) Production board error (error notification priority 19)
The effect board error is an error that occurs when an abnormality is detected in an RTC circuit (Real Time Clock circuit) for executing an effect corresponding to an actual date and time, and is one of sub-errors. The RTC circuit is provided in the effect control unit 24, and when an abnormality is detected in the RTC circuit based on a signal output from the RTC circuit to the effect control unit 24, this is notified as an error. When this effect board error occurs, the effect control unit 24 may need to be replaced.

  When an effect board error occurs, the effect control unit 24 is based on the fact that a signal notifying the abnormality is output from the RTC circuit to the effect control unit 24 or no signal is output from the RTC circuit to the effect control unit 24. Starts error notification corresponding to the production board error. This error notification ends when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses.

(Error notification mode of production board error)
Error notification based on the effect board error is performed by a combination of the light effect for the error and the image display effect. The sound production for error is not performed, and the sound production by the speaker 46 appearing during the game is given priority. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 45 blinks in white at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms. The image display effect is performed in such a manner that a warning message “Error XX effect substrate error” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36.

(Error notification when errors occur repeatedly)
Next, an error notification (error notification effect) executed by the effect control unit 24 when different types of errors occur will be described.

  When different types of errors occur repeatedly, at least the following two points become problems. Regarding the first problem, here, it is considered that error notification is executed by an error notification effect by a combination of an image display effect, a sound effect, and a light effect. In this case, the image display effect, the sound effect, and the light effect have different characteristics (a), (b), and (c). (A) When performing error notification in the form of “display all warning text on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36” by the image display effect, an error message (warning text) is displayed in a number of lines on the screen. can do. Therefore, even if a plurality of types of errors occur, it is not technically difficult to display them on the screen. However, in the case of an image display effect, it is necessary to read the message content using characters, and thus it is necessary to approach the display screen to a distance that can be identified with the naked eye. On the other hand, sound effects and light effects are essentially different from image display effects. That is, in the case of (b) sound production, even if there is a barrier on the way, it is transmitted and reaches the ear, but when the sound production and the sound production overlap, the higher volume is dominant due to the so-called masking effect. It has the characteristic that the lower volume is canceled and it becomes difficult to hear. (C) Also, in the case of light effects, it is difficult to discriminate the LED or lamp when they are overlapped with the same color light, and it is also difficult to discriminate the difference when the lamps with different flashing cycles overlap. It has the characteristics of

  Considering these differences, there is an error that is not enough to be notified by the liquid crystal display device 36. For example, in the case of a door opening error, in light of its importance, light or It is considered that notification by sound is a better method than simply by screen display. On the other hand, there is a problem that error processing cannot be solved promptly due to the property that it is difficult to discriminate when it is issued at the same time when it is notified by sound or light.

  Regarding the second problem, when the production control unit 24 receives an error command, an error notification based on another error command may already be being executed. As a method for dealing with this, it is conceivable to prioritize error commands and perform error notification based on the received error command only when the received error command has a higher priority than the error command being executed. In this way, when an error command having a high priority is generated, error notification can be performed with priority over other errors. However, since it is assumed that priority is given to error commands transmitted from the main control unit 20, error notification based on the error commands transmitted from the main control unit 20 and movable controlled by the effect control unit 24. There is a problem that it is not possible to cope with the case where the error notification based on the abnormality of the body accessory is duplicated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when different types of errors occur repeatedly, an error notification that can be easily recognized by a player or a pachinko hall clerk can be executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the error notification priority is not provided only between error commands, that is, between errors determined by the main control unit 20, but also for errors determined by the effect control unit 24. It is configured so that error notification can be executed without discriminating between errors by the judgment subject.

  In order to execute such error notification, the present embodiment employs the following configuration.

Error determination means for determining whether or not an error relating to the gaming machine has occurred;
In a gaming machine comprising an error notification control unit that executes and controls error notification using a predetermined effect unit when it is determined that an error has occurred by the error determination unit,
The effect means includes sound effect means (speaker 46) for executing sound effects, light effect means (decorative lamp 45, LED for effects, etc.) for executing light effects, and image display means (for performing image display effects). A plurality of types of production means including a liquid crystal display device 36),
For the error, a plurality of types of errors in which error notification is performed by the error notification control unit using a sound effect by the sound effect unit, a light effect by the light effect unit, and an image display effect by the image display unit. (For example, moving object errors, door opening errors, etc.)
The error notification control means includes
When any one of the plurality of types of errors has occurred alone, single error notification control means for performing execution control of error notification corresponding to the error being generated;
When at least two types of errors among the plurality of types of errors are duplicated, an error notification priority determination unit that determines an error notification priority that is previously associated with each error that is occurring;
Based on the error notification priority determined by the error notification priority determination means,
Priority error notification control means for controlling execution of error notification for each error during the occurrence of duplication,
The priority error notification control means includes
For error notification using the sound effect and the light effect, priority is given to error notification corresponding to an error having a relatively high error notification priority among the errors occurring in the overlap,
For error notification using the image display effect, a gaming machine configured to display error information capable of specifying each error in the occurrence of duplication on the image display means.

  Hereinafter, the error notification mode according to the present embodiment will be specifically described.

(Error notification list, relationship between movable object and LCD screen: Fig. 35)
FIG. 35 shows a list of notification forms of types of errors that may be generally handled as errors. In the present embodiment, the second movable body accessory error A in the list of FIG. 35 (“movable body accessory error” in this embodiment) and the door opening error are selected and used. Yes. FIG. 35 shows the positional relationship that the movable body accessory can take with respect to the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. For example, in the present embodiment, the flower-shaped accessory 90 is installed in the right region Y of the liquid crystal screen. Therefore, other movable body accessory is installed in the upper region X and the left region Z other than this region. can do. Further, in the present embodiment, control is performed in which the flower cover portion inside the flower-shaped accessory 90 is moved left and right in a predetermined operation pattern in the upper region Z of the liquid crystal screen. Control that causes the body accessory to move in a predetermined region in a predetermined operation pattern may be performed.

  Next, an embodiment when a door opening error and a movable body accessory error occur will be described. The first point to be noted here is that the door opening error is a main error for which the main control unit 20 is a determination subject, and the movable body accessory error is a sub error for which the effect control unit 24 is a determination subject. . Accordingly, the door opening error is notified based on the fact that the main error command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, whereas the movable body accessory error is about the origin position of the movable body accessory. There is a difference between them in that an error notification is made based on the output signals from the position detection sensors 82a, 91a, 92a and the output signal from the encoder for the current position being input to the effect control unit 24.

  In addition, the second point to be noted is that, in this embodiment, superiority or inferiority is added between the error notification of the door opening error and the error notification of the movable object error. The point is that the error notification priority is set higher than the error notification of the movable body accessory error. This includes the case where a door opening error occurs based on a goto action, but in the case of a movable object error, since there is no direct relationship with such a goto action, comparing the two, This is because the door opening error is considered to be more serious in the progress of the game and the damage to the gaming machine than the object error, that is, “notification priority is high”. If the priority order is determined between error notifications in this way, the restriction when the priority order is determined between error commands (the restriction that the main control unit 20 can only compare errors for which determination is made) is removed, and the production control unit Even errors handled by can be compared.

  36 to 38 are diagrams for explaining the processing method when errors are duplicated. (A) in FIG. 36 is a diagram exemplifying a case where a movable body accessory error and a door opening error occur independently, and FIG. 36 (B) shows a movable body accessory error and a door opening error. It is the figure which illustrated the case where occurred in duplicate. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a normal notification mode in which no error has occurred and a notification mode when a movable body accessory error occurs alone. FIG. 38 shows a movable body accessory error alone. It is the figure which showed the alerting | reporting aspect in the case of having performed, and the alerting | reporting aspect when a movable body accessory error and a door open error generate | occur | produced redundantly. In each figure, the length of the solid arrow (“→” in the figure) exaggerates the time length of the error notification period for convenience of explanation.

  First, in the case of FIGS. 36A and 36B, the occurrence of the movable body accessory error is detected by the effect control unit 24 at time t0, and the movable body accessory error notification is made, and this error notification continues until time t1. Shows the case. There are the following cases as a gaming environment in which such a situation is born.

  Referring to FIG. 37, for example, effect control unit 24 has a variation pattern designation command with a relatively high winning expectation (for example, a reach variation pattern designating SP reach (weak SP reach or strong SP reach)). Is received from the origin position p0 (the position at which the flower-shaped accessory 90 covers a portion outside the liquid crystal screen or inside the liquid crystal screen). ) To move to the action position p1 shown in FIG. 37 (A) and then return to the origin position p0 is a normal effect movement action of the flower-shaped accessory 90. In this example, it is assumed that the operation of the flower-shaped accessory 90 is a movable body effect for increasing the expected expectation.

  FIG. 37A shows a state in which the flower-shaped accessory 90 is at the action position p1, the decoration lamp 45 is lit, and the effect sound “♪” is generated from the speaker 46. However, after that, the physical movement stops due to some abnormality (mechanical restraint, malfunction of detection switch system, abnormality of program processing, etc.), and the flower-shaped accessory 90 is in the middle of the above-described stage movement operation, that is, the origin position. There is a case where it stops and stops at one place p2 other than p0. When such a situation occurs, a movable body accessory error occurs (here, the movable body accessory error occurs alone), and the flower-shaped accessory 90 remains stationary at its action position p2. The effects related to reach fluctuations (SP reach effects, reach effects based on decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display section R), hold indications in the hold display areas 76 and 77, and the progress of the game are continued as they are. At this time, the flower-shaped accessory 90 remains stationary at a position p2 where the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is partially covered as shown in FIG. The movable object error can occur in such a gaming environment or a production scene. Note that the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed from the normal display position (see FIG. 5) to the display position of the decorative symbol display portion R in order to emphasize the reach effect when the SP reach effect occurs ( (Evacuation display). As for the movable object, as already described, the flower-shaped object 90 may operate in the operation pattern for the demo screen, the clock hand 82 may operate, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 It may operate in the operation pattern for checking the operation of the accessory when the power is turned on. Therefore, this error is not necessarily generated only during the symbol variation display game.

  If a movable body accessory error occurs (if the movable body feature stops in the middle of the production movement), the warning message will be hidden when displayed at the normal display position (for example, the top of the screen). It may be done. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37 (B), when the movable body accessory performs the rendering operation at the position where the warning sentence is displayed, the display position or display where the warning sentence is hidden by the movable body accessory. An error image display effect is displayed in which a warning text is displayed not in the area but in a display position or display area (for example, the center of the liquid crystal screen) that is not hidden.

  In the present embodiment, when a movable body accessory error occurs at time t0 in FIG. 36 (B), an error 21 movable body is displayed on the liquid crystal screen as shown in FIG. 38 (A). A warning sentence E1 such as “object error” is displayed, and the sound generated from the speaker 46 is changed from the production sound “♪ (production sound during normal operation)” to the warning sound “P (error production sound)”. 45 changes to a warning light emission color different from that at the time of production (indicated by hatching), for example, all the decoration lamps 45 blink white at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms. The duration of this movable body accessory error continues until the above-described abnormality is removed, that is, until the cause of the stop of the flower-shaped accessory 90 is removed. Time t1 in FIG. 36 (B) indicates a point in time when this abnormality is canceled.

  This movable body accessory error is canceled by the pachinko hall clerk as follows. First, when a pachinko hall clerk who is away from the pachinko gaming machine 1 notices an error notification sound production or light production started at time t0, he or she goes to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and goes to the liquid crystal on the liquid crystal display device 36. By looking at the warning text E1 (error image display effect) displayed on the screen, it is confirmed that a movable body accessory error is currently occurring. Then, the cause of the movable body accessory error is removed by the pachinko hall clerk so that the movable body accessory error is canceled. In order to cancel the abnormality of the movable body accessory error, the cause may be removed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may need to be restarted.

  The warning text E1 that the pachinko hall clerk or player confirms with the image display effect is displayed at the center of the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. The reason for displaying in the central part of the liquid crystal screen in this way is that the warning text E1 may be hidden by the flower-shaped accessory 90 when displayed on the upper part of the liquid crystal screen instead of the central part. This is to make it easy to recognize what type of error has occurred without being interrupted. Therefore, the production control unit 24 determines the position for displaying the warning text E1 in consideration of the stationary position and the motion range of the flower-shaped accessory 90. The display method of the error notification image display effect, including the warning text display method based on the position of the flower-shaped accessory 90, will be specifically described below.

(Generation of door opening error during movable object error: time ty in FIG. 36B)
In the example of FIG. 36 (B), after the movable body accessory error occurs at time t0, the door opening error occurs at time ty at time ty during the period t0 to t1 during which the movable body accessory error continues. Assume that it occurs. This door opening error occurs when the pachinko hall clerk opens the front frame 2 or the glass door 6 as necessary for business, or it is caused by fraudulent acts and occurs. It seems that the period of time is not so long. Accordingly, the duration of the door opening error is relatively short compared to the case of the movable body accessory error (see, for example, time t0 to tx in FIG. 36A), and the open front frame 2 is open until time tz. Or it becomes a period until the glass door 6 is closed. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that a door opening error occurs when the front frame 2 or the glass door 6 is opened by a pachinko hall clerk in order to remove the cause of the movable body accessory error.

  FIG. 36B shows that under such a premise, the door is opened at the time ty during the period t0 to t1 in which the movable body accessory error continues after the occurrence of the movable body accessory error at the time t0. A case where an error notification is generated, that is, a case where a movable body accessory error and a door opening error overlap between times ty to t1 is shown.

  In the production control unit 24, when different types of errors overlap with each other, first, an error in which “error notification priority (refer to error notification priority in FIG. 34)” regarding which one should be notified first is determined. A notification priority table is provided. Therefore, as a result of comparing the movable body accessory error and the door opening error, the effect control unit 24 determines that the door opening error has a higher error notification priority than the movable body accessory error. When this error notification priority is re-expressed, in FIG. 36B, at time t0, after a movable object accessory error notification with a low error notification priority occurs, the movable object error notification continues. This is an example in which a door opening error notification with a high error notification priority occurs at time ty during a period t0 to t1. That is, the movable body accessory error and the door opening error are overlapped between the times ty to tz in the times ty to t1. Therefore, the production control unit 24 prioritizes the door opening error notification having a higher error notification priority in accordance with the error notification priority, and performs error notification processing at the time of duplication as follows.

(Error notification processing when different types of errors occur)
Concerning the error notification at the time of duplication, for the image display effect, both warning texts of the movable body accessory error notification and the door opening error notification are displayed on the same screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. In this example, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), “error 21 movable body accessory error” is used as the warning sentence E1 of the movable body accessory error notification, and “error 01 door” is used as the warning sentence E2 of the door opening error notification. Is displayed. "Is displayed. Here, a warning sentence E1 of a door opening error having a high error notification priority is displayed on the top of the liquid crystal screen, and then a warning message E2 of a movable object error having a low error notification priority is displayed. An example is shown. As a result, it is specified that the currently occurring error is a movable body accessory error and a door opening error. In the column of (c) image display effect in FIG. 36B, both the movable body accessory error and the door opening error are indicated by solid lines in the section from time ty to tz. It means that it is made by the notification mode.

In addition to the image display effect for error, the effect performed on the liquid crystal display device 36,
The SP reach effect is continuously executed as it is. However, as shown in FIG. 38B, the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display section R and the hold display in the hold display areas 76 and 77 are not displayed. Alternatively, it can be displayed on the back side as an error image display effect as a display with a low display priority.

  In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37 (B) and FIG. 38 (A), when a movable body accessory error that is an error with a relatively low error notification priority occurs, As shown in FIG. 38B, the decorative symbol variation display and the hold display in the hold display areas 76 and 77 are not hidden. However, if an error with a higher error notification priority (for example, No. 1 to No. 12) occurs, the player's attention will be collected in a warning sentence because it is expected that serious damage will be expected if the error is left without being released. Further, as shown in FIG. 38B, the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display section R is not displayed. In this way, when an error with a relatively high error notification priority occurs, a specific display area for executing an effect related to the game is displayed on the screen by setting the non-display as described above. The warning message is emphasized to make it easy to recognize and can effectively notify the player and the pachinko hall clerk that a high-severity error has occurred.

  As for the sound effect, the sound effect of the movable body accessory error is switched to the sound effect of the door opening error at the time ty in the column of the sound effect (b) in FIG. That is, the warning sound “P” of the movable body accessory error shown in FIG. 38A is switched to the warning sound message “door is open” of the door opening error having a higher error notification priority.

  As for the light effect, in the column of (a) light effect in FIG. 36B, at time ty, from the light effect of the movable object error, the light effect of the door opening error having a higher error notification priority than that. Switch to In other words, the decorative lamp 45 has a warning light emission color (indicated by oblique lines) of the movable object error shown in FIG. 38A (for example, all the decorative lamps 45 blink white at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms). From FIG. 38B, a warning light emission color (indicated by double diagonal lines) of the door opening error (for example, all the decorative lamps 45 blink red at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms) is switched.

  Therefore, when the flower-shaped accessory 90 is abnormally stopped while covering a part of the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 as shown in FIG. Due to the priority relationship, an error notification mode corresponding to the door opening error is executed for the sound effect and the light effect (for example, a message “door is open” is uttered, and the decorative lamp 45 is used as the light effect. A warning light emission color corresponding to the opening error is emitted or blinked), and the door opening error is preferentially generated instead of the error notification of the movable object error. On the other hand, for the image display effect, information that can identify both errors (for example, warning message E1 of “Error 01 door is open”, “Error 21 movable object error” shown in FIG. 38B), E2) is displayed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the door opening error is positioned as having a relatively high degree of seriousness with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1 among a plurality of types of errors that occur, so that the identification should be given priority. Makes it possible from a visual and auditory point of view. Therefore, even when different types of errors occur repeatedly, the error notification mode based on the error notification priority order makes it possible to easily identify a plurality of types of errors, and the relative severity is relatively high. High errors can be easily identified. In addition, it is possible to quickly deal with errors in descending order of severity, and it is easy to return to a normal game operation.

(Error notification processing when error duplication is resolved)
In FIG. 36 (B), when the front frame 2 or the glass door 6 is closed at time tz, the door opening error disappears. At this time, the entire period (time t0 to t1) in which the movable body accessory error is to be notified is managed by a notification period management counter (not shown), and has not ended yet, so the door opening error disappears at time tz. At the same time, the notification of the movable object error is resumed, and the state returns to the state of FIG. This means that an error notification is made until the cause of the movable body accessory error is eliminated, and is an important hint in searching for the cause of the movable body accessory error. More specifically, when a second error having a higher error notification priority occurs during execution of error notification corresponding to the first error (first error notification), the first currently being executed In the configuration in which the error notification is completely stopped and the error notification related to the second error (second error notification) is preferentially executed, the second error is canceled, but the first error is still In the case where is not released, the error notification of the first error is not executed again. Then, there is a problem that there is no way to know this even though the first error is not canceled. However, in the case of the present embodiment, if the first error is not eliminated, the error notification of the first error is continuously executed. Therefore, unless all errors are resolved, error notification for unresolved errors is executed, so that unresolved errors can be notified regardless of the error notification priority.

  In the above-described case, a case has been described in which a door opening error having an error notification priority higher than that occurs during the occurrence of a movable object error. However, as a reverse pattern, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, there may be a case where a movable object error having a lower error notification priority occurs during a door opening error. FIG. 39 shows an example of the reverse pattern, and FIG. 40 shows the error notification mode. Here, a case where a door opening error occurs between time ty and time tz and a movable body accessory error occurs between time t0 and time t1 is shown. That is, in this case, the movable body accessory error and the door opening error overlap each other between times t0 and tz of times ty to t1. In this case as well, while the door opening error from time ty to t0 is occurring alone, an error notification for the door opening error is executed (FIG. 40A), and the movable object error at times t0 to tz is performed. While the door opening error overlaps, the sound notification and the light effect are executed for the sound effect and the light effect, and the error notification mode corresponding to the door opening error with a high error notification priority is executed, and both errors are specified for the image display effect. Possible information is displayed (FIG. 40B). Then, the door opening error ends at the time tz when the door opening error is canceled, and after the time tz, an error notification for the movable body accessory error that has not been canceled is executed, and the error of the movable body error is detected. The error notification is continued until time t0 when the is released (FIG. 39 (c)).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the “movable body accessory error” and the “door opening error” having a higher error notification priority than that occur, the error notification by the image display effect is performed. The warning text that can identify the error that is occurring is displayed (here, the identification information that can identify the occurrence of the movable object error and the occurrence of the door opening error is displayed). Gives priority to the error notification corresponding to the “door opening error” with a high error notification priority, interrupts the sound effect and the light effect for the movable object error, or an effect scenario for error notification being executed Mask. As a result, regarding the error notification, it is possible to specify that the sound effect and the light effect correspond to the door release error, and the image display effect that the door release error and the movable object error are occurring. Information will be notified.

  By the way, the error command transmitted from the main control unit 20 can be configured so that priority is given to the error processing, but in this case, the priority is set only for the main error, and for the sub error. Therefore, there is a problem that the sub-error notification is not effectively executed because no priority order is provided. However, in the case of this embodiment, not only is priority given to the error command transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, but all errors including errors belonging to the main error and errors belonging to the sub error are included. Has a priority. Thereby, only error notification corresponding to the error command, that is, error notification corresponding to the error belonging to the main error is executed, or error notification not corresponding to the error command, that is, error notification corresponding to the error belonging to the sub error is executed. The problem that is not done does not occur. Therefore, error notification for all errors including sub errors can be executed.

  In the above description, the movable body accessory error and the door opening error have been described as examples, but the same processing as described above can be applied between other errors. For example, the above-mentioned various errors ((1-1) RAM clear error to (1-14) ball clogging error, (2-1) movable body accessory error defined in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment (2-3) Production board error) and errors that may be generally handled as shown in FIG. 35, error notification priorities are set in advance as shown in FIG. Based on the priority order, an error having the highest severity regarding the game can be notified by an error sound effect and an error light effect, and all errors including other errors can be notified by an error image display effect.

  In the above description, the case where two errors, that is, the movable body accessory error (error notification ranking No. 17) and the door opening error (error notification ranking No. 12) have been described as an example, but these two errors occur. Even when other errors continue to occur, error notification based on the error notification priority is executed. For example, when two errors, a movable body accessory error and a door opening error, are generated, and a ball clogging error (error notification ranking No. 22) further occurs, and three errors occur, these three errors occur. Among the two errors, the error notification of the door opening error with the highest error notification priority is executed in preference to the other two error notifications. That is, the door opening error notification is preferentially executed for the sound effect and the light effect, and for the image display effect, the warning message for the movable body accessory error, the warning message for the door opening error, and the warning message for the ball clogging error are displayed. Are displayed. In this state (when three errors are occurring), if a “big prize opening illegal prize error” that has an error notification priority higher than the door opening error occurs, the special prize opening illegal prize error notice is given priority. Is done. That is, for the sound production and the light production, the grand prize opening illegal prize error notification is executed with priority, and for the image display production, the warning message of the moving object error, the warning message of the door opening error, and the ball clogging error Three types of warning texts are displayed, and a warning text for the big prize opening illegal winning error is displayed.

<Processing on the main control unit side: FIGS. 7 to 23>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 7 to 23, the game operation process on the main control unit 20 side of the present embodiment will be described. The main control unit 20 side mainly includes a predetermined main process (main control side main process: FIG. 7) and a timer interrupt process (main control side timer interrupt process: activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC). 8).

<6. Main process on the main control side: FIG. 7>
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control unit 20 side. The main process starts when the power is turned on without operating the initialization switch (not shown), such as when recovering from a power failure, and when the initialization switch is turned on. May turn on. In any case, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, a voltage is supplied to each control board by a power control board (not shown), and the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) performs main processing on the main control side shown in FIG. Start.

  In the main control side main process, the CPU 201 first executes a necessary initial setting process before the start of the gaming operation (step S011). For example, it first sets itself to an interrupt disabled state, sets it to a predetermined interrupt mode (interrupt mode 2), and initializes register values in the CPU including each part of the microcomputer.

  Next, the state (ON, OFF) of the RAM clear signal which is an output signal of the RAM clear switch inputted through an input port (not shown) is determined (step 012). Here, the RAM clear signal is a signal for determining whether or not to initialize the entire area of the RAM, and usually has a value corresponding to the ON / OFF state of the initialization switch operated by the store clerk of the pachinko parlor. doing.

  Here, assuming that the RAM clear signal is in the ON state, the determination result in step S012 is “YES”, and the entire area of the RAM is cleared to zero (step S016). Therefore, the value of the backup flag set at the time of power-off becomes zero together with other checksum values.

  Next, a “RAM clear display command” for notifying that the RAM area has been cleared to zero is transmitted as an initialization command to each control board (step S017). Then, for example, 30 seconds is stored in the RAM clear notification timer as a time for notifying that the RAM is cleared (step S018). When the RAM clear is executed, the gaming state is initialized, the internal gaming state is the normal gaming state, and the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)) is 00H which designates the normal state. Also, when the effect control unit 24 receives the RAM clear display command, an initialization notification effect for notifying that the RAM has been cleared is executed until the RAM clear notification timer (30 seconds) elapses. As the state effect mode, the effect mode is set to the normal effect mode under the normal state.

  Next, the CTC that outputs an interrupt signal for starting the timer interrupt operation is initialized (step S019), and the CPU is set in an interrupt enabled state.

  Thereafter, the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state are repeated until an interrupt occurs, and various random number update processes are executed during that time (steps S020 to S022). In this various random number update processing (step S021), various random numbers used in special symbol variation display games and normal symbol variation display games (random numbers related to jackpot lotteries circulating through a predetermined numerical range by increment processing (used for symbol lottery) Random numbers used for changing the initial value (start value) of the random numbers for special symbol determination) and random numbers related to lottery per auxiliary (random numbers for determining per-subject winning lottery per auxiliary) The initial value random number for determination and the initial value random number for determination per auxiliary) and the random number for variation pattern used for selecting the variation pattern are updated.

  In the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, a special symbol determination random number counter initial value generation counter, a special symbol determination counter, and the like as various random number counters used for symbol lottery related to jackpot lottery, supplementary lottery, or variation pattern lottery, etc. There are provided a random number counter, a counter for generating an initial value per auxiliary counter, a counter for generating an initial value per auxiliary, a random number counter for variation pattern, and the like. These counters serve as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. In the various random number update processing in step S021, the above-described special symbol determination random number counter, the two initial value generation counters for generating the initial value of the auxiliary hit determination random number counter, the fluctuation pattern random number counter, and the like are updated. Generate various soft random numbers. For example, assuming that the range of values that can be taken as the variation pattern random number counter is 0 to 238, a value is obtained from the count value storage area for generating the variation pattern random number value in the RAM 203, and 1 is added to the obtained value. And stored in the original count value storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 239, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters are updated in the same manner. The CPU 201 is configured to repeatedly execute various random number update processes except during a timer interrupt process that is executed intermittently.

  Returning to the determination process in step S012, the description will be continued. At the time of recovery from the power failure state, the initialization switch (RAM clear signal) is in the OFF state (step S012: YES). In such a case, the backup flag value is determined following the determination process in step S012 (step S013). Note that the backup flag is set to the ON state (backup flag = 5 AH (“** H” means any hexadecimal number) when the power is cut off), and the backup flag is set to the OFF state (backup) The flag is reset to 00H).

  Therefore, when the power is turned on or when recovering from a power failure, the backup flag should normally be in the ON state. However, the backup flag is reset (OFF) if the predetermined processing is not completed before the power is cut off for some reason. Therefore, when the backup flag is in the OFF state (step S013: NO), the process proceeds to step S016 to return the operation of the gaming machine to the initial state.

  On the other hand, if the backup flag is in an ON state (step S013: YES), a checksum calculation for calculating a checksum value is executed. Here, the checksum operation is an 8-bit addition operation for the work area of the RAM 203. When the checksum value is calculated, the calculation result is compared with the stored value at the SUM address in the RAM 203 (step S014). The SUM address stores a checksum value obtained by the same checksum calculation when the power is turned off. The stored calculation result is maintained by a backup power source together with other data of the RAM 203. Therefore, originally, both should match according to the determination in step S014.

  However, if the checksum operation could not be executed when the power was turned off, or even if it can be executed, the data in the work area may be damaged before the checksum operation of the main process is executed. In such a case, the determination result in step S014 is inconsistent. If data corruption is detected due to a discrepancy between the determination results (step S014: NO), the process proceeds to step S016, RAM clear processing is executed, and the operating state of the gaming machine is returned to the initial state. On the other hand, when the checksum value obtained by the checksum calculation matches the stored value at the SUM address (step S014: YES), the stack pointer before power shutdown is restored based on the backup data, and the processing at power shutdown is performed. A game restoration process necessary for starting the game from the state is performed (step S015). Also, in the game restoration process, predetermined information for game restoration is obtained from the backup information (the number of special figure 1 and special figure 2 operation hold balls, the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) and the internal game at the time of power-off. State information, etc.) and various effect control commands (power return command) including the information are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. As a result, the effect control unit 24 is informed of the game progress state when the power is cut off, and is restored to the effect state when the power is cut off when the game is restored.

  When the game restoration process of step S015 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of step S019, the CTC is initialized and the CPU is set to the interrupt enabled state. Thereafter, the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state In the meantime, the above-described various random number update processes are executed (steps S020 to S022).

<7. Main control timer interrupt processing: Fig. 8>
Next, a timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main control timer interruption process. This main control side timer interrupt process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 4 ms) from the CTC, and interrupted and executed during execution of the main control side main process. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the address value (including data described in the address) when the CPU 201 reads / writes the main memory such as RAM and ROM, the result information obtained by the arithmetic processing on the program, etc. A process such as reading into and taking in a CPU built-in register is sometimes referred to as “acquisition”, and when the CPU 201 accesses a work area of the RAM and stores predetermined data is sometimes referred to as “storage”.

  In FIG. 8, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 first saves the contents of the register in the stack area, and then performs a power supply abnormality check process for monitoring the power supply state from the power supply control board (step S051). In this power abnormality check process, it is mainly monitored whether the power is normally supplied. Here, for example, when an abnormality such as a power interruption occurs, a backup process is performed in which predetermined game information at the time of power interruption is stored in the RAM so that the game can be restored without any trouble when the power is restored.

  Next, a timer management process for managing a timer used for game operation control is performed (step S052). Timer values of various timers (for example, special symbol accessory operation timer described later) used for game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are managed (updated) here.

  Next, input management processing is performed (step S053). In this input management process, information detected by various sensors provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the winning counter. Here, the detection information by various sensors includes, for example, an upper start opening sensor 34a, a lower start opening sensor 35a, a normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, a lower large winning opening sensor 42a, a right large winning opening sensor 52a, and a general winning opening sensor. This is ON / OFF information (winning detection information) of a switch signal output from a winning detection switch such as 43a. Thereby, it is monitored for each interruption whether or not a game ball is detected (winning occurs) at each winning opening. The “winning counter” is a counter that is provided corresponding to each winning slot and counts the number of winning game balls (the number of winning balls). In the present embodiment, in a predetermined area of the RAM 203, an upper start opening winning counter for the upper starting opening 34, a lower starting opening winning counter for the lower starting opening 35, a normal symbol starting opening winning counter for the normal pattern starting opening 37, A prize winning counter for the prize winning opening 40, a prize winning prize winning counter for the right prize winning opening 50, a prize winning counter for the general winning opening for the general winning opening 43, and the like are provided.

  This input management process also functions as an abnormality determination means for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, and is based on whether or not the detection information from the winning detection switch has won a prize during a period in which a prize should be allowed. Whether or not there is an illegal winning. For example, even though the movable wing piece 47 is not in operation, the lower start port sensor 35a detects a game ball or does not play a big hit game (within the big winning port effective winning period), but the big winning port sensor 42a. Alternatively, if 52a detects a game ball, this is regarded as an illegal prize, and a predetermined error process is executed in an error management process (step S055) described later in order to notify the outside of the fact. It has become. Examples of the error related to the illegal prize include the big prize mouth illegal prize error and the lower big prize prize illegal prize error shown in FIG. When an illegal winning is detected, the detection information can be invalidated, and the payout of prize balls can be treated as invalid. Thereby, it is possible to effectively prevent a winning ball due to illegal winning.

  Next, random number management processing within a timer interrupt for periodically updating the random numbers related to each variable display game is performed (step S054). In this periodic random number update process, a special symbol determination random number or auxiliary per-subject determination random number is updated (+1 is added for each interrupt), and a process for changing the start value of the random number counter is performed each time the random number counter makes a round. For example, the value of the special symbol judgment random number counter is updated (added by +1) within a predetermined range, and the special symbol judgment random number counter initial value generation counter value is read each time the special symbol judgment random number counter makes one round. The value of the generation counter is stored in the special symbol determination random number counter. As a result, the start value of the special symbol determination random number counter is changed according to the value of the generation counter, so that the count value of the special symbol determination random number counter is random while the update cycle is constant.

  Next, an error management process for monitoring presence / absence of abnormality in the game operation state is performed (step S055). This error management process also functions as an abnormality determination means for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, monitors an abnormality in the game operation state, and if an operation abnormality (main error) occurs, an error process is performed. I do. Error processing according to the error type is performed. As the error processing, for example, a main error command corresponding to the error type is set so that a predetermined game operation (for example, a game ball payout operation or a game ball launch operation) is stopped or an error notification operation is executed. Or transmitted to the effect control unit 24.

  Further, in the error management process, in addition to the error notification process related to the illegal winning for the lower start opening 35 and the large winning openings 40 and 50, the error detection process from the fraud detection sensor 99 (magnetic sensor, radio wave sensor, or vibration sensor). Based on the detection information and status signals from the payout control board 29 (open / closed state signal, fullness detection signal, supply replenishment signal, payout shortage error signal, prize ball counting signal, etc.), an illegal act is detected and the main error (magnetic sensor) Error handling for errors, radio wave sensor errors, vibration sensor errors, door opening errors, ball clogging errors, replenishment errors, payout errors, etc. (if the error canceling conditions are met, cancel the currently occurring error) An error canceling process (including the above error canceling command transmission) is executed.

  Next, prize ball management processing is performed (step S056). In this winning ball management process, the data stored in the above input management process is grasped, the winning counter is checked, and if there is a winning, a payout control command for specifying the number of winning balls is issued as a payout control board (payout). Control unit) 29. Upon receiving this payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 to perform a payout operation for the designated number of prize balls. As a result, the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning mouth (a predetermined number of winning balls per winning ball promised for each winning mouth × the number of winning balls corresponding to the value of the winning counter) is paid out. Yes. If a winning ball is detected even during an error, a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 29.

  Next, normal symbol management processing is performed (step S057). In this normal symbol management process, a lottery per auxiliary in the normal symbol fluctuation display game is performed, and based on the lottery result, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol and the stop display mode of the normal symbol are determined, or blinking is repeated every predetermined time. Create normal symbol data (data for LED blinking display during normal symbol variation), and if normal symbol is not varying, create data for stop display (data for LED blinking display during normal symbol stop display) Or The normal symbol management process functions as an auxiliary game lottery unit and a normal symbol display unit (normal symbol display control unit) for controlling the normal symbol variation display operation.

  Next, the ordinary electric accessory management process is performed (step S058). In this ordinary electric accessory management process, generation of an excitation signal for solenoid control for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c necessary for the occurrence of the open electric game based on the lottery result of the auxiliary per lot in the normal symbol management process (step S057). And the data (solenoid control data) is set. Based on the data set here, an excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c in a solenoid management process described later, whereby the operation of the movable blade piece 47 is controlled. Note that the ordinary electric accessory management process functions as an auxiliary hit control means.

  Next, special symbol management processing is performed (step S059). In this special symbol management process (hit determination means), the big symbol lottery in the special symbol variation display game is mainly performed, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (prefetch variation pattern, variation pattern at the start of variation) based on the lottery result. And special stop symbols. Details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, special electric accessory management processing is performed (step S060). In this special electric utility management process, when the big hit lottery result is “big hit” or “small win”, a setting process necessary to execute and control the hit game corresponding to the win is performed. Details of the special electric accessory management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, right notification information management processing is performed (step S061). In this right-handed notification information management process, when the high-base gaming state in which “electric support is present” occurs, right-handed instruction information (information for instructing to aim at the right flow path 3c (normal symbol start port) 37 is performed to display a “launch position guidance effect (right-handed notification effect)” that informs 37 of the instruction information for prompting a prize)). The right-handed instruction information here is, for example, an image that prompts the player to “right-hand” on the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, a character display “right-handed”) or a right-handed sound from the speaker 46. Sound effects (eg, “Right-right” sound) are generated. This right-handed information is reported in a case where it is presumed that the player accidentally targets the launch position on the left flow path 3b side in the state where there is electric support, and in the state where there is electric support. The case where a winning occurs at the upper start opening 34, or the case where no winning occurs at the normal symbol starting opening 37 even after a predetermined time elapses. In such a case, in this right-handed notification information management process, a “right-handed instruction command” instructing the start of the launch position guidance effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 receives this command. The launch position guidance effect is controlled to appear.

  Next, LED management processing is performed (step S062). In this LED management process, display data is output to the normal symbol display device 39a and the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. Thereby, the change display and stop display of a normal symbol and a special symbol are performed. It should be noted that the normal symbol display data created in the normal symbol management process in step S057 and the special symbol display data update process (step S309 in FIG. 9 described later) during the special symbol management process in step S059 Display data is output by this LED management process.

  Next, external terminal management processing is performed (step S063). In this external terminal management process, the operation state information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output to an external device such as a hall computer HC or an island lamp through the frame external concentrated terminal board 21. The action status information includes information indicating that a big hit game has occurred (conditional device has been activated), that a small hit game has occurred, that a symbol variation display game has been executed, and winning information (winning at the start opening or big winning opening) And various information such as specific error occurrence information (for example, illegal winning prize error, magnetism / vibration / radio wave error, etc. for Goto action). By transmitting specific error occurrence information related to the goto action to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to effectively notify the pachinko hall monitoring system and the pachinko hall clerk that the goto action has occurred.

  Next, solenoid management processing is performed (step S064). In this solenoid management process, an excitation signal output process for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c based on the solenoid control data created in the ordinary electric accessory management process in step S058, and a special electric accessory management process in step S060. Excitation signal output processing for the special winning opening solenoid 52c based on the solenoid control data is performed. As a result, the movable wing piece 47 and the open door 52b operate in a predetermined pattern, and the lower start opening 35 and the right big prize opening 50 are opened and closed.

  After the processing of steps S051 to S064 is completed, the contents of the saved register are restored (register restoration processing), and the interrupt enabled state is set (step S065). Thus, the timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process before the interruption, and the main control side main process is performed until the next timer interruption occurs.

(8. Special symbol management processing: Fig. 9)
Next, the special symbol management process (step S059) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol management process in step S059.

  In FIG. 9, the CPU 201 first performs a special figure 1 start port check process on the special symbol 1 side (upper start port 34 side) (step S301), and then a special symbol on the special symbol 2 side (lower start port 35 side). 2. A starting port check process is performed (step S302). Details of the special figure 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the start opening check process in steps S301 to S302 is completed, the state of the small hitting flag is determined (step S303). This “small hitting flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a small hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a small hit game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not being played.

  When the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S303: ≠ 5AH), the state of the condition device operation flag is then determined (step S304). The “conditional device operation flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the big hit game is not being played.

  If the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), that is, neither the small hit game nor the big hit game (step S303: ≠ 5AH and step S304: ≠ 5AH), special In accordance with the symbol operation status (00H to 03H), processing related to the special symbol variation display operation is performed (step S305: special symbol operation status branching process). On the other hand, when the small hit game is being played (step S303: = 5 AH) or the big hit game is being played (step S304: = 5 AH), the processing relating to the special symbol variable display operation in steps S306 to S308 is not performed. It progresses to the special symbol display data update process of step S309. Therefore, when either the small hit game or the big hit game, the special symbol variation display operation is not performed (the special symbol display state of the special symbol display device is displayed after the small hit or after the big hit) As it is). The “special symbol operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol. This status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

  In the special symbol operation status branching process of step S305, depending on which status value the special symbol operation status is “waiting (00H, 01H)”, “changing (02H)” or “confirming (03H)”. The processing corresponding to each is executed.

  Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is “standby (00H, 01H)”, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) is performed. When the symbol variation processing (step S307) is “confirming (03H)”, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) is executed. Here, “Waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next change, and “Waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (variation display). The above-mentioned “under confirmation” indicates that the special symbol has been changed and is stopped (confirmed) and is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time). By these processes, a variation display operation that sets a variation start and a variation stop of a special symbol is realized. Details of the special symbol variation start processing (step S306: FIG. 12), the special symbol variation processing (step S307: FIG. 14), and the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308: FIGS. 15A to 15B) are as follows. It will be described later.

  When any of the processes in steps S306 to S308 is completed, a special symbol display data update process in step S309 described later is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating. If it is fluctuating, special symbol data (special symbol) that repeats blinking every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). If the special symbol is not changing, data for stop display (data for 7-segment blink display during special symbol stop display) is generated. The special symbol display data created here is output in the LED management process (step S62) of FIG. 8, and the special symbol variation display and stop display on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. Thus, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process in step S060 of FIG.

(8-1. Special Figure 1 Starting Port Check Processing: FIG. 10)
First, the special figure 1 starting port check process (step S301 in FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 1 starting port check process in step S301. This special figure 1 start opening check process serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. Here, as a pre-start process for executing the special symbol variation display game 1, A process of adding the number of suspended balls on the special figure 1 side due to the winning of the upper start opening 34, a process of storing various random numbers, a process of creating a pending addition command, and the like are performed. The special figure 2 starting port check process (step S302 in FIG. 10), which will be described later, also serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, like the special figure 1 starting port check process. As the pre-start process for executing the symbol variation display game 2 (special figure 2 side winning process), the special pending figure 2 side operation pending ball number addition process caused by the occurrence of winning at the lower start opening 35, various random numbers The storage processing and the creation processing of the pending addition command are performed, and the processing contents are substantially the same as the special figure 1 starting port check processing described below.

  In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) has been detected at the upper start opening 34 (step S311).

  When the winning of the upper start opening 34 is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of the operation holding balls (hereinafter referred to as “special drawing 1 operation holding balls”) according to the special symbol 1 is less than the maximum holding memory number (here, the upper limit of four). If no winning is detected at the upper start opening 34 (step S311: NO), the special figure 1 start opening check process is exited without doing anything.

  If the winning of the upper start opening 34 is detected, but the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number is 4 or more (step S312: YES), the process proceeds to step S320 described later, and the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number is not four or more. If this is the case, that is, if it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the special figure 1 operation holding ball number (step S313), and the process proceeds to step S314.

  When the process proceeds to step S314, various random numbers used for the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the variation pattern random number are acquired from the random number counter, and the acquired random number value is stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203. The reserved storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operating reserve ball (holding data). Until the first variation display operation is performed (until the execution of the special symbol variation display game 1), it is held and stored in the order in which the start conditions are established (the winning order). The reserved memory area includes a reserved memory area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (a special symbol 1 reserved memory area corresponding to the special symbol 1 (first reserved memory area)) and a special symbol 2 And a special figure 2 reserved storage area (second reserved storage area) corresponding to. These reserved storage areas are provided with a reserved 1 storage area to a reserved n storage area (n is the maximum number of activated balls to be held: n = 4 in the present embodiment). (Holding storage order is stored in the order of holding 1 storage area, holding 2 storage area,..., Holding n−1 storage area, holding n storage area).

  Of the various random numbers, the special symbol determination random number and the variation pattern random number are extracted from a random number counter that generates a random number in software corresponding to each random number. Since the random number values of these random number counters are updated randomly in the main process executed between the interrupt process and the interrupt process that occur intermittently in the count value storage areas corresponding to each provided in the RAM 203, The value is obtained as it is.

  On the other hand, the jackpot determination random number value is extracted from a random number generation circuit (a jackpot determination random number counter) that generates a random number in hardware. This random number generation circuit latches the count value at this timing when a game ball detection signal is input from the upper start port sensor 34a or the lower start port sensor 35a, and the count value is input to the microcomputer. It has become. The CPU 201 stores this count value as a jackpot determination random number value in a storage area for the jackpot determination random value in the RAM 203 provided separately from the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 (a special electric accessory activation determination random number latch buffer). Then, at the necessary timing, the jackpot determination random number value stored in the random number latch buffer for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is read and used.

  Next, pre-read prohibition data (EVENT: “01H” for prohibiting the pre-read determination as winning command data (data corresponding to the lower byte (EVENT) of the hold addition command) for creating a pending addition command (details will be described later) ”) Is acquired (step S315), and it is determined whether the“ special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition ”is satisfied (step S316). The “special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition” is a condition for prohibiting the prefetch determination for the special figure 1 operation holding ball.

  When the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the prefetch determination for the current special figure 1 operation holding ball is not executed (the hold addition command is prohibited by the process of step S315). As a result, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed (see the processing route of step S316: YES). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the current gaming state. Specifically, the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 1 side is prohibited when the game state with the “electric support state” is in effect, that is, when the internal game state is in the probability change state. As described above, the reason for prohibiting the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 1 side when the game state is accompanied by the electric support state is as follows.

  The first reason is that when placed under the “electric support state”, the winning rate for the lower start opening 35 can be significantly improved over the normal gaming state “high base gaming state (movable wing piece 47 of Activating rate improvement state: The winning probability per assistance is 255/256, and the opening extension function is activated) ”, so that when the player aims the launch position to win the normal symbol start opening 37 ( Estimated that the number of working reserve balls related to the special symbol 2 (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 2 working reserve balls”) frequently occurs when the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c). Is done. On the other hand, when placed in a state without electric support, the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 is low “low base gaming state (the winning probability per assist is 1/256, and the open extension function is not activated. In this embodiment, the game ball is hardly guided or guided to the upper start opening 34 side due to a falling direction changing member such as a game nail. When aiming at the launch position on the normal symbol start opening 37 side, the game is such that it is particularly disadvantageous. For this reason, it is presumed that the player does not set the launch position so that the game ball passes through the left flow path 3b side during the electric support state, and the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 1 operation holding ball This is because if the pre-reading determination is performed one by one for the special FIG. 1 operation holding ball having a low occurrence rate, there is a problem that the control burden increases.

  The second reason is a problem of technical intervention. As an example of the problem of technical intervention, if only some pre-reading notice effect (especially a pre-fetching notice effect with a high expectation of winning a big hit) has occurred, Is recognized, the special symbol variation display game 2 which is the priority variation side is continuously executed without interrupting the special symbol 2 operation holding ball, and the special symbol 2 side (special symbol variation display game 2 side) It will be possible to continue the game while receiving the maximum benefits of the jackpot lottery. In this embodiment, “12R length opening probability variation big hit” and “16R length opening probability variation big hit”, which have higher profits, are more likely to be gained by receiving the symbol drawing on the special symbol 2 side than receiving the symbol lottery on the special symbol 1 side. (The details will be described later). For this reason, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the big win lottery on the special symbol 2 side (special symbol fluctuation display game 2 side) than to receive the big hit lottery on the special symbol 1 side (special symbol fluctuation display game 1 side). It is said to be expanded. Using this, if it is clear that the special figure 1 operation holding ball has won the big hit, after receiving the maximum benefit of the special symbol 2 side big hit lottery until the end of the power support state, The problem of technical intervention, such as digesting the special figure 1 operation holding ball and easily obtaining a big hit, causes inequalities among players.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in view of the above-described problems, the section (prefetch prohibition state) in which the prefetch determination on the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side is prohibited can be switched according to the gaming state. Yes. Specifically, the main control unit 20 prohibits the prefetch determination by the first prefetch determination means (for example, prefetch determination processing on the side of FIG. 1; corresponding to S317 to S323 in FIG. “First look-ahead prohibition state (for example, in a state where there is an electric support)” which permits a pre-read determination by a determination means (for example, a pre-read determination process on the special figure 2 side: corresponding to S337 to S343 in FIG. 11 described later) And “a second prefetch prohibition state (for example, in a state without electric support)” that prohibits the prefetch determination by the second prefetch determination unit and allows the prefetch determination by the first prefetch determination unit. A function unit is provided as 'prefetch prohibition state control means' that performs switching control based on a predetermined condition (for example, whether there is a current internal game state or a power support state).

  Returning to the description of step S316 again, if the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the processing related to the prefetch determination (steps S317 to S324) is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S320. .

  When the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), the process proceeds to step S317, and random number determination processing is performed (step S317). This random number determination process is performed as part of the 'prefetch determination' process. Here, the "winning lottery" relating to the current operation holding ball (here, the special figure 1 side) is performed. Perform 'prefetching judgment (prefetching failure judgment)' to judge in advance.

  When entering the random number determination process in step S317, first, the big hit determination random number value stored in the RAM 203 (special electric accessory operation determination random number latch buffer) is acquired, and then the per random number determination table for special figure 1 is acquired. . Then, based on the acquired jackpot determination random number value and the hit random number determination table, the winning lottery for the current operation holding ball (another determination of big hit, small hit and lose), that is, the current operation holding ball is The lottery result (the winning lottery result at the start of the fluctuation) of “special electric accessory activation determination random number determination process (see S409 in FIG. 12 described later)” executed when the variable display operation is performed is pre-readed.

(T-1. Per random number determination table)
The hit random number determination table includes a “random figure determination table for special figure 1 (not shown)” related to the special symbol fluctuation display game 1 and a “random figure determination table for special figure 2” related to the special symbol fluctuation display game 2. (Not shown) ".

  In these winning random number determination tables, the winning type (whether big hit, small hit or lost) is determined for each big hit lottery probability state (high probability state (high probability) and low probability state (low probability)). Are determined in association with a jackpot determination random number value (the size of the jackpot determination random number: 65536). Specifically, the jackpot determination random number value is any of the determination values. Either big hit, small hit, or loss is determined depending on whether or not it belongs to. Therefore, even when the acquired jackpot determination random number values belong to the same determination value (the same value for the jackpot determination random number value), the current jackpot lottery probability state is a high probability state or a low probability state. Depending on the situation, the winning type may be different, such as “big hit” on the one hand and “lost” on the other. The jackpot winning probability of this embodiment is about 1/397 in the low probability state, and about 1 / 39.7, which is about 10 times higher than that in the high probability state. The winning probability is about 1/200 regardless of the jackpot lottery probability state. In other words, the winning probability for the small hit is constant regardless of the big win lottery probability state, and in this respect, the personality is different from that of the above big hit whose fluctuation probability varies depending on the big win lottery probability state.

  If this winning lottery (pre-fetch winning determination) is a “big hit” win, the big hit determination flag is set to “5 AH (the big hit determination flag is ON)”, and if it belongs to other determination values, “ The big hit is not won (the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state). If the “small hit” win is selected, the small hit determination flag is set to “5AH (the small hit determination flag is ON)”, and if it belongs to other determination values, “small hit non-win (small) The hit determination flag is in the OFF state). Therefore, when the big hit determination random number value belongs to the determination value that is the big hit determination flag “00H” and the small hit determination “00H”, it means that neither “big hit” nor “small hit” was won, The current winning determination result is “lost” (the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag are in the OFF state).

  In the winning lottery by the special symbol change display game 2 (step S337 (see FIG. 11) during the special chart 2 starting port check process described later), the lottery using the “special figure 2 random number determination table” separately provided. Is done. In the special random number determination table for special figure 2 of the present embodiment, the determination area for the big win is the same (the winning probability for the big win is the same), but the determination value itself for the small win is not defined. In other words, in the special symbol fluctuation display game 1, the big win, the small hit, and the loss are targeted for the winning lottery, whereas in the special symbol variation display game 2, only the big win and the lost are targeted for the winning lottery. Of course, in the random number determination table for special figure 2 as well, the small hit may be determined as a winning lottery object.

  When the random number determination process in step S317 is completed, a special stop symbol data creation process is then performed (step S318). This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as part of the 'prefetch determination' process. Here, the 'symbol lottery' relating to the current operation holding ball is determined in advance 'prefetch determination (prefetch symbol determination: (Pre-judgment of winning (winning) type)) '.

  When entering the special stop symbol data creation process of step S318, first, the winning lottery result obtained by the random number determination process of step S317 is acquired, and the symbol table corresponding to this winning lottery result (aside from big hit, small hit and lost) (A big hit symbol table, a small hit symbol table, or a lost symbol table, which will be described later, is selected). Then, the random number value for special symbol determination acquired in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the random number value for special symbol determination, the symbol lottery for the current action holding ball, that is, the current action hold The lottery result (the symbol lottery result at the start of variation) of “special stop symbol creation processing (see S410 of FIG. 11 described later)” executed when the ball is subjected to the variable display operation is pre-readed.

(T-2. Symbol table)
In each of the symbol tables described above, a “special symbol determination random value (size of special symbol determination random value: 200)” and a determination area (determination value) for determining the winning type are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number are determined depending on which determination value the random number value for special symbol determination belongs to.

  The “special symbol determination data” is data for identifying a winning type (winning type: big hit type, small hit type, and loss type). Open non-probable large hit A, 2R short open non-probable large hit B, 5R long open probable large hit, 5R long open non-probable large hit, 12R long open probable large hit, 12R long open non-probable large hit, 16R long open probable large hit, small hit A / This is data for identifying which of B and Loss (if there are multiple types of loss, the type of loss: for example, Loss A to C) is won. This special symbol determination data is a process that requires winning type information (for example, a game state transition preparation process in step S411 in FIG. 12 described later, a special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S412 and a process related to execution control of jackpot game) (This is a special electric symbol management process (step S060) in FIG. 6.) The “special stop symbol number” designates a special stop symbol form to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. This is data and is used when the “stop symbol type” of the special symbol is specified on the main control unit 20 side.

(T-2-1. Big hit symbol table)
The jackpot symbol table of the present embodiment includes a “big hit symbol table 1” for the special symbol 1 related to the special symbol variation display game 1 and a “big hit symbol table 2” for the special symbol 2 related to the special symbol variation display game 2. Is included. In each jackpot symbol table, a special symbol judgment random number value and a judgment value for determining the jackpot type are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the special symbol judgment random number value is set to any judgment value. Depending on whether it belongs or not, one of the big hits is determined.

  In the jackpot symbol table 1, for example, when the special symbol determination random number value falls within the range of the determination values 0 to 9, a “2R short open latency big hit” win is won (symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability): 10 / 200), when it falls within the range of the judgment value 20 to 29, it becomes the “2R short open uncertain variation big hit” winning (symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability): 10/200), and when it falls within the range of the judgment value 80 to 149 "5R long open probability change big hit" wins (design selection rate: 70/200), if it falls within the range of judgment value 150-159, "5R long open non-probable big hit" wins (design selection rate: 20/200), If it falls within the range of the judgment values 160 to 189, the “12R length opening probability change big hit” wins (symbol selection rate: 30/200), and if it belongs to the range of the judgment values 190 to 199, “12R length opening” Probability variation big hit "winning and becomes (symbol selectivity: 10/200), big hit type is determined in a predetermined pattern selectivity, determining a special symbol data and the special stop symbol numbers corresponding thereto is adapted to be determined.

  The jackpot symbol table 2 has the same basic configuration as the jackpot symbol table 1, but differs from the jackpot symbol table 1 in the following points. The jackpot symbol table 2 is different from the jackpot symbol table 1 in a specific jackpot symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability). Specifically, when the special symbol determination random number value falls within the range of determination values 0 to 39, “2R short open non-probable big hit” wins (symbol selection rate: 40/200), and determination values 41 to 80 If it belongs to the range, it will win the “12R long open probability variable big hit” (symbol selection rate: 40/200), and if it belongs to the range of the judgment value 80 to 199, it will be won (the symbol selection rate) : 120/200), “5R long open uncertain variable big hit”, “5R short open non-probable big hit”, and “2R short open non-probable big hit” do not exist. That is, the symbol lottery with the jackpot symbol table 2 is more likely to be selected than the symbol lottery with the jackpot symbol table 1, which is a symbol lottery advantageous to the player. As a result, the game development is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery of the special symbol variation display game 2 than the special symbol variation display game 1. In particular, in the state with electric support, the winning probability on the lower start opening 35 side is dramatically improved and the execution chance of the special symbol variation display game 2 is increased. In addition to the symbol lottery, the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

(T-2-2. Small hits design table)
The small bonus symbol table of the present embodiment is used for both the special symbol variation display game 1 and the special symbol variation display game 2, and the random symbol value for special symbol determination is any one as in the configuration of the big bonus symbol table. Depending on whether or not it belongs to the determination area (determination value), the small hit type (any of small hits A to B) is determined with a predetermined symbol selection rate, and the corresponding special symbol determination data and special stop symbol number Is to be decided. The symbol selection rates for the small hits A to C can be set freely, but the relationship of the symbol selection probabilities is preferably “small hit A ≦ (or <) small hit B”. The reason is as follows. The small hit A is set to 2 times with the least number of CZ continuations, and the CZ period is the shortest. Therefore, even if it shifts to CZ, the tension to the latent state ends immediately, and the fun in CZ Lack. For this reason, rather than setting the small hit A to a relatively high symbol selection rate, it is better to increase the symbol selection rate of the small hit B in which the number of times close to the number of CZ continuations that can determine the latent state is set to four times. This is because it is effective in maintaining the tension to the latent state and improving the fun in CZ.

(T-2-3. Lost symbol table)
In the lost symbol table of the present embodiment, the “lost symbol table 1” for the special symbol 1 relating to the special symbol variation display game 1 and the “lost symbol table 2” for the special symbol 2 relating to the special symbol variation display game 2 are included. And are included.

  The lost symbol tables 1 and 2 are classified according to whether the special symbol determination random number value belongs to one of the determination areas (determination values), as in the configuration of the big hit symbol table or the small hit table. (For example, either Loss A or Loss B) is determined at a predetermined symbol selection rate, and special symbol determination data and special stop symbol numbers corresponding thereto are determined. Note that the lost symbol table 1 and the lost symbol table 2 have different determination values related to the winning of the lost symbols A to B. Therefore, even if the random numbers for special symbol determination are the same value, the lost symbol table 1 is referred to. The case where the winning symbol table 2 is referred may be different from the case where the winning symbol table 2 is referenced. In this embodiment, the winning probability of Loss B is determined to be lower than the winning probability of Loss A. For example, the SP reach is selected when Loss B is won than when Loser A is won. The proportion of being played is increasing.

  When the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318 described above is completed, a starting port winning random number determination process in step S319 is then performed. This start opening winning random number determination process is also performed as part of the 'prefetching determination' process, similar to the random number determination process (step S317) and the special stop symbol data creation process (step S318). 'Pre-reading determination (pre-reading variation pattern determination)' is performed to determine in advance the “variation pattern at the start of variation” related to the operation holding ball.

  Upon entering the start opening random number determination process, the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process in step S317, the 'symbol lottery' result obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318, and the step S314 Using the 'random number for variation pattern' obtained in the process, the variation pattern at the start of variation related to the current activated ball, that is, executed when the current activated ball is subjected to the variation display operation. The result (special pattern variation pattern creation processing (see S412 in FIG. 12 described later)) ”(the variation pattern content at the start of variation) is determined in advance. Then, based on the prefetch determination result, a creation process of winning command data (second byte (EVENT): lower byte) used for creating a “hold addition command” described later is performed. The contents of the look-ahead variation pattern (excluding reserved ball number information) are designated by the winning command data (EVENT) determined in the starting port winning random number determination process. Note that the random number determination process in step S317 to the start port winning random number determination process in step S319 is a process related to “pre-fetching determination”.

  When the random number determination process at the start opening winning in step S323 is completed, the winning command data on the upper byte (MODE) side that specifies the number of balls to be held at the time of the prefetch determination, and the lower byte (EVENT) side that specifies the prefetch variation pattern A “pending addition command” composed of the winning command data is created (step S320), and is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 without being stored in the RAM 203 (step S326). As a result, the special figure 1 start opening check process is exited, and then the special figure 2 start opening check process in step S302 of FIG. 11 is performed.

  The hold addition command is composed of 2-byte control data. Specifically, the higher byte (first byte (MODE) “BXH” (for example, B6H to B9H is special ) Corresponds to the number of the balls 1 for holding the action of the symbol 1 and BBH to BEH correspond to the numbers of the balls 1 to 4 for the special symbol 2 respectively)))) It is composed of lower bytes created by processing (second byte (EVENT) “XXH (XX is a numerical value corresponding to each command)” and corresponding to the contents of the prefetch variation pattern) (see FIG. 5). Therefore, this pending addition command includes prefetch determination result information obtained in a series of processes (steps S315 to S317) relating to prefetch determination, specifically, information that can specify a prefetch variation pattern. However, when the lower byte ((EVENT)) value is a specific value (for example, “01H”), prefetch prohibition is designated.

  When the hold addition command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 receives the lottery and performs a lottery (prefetch notice lottery) regarding whether or not to perform the prefetch notice effect based on information included in the hold addition command. If the result of the lottery is determined to be feasible (when the pre-reading notice lottery is won), the pre-reading for the currently activated ball at the start of the symbol variation display game or at a predetermined timing during the game Make a notice effect appear. In addition, when receiving the hold addition command, the effect control unit 24 may cause a “winning effect” to appear to indicate that a winning has been made at the start opening, regardless of whether or not a pre-reading notice effect is displayed. it can.

  Even when there is a new winning when the number of balls held for operation is four or more, a holding addition command at the time of an overflow winning (hereinafter abbreviated as “OF holding addition command”) is created, and the production control unit 24 is transmitted.

  Since the “OF hold addition command” is an overflow action hold ball, it is not used for the pre-reading determination but is used exclusively for the above “winning effect”. However, the following effects appear. Can be configured.

  For example, when the production control unit 24 receives the above-described OF hold addition command, if there is a “big hit (may include a small win)” among the current operation hold balls, this is indicated. You may comprise so that the notice effect (notice effect on hold at the time of OF winning) can be shown. In this case, when receiving the hold addition command, the production control unit 24 stores the prefetch determination information storage means for storing the prefetch determination information included therein, and when receiving the OF hold addition command, If there is a thing that becomes a “big hit (may include a small win)”, the fact that there is a possibility of a big hit is notified (you may decide whether to notify by a predetermined notification lottery) And an on-hold notice effect means.

  In addition, when the result of the currently running symbol fluctuation display game is “big hit (may include small hits)”, a notice effect (notice effect during fluctuation when OF winning) can be displayed. You may comprise. In this case, when the effect control unit 24 receives the OF hold addition command, the effect control unit 24 notifies that there is a possibility that the game result related to the current symbol variation is “big hit (may include small hits)” (predetermined It may be determined whether or not to notify by a notification lottery).

  The notice effect by such an OF hold addition command is similar to the over winning effect that appears when an overflow prize is generated, but the result of the symbol variation display game for which the final result has not yet been derived has been read-ahead. It plays the same role as the pre-reading notice effect.

(8-2. Special Figure 2 Starting Port Check Processing: FIG. 11)
Next, the special figure 2 starting port check process (step S302 in FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 2 starting port check process.

  The special figure 2 starting port check process, like the special figure 1 starting port check process, serves as a winning process executed based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition. Here, the special symbol variation display game 2 In the same way as the flow of the special figure 1 start port check process described above, as the pre-start process for executing the process, the addition process of the number of suspended balls for operation, the process of storing various random numbers, the process of creating a pending addition command, etc. Processing is performed. Hereinafter, the same processing content as the above-described special figure 1 start opening check processing (step S301) will be described by omitting as appropriate in order to avoid duplication.

  In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) has been detected at the lower start opening 35 (step S331).

  If no winning detection is detected at the lower start opening 35 (step S331: NO), the special figure 2 start opening check process is exited without doing anything. However, when the winning of the lower start opening 35 is detected (step S331: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of the operation reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is 4 or more (step S332).

  When the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is 4 or more (step S332: YES), the process proceeds to step S340. On the other hand, when the number of special figure 2 operation reservation balls is not 4 or more, that is, when it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), the special figure 2 operation reservation balls number is incremented by 1 (+1) (step S333). Proceed to processing.

  When the processing proceeds to step S334, various random numbers (random hit determination random number, special symbol determination random number, and variation pattern random number) used in the special symbol variation display game 2 related to the special symbol 2 operation holding ball generated this time. The current value of the random number counter is acquired and stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 (step S334). This process is the same as the process in step S314 of FIG. The special figure 2 operation hold ball is stored in the order in which the start conditions are satisfied, with the maximum hold storage number as a predetermined upper limit value, until it is used for the variable display operation of the special symbol 2.

  Next, prefetch prohibition data (lower byte “01H”) prohibiting prefetch determination is acquired as winning command data (step S335), and it is determined whether or not the “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is satisfied (step S335). S336). The “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is a condition for prohibiting the prefetch determination for the special figure 2 operation holding ball.

  When the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S336: YES), the prefetch determination for the current special figure 2 operation holding ball is not executed, and thereby the prefetch notice effect is not executed. (Step S336: YES processing route). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the current gaming state. Specifically, when the game state is accompanied by a 'game state with no electric support' state, that is, when the internal game state is in the normal game state or the latent state, the special symbol 2 side is read ahead. Judgment is prohibited. As described above, the reason for prohibiting the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 2 side when the game state is accompanied by the state without the electric support is as follows.

  If it is “normal game state” or “latent probability state”, it is placed under the “no electric support state”, and the winning rate of the lower start opening 35 is significantly reduced. Further, as already described, in the present embodiment, when the player targets the launch position on the normal symbol start opening 37 side in the state without the electric support, the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the left flow path 3b. This is a gameability that is disadvantageous for the player, such that the winning rate of the upper start opening 34 is significantly lower than the case where the above is determined. For this reason, it is presumed that the player does not aim the launch position on the normal symbol start opening 37 side during the state without the electric support. Therefore, in the absence of the electric support, it is not necessary to generate the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 2 operation holding ball, and the prefetch determination is performed one by one for the special figure 2 operation holding ball having a low occurrence rate. This is because there arises a problem that the control burden increases.

  In the present embodiment, the pre-reading prohibited section on the special symbol 1 side (prefetching prohibited state period) and the pre-reading prohibited section on the special symbol 2 side can be switched according to the gaming state. It is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which no pre-reading determination is performed on either the special symbol 1 side or the special symbol 2 side according to the gaming state. Also, during CZ, the expectation of the high probability state is drawn by the effect made under the corresponding dedicated CZ effect mode, and the CZ period is also relatively short, so during CZ, It is preferable that the prefetch determination is set as a prefetch prohibition section so that the prefetch notice effect is not displayed.

  Returning to the description of step S336 again, when the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S336: YES), the process proceeds to step S340. However, when the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S336: NO), the process proceeds to step S337, and random number determination processing is performed (step S337). In this random number determination process, “prefetching winning determination” related to the special symbol variation display game 2 is performed. Further, the processing method is substantially the same as the random number determination processing in step S317 during the special figure 1 starting port check processing of FIG.

  When the random number determination processing in step S337 is completed, special stop symbol data creation processing is then performed (step S338). In this special stop symbol data creation process, “prefetch symbol determination” related to the special symbol variation display game 2 is performed. The processing method is substantially the same as the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318 during the special chart 1 start port check process of FIG.

  Next, the starting port winning random number determination process is performed as in the special figure 1 starting port check process (step S339), and a holding addition command is created based on the winning command data and the number of pending action balls (step S340). The pending addition command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S341), and the special figure 2 starting port check process is exited.

(8-3. Special symbol variation start processing: FIG. 12)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (step S305) will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process of FIG.

  In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is zero (step S401). If the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is not zero (step S401: NO), Proceeding to the process of S403, the process (steps S403 to S416) at the start of the change for the operation holding ball to be used for the current change display is performed.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 operation holding ball number is zero (step S401: YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the special figure 1 operation holding ball number is zero (step S402). If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the process proceeds to step S403, and the process (steps S403 to S416) related to the start of the variation of the special symbol for the suspended action ball used for the present variation display is performed. Do. By the processing of steps S401 and S402, “priority” indicating which of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is to be preferentially used for the variable display operation (which operation holding ball is digested). "Change order" is determined. The processing in steps S401 and S402 is performed as “priority change means” for preferentially digesting the special figure 2 operation holding ball when both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball exist. Function.

  In the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball exists in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball by the priority changing means, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested, that is, The special symbol variation display game 2 is executed more preferentially than the special symbol variation display game 1. More specifically, on the condition that the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is stopped and displayed, the first reserved storage area (first reserved storage means (the reserved storage area related to the operation reserved ball on the special symbol 1 side)). ) Is stored with the hold data relating to the special symbol 1 (first hold memory: special figure 1 operation hold ball), the second hold storage area (second hold storage means (the operation hold ball on the special symbol 2 side) If the second reserved data relating to the special symbol 2 (second reserved memory: special figure 2 operation holding ball) is not stored in the reserved memory area))), the second of the first reserved data When the second special hold data is stored in the second reserved storage area while the variable display of the first special symbol based on the previously stored reserved data is started, the first reserved The first hold data is stored in the storage area. Regardless of whether or not they are 憶, so as to start earliest variable display of the second special symbol based on the stored pending data out of the second pending data.

  In addition, when the number of operation hold balls of both the special figure 2 operation hold ball number and the special figure 1 operation hold ball number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state of “no operation hold ball” It becomes. This “no operation hold ball” state is when the special symbol is on standby and there is no hold memory, and the effect control unit 24 side is informed that it has entered this state, and the liquid crystal display The device 36 is controlled to switch to a demonstration screen display for waiting for customers. Therefore, when “no operation hold ball” is reached, the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is “standby (00H)” indicating the state of “no operation hold ball”. (Step S417).

  When the determination process of step S417 is passed, that is, when the state of “no operation hold ball” is entered, and the special symbol operation status at this time is “standby (01H)” (step S417: NO: Refer to step S472 in the special symbol confirmation time process of FIG. 21A described later), and the special symbol operation status is switched to “standby (00H)” (00H is stored in the special symbol operation status: step S418). Then, a “demonstration display command” for displaying a demonstration screen is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S419), and the special symbol variation start process is exited. Thus, the reason for switching the special symbol operation status to “waiting (00H)”, transmitting the effect control command, and exiting the special symbol variation start process is as follows.

  If the demonstration display command is sent without condition when the number of active balls is zero, the demonstration display command is repeatedly transmitted at a period of 4 ms while the number of special figure active balls is zero. Will occur. Therefore, when the “no operation hold ball” state is reached, a demonstration display command is transmitted once, and if the demonstration display command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display command is sent to the effect control unit 24. This special symbol management process can be skipped without sending to the user.

  If the presentation control unit 24 does not receive any presentation control command (for example, a hold addition command) related to the symbol fluctuation display game even after a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the demonstration display command, the fluctuation display operation is performed for a certain period of time. Assuming that an undisturbed state (a waiting state for waiting for customers) has occurred, the liquid crystal display device 36 performs a “demo screen display” for notifying that the game is waiting.

  If the number of special figure 1 action hold balls or the number of special figure 2 action hold balls is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), to start the change of the special symbol for the action hold ball for the current fluctuation display Such processing (steps S403 to S417) is performed. In addition, regarding the processing of steps S403 to S417 described below, if “NO” is determined in step S401, the processing for the special figure 2 operation holding ball is performed, and the determination in step S402 is “ If it is NO ', it will be the process for the special figure 1 action holding ball, but the way of the process is the same, so in order to avoid duplication, the action on the special symbol 1 side unless otherwise required The description will be made without distinguishing whether the process is a process for the holding ball or a process for the operation holding ball on the special symbol 2 side.

  If it progresses to step S403, 1 will subtract the number of operation reservation balls (the number of operation reservation balls concerning the special symbol side used for the present fluctuation display operation -1: step S403), The “subtraction command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S404).

  Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol type of the current variation start side. For example, if special symbol 1 is the variation start side, “00H” is indicated, and special symbol 2 is the variation start side. If there is, “01H” is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 to S407, the hold data (random hit determination random number, special symbol determination random number, stored in the hold storage area (hold 1 storage area) corresponding to the hold storage number n = 1,
And a random number for variation pattern) are read out and stored in the random number storage area for determination of the RAM 203, and the reserved storage areas (hold 2 storage area, reserved 3 storage area) corresponding to the reserved n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) , The hold data stored in the hold 4 storage area) is stored in the hold storage area corresponding to 'n-1' (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared (step S407). That is, the hold data in the hold 1 storage area is shifted to the random number storage area for determination, and the hold data after the hold 2 storage area is numbered one by one (hold 2 storage area → hold 1 storage area, hold 3 storage). Area → holding 2 storage area, holding 4 storage area → holding 3 storage area) and overwriting, and providing an empty area in the holding 4 storage area (if no new active holding ball is generated, processing in step S407) Since the vacant area is sequentially shifted each time the operation is performed, the entire reserved storage area becomes an empty area when all the operating spheres are used. As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game coincides with the order of the number n of the operation reservation balls (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and any of the operation reservation balls acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is stored. Whether the area corresponds to the area is specified, and the storage of a new operation holding ball becomes possible.

  Next, remaining short time command transmission processing is performed (step S408). Here, it is determined whether or not a special symbol short-time counter (counter for counting the remaining number of times until the special symbol short-time state is terminated) described later is zero. A “remaining short time number command” including the remaining short time number information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S408). By this “remaining short time number command”, the production control unit 24 side can grasp the remaining short time number, for example, using the effect means and can notify the remaining short time number information.

  Next, a random determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is performed (step S409). In this special electric accessory activation determination random number determination process, a “winning lottery” relating to the current special symbol variation display game is performed using the jackpot determination random number value. The random determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is “random determination process (step S319 in FIG. 10, step S339 in FIG. 11)” which is one of the “prefetch determination” processes in that “winning lottery” is performed. In this example, the “winning lottery” is performed in the “determination at the start of change” for the operation holding ball used for the current change display operation. Note that the processing procedure of the random determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is substantially the same as the random determination process (step S319 in FIG. 10 and step S339 in FIG. 11). The description is omitted.

  Here, first, a hit random number determination table corresponding to the current variation display side is acquired based on the special symbol operation confirmation data. This winning random number determination table is the same as the “winning random number determination table” used in the random number determination processing (step S317 in FIG. 10 and step S337 in FIG. 11). Next, the big hit determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and another winning lottery of big hit, small hit, and loss based on the big hit determination random value and the hit random number determination table is performed.

  If this winning lottery results in a “big hit” win, the big hit determination flag is set to “5AH”, and if it belongs to other determination values, the “big hit non-winning” is set. In addition, when the “small hit” win is made, the small hit determination flag is “5AH”, and when it belongs to other determination values, the “small hit non-win” is set. Therefore, when the big hit determination random number value belongs to the determination value of the big hit determination flag “00H” and the small hit determination “00H”, it means that neither “big hit” nor “small hit” was won, The result of the winning decision this time will be 'lost'.

  When the random determination process for determining the special electronic component operation in step S409 is completed, a special stop symbol creating process is then performed (step S410). In this special stop symbol creation process, the “symbol lottery” relating to the current special symbol variation display game is performed by using the winning lottery result and the special symbol determination random number value of the random determination processing for special electric utility operation determination in step S409. Do. The special stop symbol creation process is the same as the “special stop symbol data process (step S318 in FIG. 10, step S338 in FIG. 11)” which is one of the “prefetch determination” processes in that “design lottery” is performed. Here, a “symbol drawing” is performed in the “determination at the start of variation” for the operation holding ball used for the present variation display operation. The basic processing procedure of the special stop symbol creation process is the same as that of the special stop symbol data process (step S318 in FIG. 10 and step S338 in FIG. 11). .

  Here, first, the special symbol operation confirmation data and the winning lottery result (the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag) obtained by the random determination processing for special electric utility operation determination in step S409 are acquired, and based on these As the symbol table corresponding to the current variation display side, one of the big hit symbol tables 1 and 2, the small hit symbol table, and the lost symbol table 1 and 2 is selected. This symbol table is the same as the symbol table used in the special stop symbol data processing (step S318 in FIG. 10, step S338 in FIG. 11). Next, a special symbol determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the special symbol determination random value, the “symbol selection lottery” related to the current special symbol variation display game is performed. To determine the winning type (winning type) related to the special symbol variation display game of this time.

  When the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 is completed, a game state transition preparation process is then performed (step S411). In the game state transition preparation process, a setting process necessary for designating the game state after the big hit game is performed as a setting for shifting the game state. Details of the game state transition preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game state transition preparation process in step S411 is completed, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is then performed (step S412). In this special symbol variation pattern creation processing, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) (current game state), the winning lottery result obtained in the random determination processing for special electric accessory operation determination, the symbol of the special stop symbol creation processing Using a lottery result, a random number for variation pattern, and the like, the variation pattern of the special symbol for the operation holding ball used for the present variation display operation is determined by lottery. Then, in order to inform the effect control unit 24 of the content of the variation pattern, a “variation pattern designation command” including variation pattern information that can specify the content of the variation pattern is created as an effect control command, and this is controlled by the effect control. Transmit to the unit 24 side. Note that the special symbol variation pattern creation process is a random number determination process at start-up winning prize and a creation process related to the hold addition command (step of FIG. S319 to S320, and processes similar to those in steps S339 to S340 in FIG. 11, but here, the variation pattern of the special symbol for the operation holding ball used for the present variation display operation, that is, A variation pattern at the start of variation is determined.

  Here, first, a random number value for a fluctuation pattern is acquired, and then a “hit fluctuation pattern distribution table” or “losing fluctuation pattern distribution table” (not shown) is acquired based on the big hit lottery result (winning lottery, symbol lottery) . Then, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by variation pattern lottery using the variation pattern distribution table and the variation pattern random value.

(T-3. Fluctuation pattern distribution table)
The above-mentioned fluctuation pattern distribution table includes a “winning fluctuation pattern distribution table” that is selected when winning a win (big hit or small win), and a “fluctuation pattern changing pattern for loss” that is selected when winning a win. Minute table ".

  In each variation pattern allocation table, the variation pattern related to the special symbol includes the number of active suspension balls (the number of remaining operation suspension balls excluding the operation suspension balls used for the current variation display operation), the variation pattern allocation designation number ( Tcode) (current gaming state), jackpot lottery result (special stop symbol creation process (step S410) symbol lottery result), and variation pattern random number value is determined in association with the variation pattern random number, One of the variation patterns is selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  As the variation pattern is determined, a “variation time determination table” corresponding to the variation pattern is also determined. In this “variation time determination table”, the variation time (symbol variation display operation time) is defined. By referring to the variation time determination table corresponding to the determined variation pattern, the variation of the present variation pattern The time will be fixed. This variation time is the game time of the decorative symbol variation display game executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display game (decorative symbol variation display time (effect time)).

  Information on the variation pattern determined in this way mainly includes another winning / losing winning lottery result (in the case of this embodiment, the symbol lottery result information is included in the decorative symbol designation command), the current Game state type, variable time, execution specification information for specific notice effect (specifying information such as presence / absence of reach effect, reach effect type (N reach type or SP reach type), presence / absence of pseudo-ream, number of pseudo-reams) Can do. The CPU 201 creates a “variation pattern designation command” that can specify the content, and transmits this to the effect control unit 24 side. When the effect control unit 24 receives the variation pattern designation command, the effect control unit 24 controls the appearance of the effect during the current symbol variation display game based on the variation pattern information included therein. The variation pattern designation command may include symbol lottery result information.

  In the present embodiment, the same hit variation pattern is selected for the hit variation patterns at the time of 2R short open latent large win winning, 2R short open non-probable large win winning, small hit A and B winning. This is because it is preferable that the same variation pattern is selected in the case of winning the 2R big hit and in the case of winning the small hit, and it is preferable to make it unclear which win was won for production. It is.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 11 again, when the special symbol variation pattern creation processing in step 412 is finished, 5AH (ON state) is then set to the special symbol N variation flag (N = 1, 2) for designating that the variation is being displayed. ) Is stored (step S413). The “special symbol N changing flag” is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), the special symbol changes. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. The special symbol 1 changing flag (N = 1) corresponds to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2 changing flag (N = 2) corresponds to the special symbol 2 side.

  Next, a decorative symbol designation command is created based on the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 (step S414), and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). This decorative symbol designation command is composed of two bytes: an upper byte (MODE) for designating a special symbol type on the variable side, and a lower byte (EVNET) for designating a big hit type, a small hit type, and a loss type. Therefore, the “decorated symbol designation command” includes information on the special symbol type on the variable side and the winning category (symbol lottery result). For example, the upper byte (MODE) side is set to “BBH” when the special symbol on the variable side is Special Figure 1, “BCH” is set to Special Figure 2, and the lower byte (EVENT) side is selected as winning. EVNET value corresponding to the type (value that can specify the hit type or the loss type: for example, “01H” for 2R short open latent big hit “02H” for 2R short open non-probable big hit, “02H”, 5R long open probability change "03H" for big hit, "04H" for 5R long open non-probable big hit, "05H" for 12R long open non-probable big hit, "06H" for 12R long open probable big hit, "06H", 16R long open probable big hit In the case of “07H” and small hits A to B, “08H” to “09H”, etc.) are set. Since this decoration designating command includes winning type information, on the effect control unit 24 side, mainly a combination of decorative symbols (reach symbols) when forming a reach state, or a decorative symbol to be finally stopped and displayed. This is used when determining the combination of (decoration stop symbol).

  Then, as the change start time setting process, the special symbol operation status is switched to “Fluctuating (02H)” (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the determination random number storage area (cleared to zero) (step S416) ).

  As described above, when the special symbol variation start processing is exited, the special symbol display data update processing (step S309) of FIG. 9 is performed, and thus the special symbol variation display is started. As a result, the special symbol management process (step S059) is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S060) of FIG.

(8-3-1. Game state transition preparation process: FIG. 13)
Next, the gaming state transition preparation process (step S411) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing details of the game state transition preparation process of FIG.

  In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first acquires a big hit determination flag and determines the state of the big hit determination flag (step S431). If the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S431: ≠ 5AH), the game state transition preparation process is exited without doing anything.

  When the big hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) (step S431: = 5 AH), the big hit gaming state transition table selection table (see FIG. 30A) is acquired (step S432).

  Next, with reference to the acquired gaming state transition table selection table, a gaming state transition table (see FIG. 31) corresponding to the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the jackpot type (special symbol determination data) is acquired (step S433). ), Data determined in the gaming state transition table is stored in various buffers described later (step S434: state buffer setting process). The values stored in these buffers are read out in the jackpot end process (step S509 in FIG. 16) during the special electric utility management process described later, and are stored in predetermined storage areas of the RAM 203 (flag storage areas corresponding to the respective buffers). And the counter storage area). When the process of step S434 is completed, the game state transition preparation process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S412) of FIG. In this game state transition preparation process, a setting process related to a game state transition when a big win is won is performed, and a setting process related to a game state transition when a small win is won is an electric game management process described later. The small hitting process is performed (see step S504 in FIG. 16).

(T-4. Big hit game state transition table selection table: FIG. 30 (A))
FIG. 30A shows a big hit gaming state transition table selection table. In the jackpot gaming state transition table selection table of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of gaming state transition tables associated with a gaming state determination number (YJ) and a winning type (special symbol determination data: here a jackpot type) are determined. Specifically, based on the game state determination number (YJ) and the special symbol determination data, one of a plurality of types of game state transition tables (game state transition for jackpot) Table) is selected.

  Here, the “gaming state determination number (YJ)” is data for identifying the internal gaming state. Referring to the variation pattern allocation designation number table of FIG. 32, when the game state determination number (YJ) is “00H”, “normal game state (no power support, low probability)” is set to “01H ”Is“ latent probability state (without electric support, high accuracy) ”,“ 02H ”is“ time-short state (electric support is present, low accuracy) ”, and“ 03H ”is“ probability change state ”. (Electric support state, high probability) ”. Therefore, the game state determination number (YJ) is different from the data for identifying the game state itself, such as the variation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode), in that it identifies the internal game state as described above.

(T-5. Game state transition table: FIG. 31)
FIG. 31 shows the gaming state transition table described above. In the game state transition table of the present embodiment, “JTTBL-1” to “JTTBL-7” of the game state transition table for jackpots that can be selected in the case of jackpot, and the game for small hits that can be selected in the case of jackpot State transition tables “JTTBL-8” to “JTTBL-9” are included.

  In these game state transition tables, a plurality of types of data groups for designating game states to be transferred after winning games are defined. Specifically, the utility power release extended transition buffer, normal symbol short transition buffer, normal symbol probability transition buffer, special symbol short transition transition buffer, special symbol probability transition transition buffer, special symbol short transition counter buffer Various data to be stored in the special symbol probability variation counter buffer, the variation pattern allocation designation number buffer, and the special symbol variation count counter buffer are defined. The values stored in these buffers are read at a necessary timing and set in a predetermined flag storage area or a predetermined counter storage area provided in the RAM 203. When various data specified by each game state transition table are stored in each buffer, the game state after the winning game is determined.

  “JTTBL-1” to “JTTBL-7” in the game state transition table for jackpot according to the present embodiment are, in order, probability variation state, latent probability state, short time state (60 times), short time state (100 times), normal It is a game state transition table for shifting to a state, CZ (latency), and CZ (normal). Further, “JTTBL-8” to “JTTBL-9” in the game state transition table for small hits are game state transition tables for shifting to “CZ”. However, regarding “JTTBL-6” to “JTTBL-9” related to the CZ transition, “JTTBL-6” is CZ (latency: 4 times), and “JTTBL-7” is CZ continuation. CZ (3 times), “JTTBL-8” is CZ (2 times), and “JTTBL-9” is CZ (3 times). Game state transition table to be shifted to (time). The role of the various buffers described above will be described below.

(General power utility opening extension transition state buffer)
The “general utility release extension transition state buffer” is used to set a general utility release extension state flag. The “general utility release extension state flag” is a flag for designating the operation state of the release extension function. When the flag is ON (= 5 AH), The state is “present state”, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the open extension function is inactive and “no electric support” state.

(Normal symbol short transition buffer)
The “normal symbol short time transition state buffer” is used to set a normal symbol short time state flag. The “ordinary symbol short time state flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the normal symbol short time function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the “normal symbol short time state flag” indicating that the normal symbol short time function is in operation. State ", and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the normal symbol short function is not activated and the" normal symbol non-short state ".

(Normal symbol change transition buffer)
The “normal symbol probability change state buffer” is used to set a normal symbol probability change state flag. The “normal symbol probability changing state flag” is a flag for designating an auxiliary lottery probability state, that is, an operating state of the normal symbol probability changing function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the normal symbol probability changing function is set. It indicates that the state is the “probability change state per assistance” during operation, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that it is a “low probability state per assistance” in which the normal symbol probability change function is not activated.

(Special symbol short state transition state buffer)
The “special symbol short time state transition state buffer” is used for setting a special symbol short time state flag. The “special symbol time reduction state flag” is a flag for designating the operation state of the special symbol time reduction function. State ", and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol non-time-short state is inactive.

(Special Symbol Probability Transition Status Buffer)
The “special symbol probability change state buffer” is used to set a special symbol probability change state flag. The “special symbol probability changing state flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the special symbol probability changing function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the “high probability state during the special symbol probability changing function is operating”. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol probability changing function is not activated in a “low probability state”.

(Special design short time counter buffer)
The “special symbol short time counter buffer” is used to set a special symbol short time counter. The above “special symbol time reduction counter” means the number of remaining times until the operation of the “special symbol time reduction function” is terminated due to the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (the number of executions of the special variation display game). It is a counter for counting the remaining number of times until the end. In the present embodiment, with the end of the special symbol short-time state, the high base gaming state, which is in the state of electrical support, is also ended (see step S481 in FIG. 15B).

(Special symbol variation counter buffer)
The “special symbol probability variation counter buffer” is used for setting a special symbol probability variation counter. The above “special symbol probability change counter” means the remaining number of times until the operation of the “special symbol probability change function” is terminated due to the number of special symbol fluctuations (the number of executions of the special variation display game), that is, the “high probability state” ends. It is a counter for counting the remaining number of times until the number of times (remaining ST number).

(Variation pattern distribution specification number buffer)
The “variation pattern allocation designation number buffer” is used to set a variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode). This “variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)” is game state data for specifying a game state. The variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is set in the variation pattern allocation designation number storage area of the RAM 203 and is changed based on a predetermined change condition (game state transition condition) (special symbol confirmation time processing (Fig. 15B) Steps S481, S486, S490, game state transition preparation processing (see S411 in FIG. 12, S434 in FIG. 13, special electric accessory management processing (FIG. 16), etc.).

(Special symbol variation counter buffer)
The “special symbol variation number counter buffer” is used for setting a special symbol variation number counter. The “special symbol variation counter” is a counter for counting the number of times of variation of a special symbol that is a gaming state transition condition (hereinafter referred to as “the prescribed number of gaming state transitions”). In the special symbol variation number counter of this embodiment, the CZ continuation number is set as the specified game state transition number, and this counter functions as a management means for managing the CZ continuation number.

(8-4. Special symbol change processing: Fig. 14)
Next, the special symbol changing process (step S307) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol changing process (step S307) of FIG.

  In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S451). If the special symbol accessory action timer is not zero (step S451: NO), the special symbol change time has not yet elapsed, that is, the special symbol is changing. Exit.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S451: YES), a “variation stop command” indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S451). S452). With this change stop command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the special symbol change display game has ended after the change time of the special symbol has elapsed, and stops and displays (decision display) the decorative symbol that is currently being changed. As a result, the decorative symbol variation display game is also terminated along with the termination of the special symbol variation display game.

  Next, as a setting process at the time of stoppage of the special symbol fluctuation, the special symbol determination signal output time (for example, 100 ms) is stored in the special symbol determination timer of the RAM 203, and the fixed display time (for example, 500 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. ), The special symbol operation status is switched to “confirming (03H)” (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special symbol changing flag (step S453). Exit the special symbol change process. The “special symbol determination signal output time” is a margin for securing the output time of the special symbol determination signal for notifying the hall computer HC that the special symbol has been determined and displayed from the external terminal board 21 for frames. It's time. The “determined display time” is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the special symbol change display is finished and the special symbol is stopped.

  When the process of step S453 is completed, the special symbol changing process is exited, the special symbol display data update process of step S309 of FIG. 9 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special symbol display process of step S060 of FIG. Proceed to the electric accessory management process.

(8-5. Special symbol confirmation time processing (variation stop processing): FIGS. 15A and 15B)
Next, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) will be described. 15A and 15B are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) of FIG.

  15A and 15B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S471). The “determined display time” is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S453 in FIG. 20). Until the special symbol accessory action timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process during this special symbol confirmation time is terminated without doing anything.

  If the special symbol accessory action timer reaches zero (step S471: YES), the special symbol movement status is switched to “standby (01H)”, assuming that the current special symbol fluctuation display game is over (special symbol action). (01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the game state determination number (YJ) corresponding to the current game state is stored in the game state determination area of the RAM 203 (step S473).

  Next, the big hit determination flag is acquired, and the state of the big hit determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the big hit judgment flag is ON)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is ON (= 5 AH) (step S474: = 5 AH), various setting processes when the big hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S475). Here, as various setting processes (pre-start process of the big hit game) at the time of the big hit symbol stop, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the big hit determination flag, 5AH (ON state) is stored in the condition device operation flag, General power release extended state flag, normal symbol short state flag, normal symbol probable state flag, special symbol short state flag, special symbol probable state flag, special symbol short time counter, special symbol probable number counter, and special symbol variation count 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the counters, 00H (normal state specification) is stored in the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), and a game state notification LED (not shown) is designated to be turned on / off. 00H is stored in the status notification LED output number, and the process during this special symbol confirmation time is exited. The “gaming state notification LED” is state notification means for notifying current game state information. The gaming state notification LED (state notification unit) of the present embodiment is used to notify whether or not the special symbol time-short state is set. The CPU 201 changes the notification mode of the game state notification LED (state notification means) according to the game state notification LED output number. For example, if the gaming state notification LED output number is “00H”, it means that the current state is not the special symbol short state (gaming state notification LED: off state (non-special symbol short state notification), and “01H”. Now, it is informed that it is in the special symbol short-time state (game state notification LED: lighting state (special symbol short-time state notification).

(When the big hit judgment flag is OFF)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S474: ≠ 5AH), then the small hit determination flag is acquired and the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S476). . When the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S476: ≠ 5AH), the process proceeds to step S478. When the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) (step S476: = 5 AH), various setting processes when the small hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S477). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hit determination flag, and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit determination flag as various setting processes (small hit game start pre-processing) when the small hit symbol is stopped. When the various setting processes at the time of the small hit symbol stop are completed, the process proceeds to step S478.

  When the processing proceeds to step S478, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time reduction counter (remaining number of special symbol time reduction states) is zero (step S478). When the special symbol time counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol short time counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol short time counter is subtracted by 1 (step S479) as the digest of the current fluctuation number, and the special symbol short time counter after subtraction is zero. It is determined whether or not there is (step S480).

  If the special symbol short time counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), the number of end times of the special symbol short time state has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), setting processing at the time of short time end is performed assuming that the number of times of termination of the special symbol time reduction state has been reached (step S481). Here, 00H (OFF state) is changed for each of the utility power release extended state flag, the normal symbol time-short state flag, the normal symbol probability change state flag, and the special symbol time-short state flag as setting processing at the time-short-time end. 00H is stored in the pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), and 00H (non-special symbol time-short state designation) is stored in the gaming status notification LED output number. As a result, from the next game, the player is placed in a state without power support.

  When the setting process at the time-short end in step S481 is finished, a “short-time end command” indicating that the special symbol time-short state has ended (electric supportless state transition information) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command ( Step S482). Since the short end command is transmitted at the end of the current symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 can grasp that the next game is in the “no electric support” state before the next game starts.

  In the present embodiment, the transition from the electric support state to the no electric support state is a transition from the short-time state or the probability change state to the normal state, so the effect control unit 24 receives the “short-time end command”. For example, when starting the next decorative symbol variation display game, or in advance, the background image (background effect) for the “normal effect mode” is switched. In addition, as the launch position in the “no power support” state, an effect control process is performed for causing a “launch position guidance effect (left-handed notification effect)” that instructs to aim at the left downstream path 3b. As a result, even if there is no operation holding ball when the current symbol variation display game ends (when the next symbol variation display game is not started), the effect mode related to the next symbol variation display game is shifted to. be able to.

  Next, when the processing proceeds to step S483, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST count) is zero (step S483). In this embodiment, when the probability variation state is established, the probability variation state continues until the next big hit (the number of STs is infinite), but the probability variation state ends in time even if the game is played all day long. The number of times (for example, 10,000 times) that does not occur may be set. In this case, it is substantially the same as the probability variation state continues until the next big hit. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that “10000 times” is set in the special symbol probability variation counter.

  If the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488.

  If the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S484) as the current symbol variation variation digest, and the special symbol probability variation counter after the subtraction is subtracted. Is determined to be zero (step S485).

  If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the ST specified number of times (70 times) has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S487 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), the setting process at the end of probability variation is performed on the assumption that the number of variations of the special symbol has reached the ST specified number (here, 10000) ( Step S486). Here, as the transition setting process to the normal gaming state at the end of the latent probability state or the probability changing state, the normal utility release extended state flag, the normal symbol short state flag, the normal symbol probable state flag, the special symbol short state flag, In addition, 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the special symbol probability changing state flags, 00H is stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), and 00H (non-special symbol short-time state designation) is stored in the gaming state notification LED output number. To do. Thereby, from the next game, the jackpot lottery probability is placed from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  When the setting process at the end of the probability change in step S486 is completed, the process proceeds to step S487, and whether or not the special symbol variation number counter is zero, that is, the specified number of game state transitions (in this embodiment, the number of CZ continuations). Whether or not is zero is determined (step S487).

  If the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S487: YES), the special symbol confirmation time is exited without doing anything.

  If the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S487: NO), the special symbol variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S488) as the digest of the current variation, and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is zero. It is determined whether or not (step S489).

  If the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is not zero (step S489: NO), it is determined that the game state transition prescribed number has not been reached, and the processing during this special symbol confirmation time is terminated without doing anything.

  If the special symbol variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), the game state transition setting process is performed on the assumption that the special symbol variation number has reached the prescribed game state transition number (step S490: variation pattern change). Minute designation number setting process). Here, a transition setting process of the game state after the CZ continuation count is completed is performed. In the present embodiment, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on whether the big hit lottery probability state at the end of CZ is a low probability state or a high probability state. Here, the game state determination number (YJ) is first acquired, and the current internal game state is the normal state (game state determination number (YJ) = 00H) or the latent state (game state determination number (YJ) = 01H). If the current internal gaming state is a normal state, that is, a low probability state, the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is set to “00H” designating the normal state, and the current internal gaming state is a latent state, That is, if the state is a high probability state, the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) is set to “02H” that designates the latent state. Thereby, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol in the “normal state” or “latent state” is selected. This step S490 process functions as a variation pattern selection condition switching means for performing switching control of a variation pattern selection condition (variation pattern selection mode) based on establishment of a predetermined condition.

  Next, a “game state designation command” including the game state information of the transfer destination is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S491). With this “gaming state designation command”, the effect control unit 24 grasps that “CZ” ends in the current symbol variation display game, and that the next game becomes “normal state” or “latent state”. Thereby, when starting the next symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 controls to switch to the background image (background effect) for the “normal effect mode” or the background image for the “latent effect effect mode”. An effect control process under the effect mode is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described gaming state designation command is transmitted before the variation pattern designation command relating to the next symbol variation display game is transmitted. For this reason, when receiving such a game state designation command, the production control unit 24 produces an effect for the current production mode before the variation pattern designation command related to the next symbol variation display game is sent. It is possible to switch from (for example, one background display) to another effect mode (for example, another background display). That is, before the variation pattern designation command related to the next symbol variation display game is sent, an effect related to the other variation mode appears, in other words, before the next symbol variation display game, The production related to the production mode can be made to appear. As a result, the player can perform the effects related to the next symbol variation display game even if there is no operation holding ball when the current symbol variation display game ends (when the next symbol variation display game is not started). There is an advantage that the mode can be grasped in advance.

  As described above, when the processing during the special symbol confirmation time is exited, the special symbol display data update processing in step S309 in FIG. 9 is performed, and then the special symbol management processing is exited, and the special electric equipment management in step S060 in FIG. Proceed to processing.

(9. Special electric equipment management process: FIG. 16)
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S060) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory management process in step S060.

  In FIG. 16, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the small hitting flag (step S501). When the small hitting flag is ON (= 5AH) (step S501: = 5AH), the small hit for controlling a series of operations of the special variable winning device (open / closed opening / closing control) related to the small hit game. A process is performed (step S504), and this special electric accessory management process is exited.

  If the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S501: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S502: ≠ 5AH), in this case, it is not in the small hit game (step S501: ≠ 5AH) and is not in the big hit game. Exit the special electric property management process.

  When the condition device operation flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S502: = 5AH), processing according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) is performed (step S503: special electric accessory status branching process). . The “special electric accessory operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable prize winning devices 42 and 52. This status value is changed according to the processing state, and the special electric accessory operation status storage area of the RAM 203 is stored. Stored in

  In the special electric accessory operation status branching process in step S503, a process corresponding to the special electric accessory operation status value is called and executed. Specifically, when the operation status of the special electric accessory is “starting process (00H)”, the big hit start process (step S505) is performed. In the case where the accessory actuating start process (step S506) is in operation (02H), the special electric accessory actuating process (step S507) is in effect. In the case where the accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) is “ending process (04H)”, the jackpot end process (step S509) is called and executed. By these processes, the operation of the special variable winning device 52 related to the big hit game is controlled. Here, “being started (00H)” indicates that the player is in a standby state before the jackpot game starts, and “operation start process (01H)” is that the player is in a standby state before starting the round game. “In operation (02H)” indicates that a round game is being executed, and “Continuing determination (03H)” indicates that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. “Big jackpot end process in progress (04H)” indicates that the big hit game is ending. When one of the processes in steps S505 to S509 is completed, the special electric accessory management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

  Hereinafter, the big hit game control process (steps S505 to S509) and the small hit process (step S504) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

<Big hit game control processing (steps S505 to S509)>
First, the big hit start process (step S505 in FIG. 16) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit start process.

(9-1. Big hit start processing: FIG. 17)
At the start of the big hit game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to “starting process (00H)” of the initial status value. Therefore, when a big hit is made, first, the big hit starting process is performed.

  In FIG. 17, first, the CPU 201 performs a setting process at the time of starting the big hit necessary for starting the big hit game (step S511: setting process at the time of starting the big hit). Here, as a setting process at the time of starting the big hit, 5 AH (ON state) is stored in the accessory continuous operating device operation flag, and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “operation starting process (01H)” (special electric accessory) 01H is stored in the object operation status), and 01H is stored in the continuous number counter. The above-mentioned “actual accessory continuous actuating device operation flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the accessory continuous actuating device. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the accessory continuous actuating device is operating. This indicates that the round game can be continued, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the accessory continuous operation device is inactive (round game cannot be continued). The “continuous number counter” is a counter for managing the number of continuous executions of the round game, and the current round number is stored here. Since the continuous number counter here is “01H”, the current round number indicates the 1Rth.

  Next, a jackpot start setting table (not shown) is acquired (step S512), referring to the jackpot start setting table, the maximum number of rounds (specified number of rounds) according to the special symbol determination data (jacket type), The round display LED numbers are stored in the corresponding storage areas of the RAM 203, and the start interval time is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer (step S513: setting processing for each special symbol determination data).

(T-6. Big hit start setting table)
In the jackpot start setting table, “special symbol determination data” for identifying the jackpot type and “maximum number of rounds, start interval time, and round display LED number” are defined in association with each other. “Maximum number of rounds, start interval time, and round display LED” are determined according to the special symbol determination data (big hit type). Here, the “start interval time” refers to the special variable winning device 40 or the special variable winning after the special symbol fixed display time has elapsed and the jackpot has been fixed (see step S471 in FIG. 21A in step S453 in FIG. 20). It is an interval period until the device 50 is activated, and indicates a time width (the first effect time before the first round game is performed) that defines an interval in which the opening effect is performed. The “round display LED number” is data specifying the notification mode of the round number display device 39b (round display LED: specified round number notification means), and specifies the maximum number of rounds (specified number of rounds) of this big hit game. To do. The CPU 201 changes the notification mode of the round display LED according to the round display LED number.

  When the process of step S513 is completed, a “big hit start command” instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S514). The “hit start command” includes the current jackpot type information and the game status information at the time of the big win, and the production control unit 24 side performs a series of win production modes (opening production, This is used when determining a round effect (a series of hit effect scenarios including a round start effect, an in-round effect, an end effect), an ending effect, and the like.

  As described above, when the big hit starting process is completed, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(9-2. Special electric accessory operation start processing: FIG. 18)
Next, the special electric accessory activation start process (step S506 in FIG. 22) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory activation start process.

  In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S521). In this special symbol accessory operation timer, “interval time before starting round game” is set. As the interval time, the “start interval time” set in step S513 in FIG. 23 is monitored in the first round (1R), but when passing through this step S521 after the end of the 1R, Interval time before opening (interval time set in step S575 in FIG. 21 described later) "is monitored. Until this special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S521: NO), this special electric accessory operation start processing is exited without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, if the interval time before opening (in the case of the first round, the starting interval time) has elapsed (step S521: YES), the effect is displayed along with the opening operation of the big prize opening. As the control command, a “large winning opening release command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S522). This “big winning opening release command (round start command)” includes round game start information (round production start instruction information) and current round number information, and on the production control unit 24 side, a round production corresponding to the number of rounds. It is used when making it appear.

  Next, a special winning opening operating time setting table (not shown) is acquired (step S523), and a special winning opening operating time setting process is performed (step S524). In this special winning opening opening time setting process, the special winning opening operation time corresponding to the special symbol determination data and the current number of rounds is referred to the special winning opening operation time setting table. To store.

(T-7. Grand prize opening operating time setting table)
The big winning opening operating time setting table defines the special winning opening opening operation time associated with the special symbol determination data and the current number of rounds. The special symbol determining data (big hit type) and the current round number Depending on whether or not, the opening operation time of the big prize opening is determined. For example, in the case of 12R long opening probability variation big hit or 16R long opening probability variation big hit, 29800ms corresponding to the long opening time as an initial value is 2R short opening latent big hit or 2R short opening uncertain variation. In the case of a big hit, 100 ms corresponding to a short opening time is set as an initial value.

  Next, 00H is stored (cleared to zero) in the special winning opening winning number counter (step S525). The “large winning opening winning number counter” is a counter provided in the RAM 203 for counting the number of winning balls in the lower large winning opening 40 or the right large winning opening 50.

  Next, a special winning opening / closing operation setting process is performed (step S526). In this special winning opening / closing operation setting process, solenoid control data for the special winning opening solenoid 42c or the special winning opening solenoid 52c is created and set. With this data, the opening / closing operation pattern of the lower major prize opening 40 or the right major prize opening 50 is designated. Further, here, a “special electric accessory N operation flag (N = 1, 2)” is set for designating whether or not the special variable winning device that is controlled to open and close is in operation.

  The “special electric accessory 1 operation flag” is a flag used to determine whether or not the special variable winning device 42 is operating. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), It shows that the special variable winning device 42 is operating, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special variable winning device 42 is not operating. Further, the “special electric accessory 2 operation flag” is a flag used for determining whether or not the special variable prize winning device 52 is operating, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), When the special variable winning device 52 is in operation, and the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special variable winning device 52 is inactive. Note that the period during which the flag is ON (= 5 AH) between round games, that is, the period during which the special variable prize winning device is in operation, is after the grand prize opening is closed and then the special prize winning opening is closed. This is a period until the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) elapses. On the other hand, during the period in which the flag is OFF (= 00H) between round games, that is, the period during which the special variable winning device is not in operation, the next round game is performed after the above-mentioned remaining ball discharge time has elapsed. It is a period in the interval time (20 ms) until the start. Note that if a special prize is generated at the special winning opening while the special electric accessory N operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it is regarded as an illegal winning and a predetermined error processing (large winning opening illegal winning error) is executed. It has come to be.

  When the special winning opening opening / closing operation setting process in step S526 is completed, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “in operation (02H)” (02H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status) (step S527).

  As described above, when the special electric accessory activation start process is finished, the process proceeds to the right-hand notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

(9-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessory: FIG. 19)
Next, the special electric accessory operating process (step S507 in FIG. 22) will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory operating process.

  In FIG. 19, the CPU 201 first performs a large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process (step S551). In the big winning opening maximum winning number confirming process, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening relating to the current big hit game is mainly counted, and it is confirmed whether or not the number of winning balls has reached the maximum winning number. Details of the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the big winning opening maximum winning number confirmation processing in step S551 is completed, the big winning opening opening / closing operation setting processing is performed (step S552). The special prize opening / closing operation setting process here is the same as the special prize opening / closing action setting process (step S526) during the special electric accessory activation start process of FIG. Description is omitted.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S553). Since the special winning symbol action timer is set with the special winning opening operation time, the determination process of step S533 determines whether or not the special winning action operation time has elapsed. Become. Until the special symbol accessory operating timer becomes zero (step S553: NO), the special electric accessory operating process is exited without doing anything.

  If the special symbol feature action timer reaches zero (elapsed time for opening the big prize opening operation time) (step S553: YES), a "round end command" is produced, assuming that the big prize opening in this round game is closed. It transmits to the control part 24 (step S554). The “round end command” is used when the “round end effect” appears during the interval time between round games on the effect control unit 24 side.

  Next, various setting processes when the round game ends are performed (step S555). Here, as various setting processes at the end of the round game, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “Continuing judgment (03H)” (03H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), and the special symbol accessory operation timer is set. The remaining ball discharge time (for example, 1980 ms) is stored.

  In this embodiment, the remaining ball discharge time set after each round game is described as the same time width (1980 ms), but the present invention is not limited to this. Since the remaining ball discharge time is determined as an allowance time for discharging the remaining balls in the big prize opening after the big prize opening is closed, the internal structure of the big prize opening (for example, the right big prize opening sensor) This is necessary until the right big prize opening sensor 52a detects a gaming ball (or until the gaming ball is discharged to the outside from the big prize opening) in consideration of the maximum path length until 52a detects the gaming ball. The time width that allows for the maximum time is set. However, in one big hit game, when the round game is controlled to a plurality of types of operation modes according to the number of rounds, or when different big prize opening is controlled according to the number of rounds, It may be configured such that different remaining ball discharge times are set by paying attention to the operation mode. For example, paying attention to the fact that the winning rate to the big prize opening is relatively low during the round game related to the short opening time, the ball biting frequency of the game balls by the open doors 42b and 52b and the large number of game balls in the big prize opening Since congestion is not expected, the remaining ball discharge time having a relatively shorter time width than that during the round game related to the long open time may be used.

  As described above, when the special electric accessory operating process is exited, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(9-3-1. Large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation processing: FIG. 20)
Next, the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process (step S551 in FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing details of the special winning opening / closing operation setting process.

  In FIG. 20, first, the CPU 201 sequentially determines the state of the special electric accessory 1 operation flag and the state of the special electric agent 2 operation flag (steps S561 and S562). When both the special electric accessory 1 operation flag and the special electric accessory 2 operation flag are in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S561: ≠ 5AH and step S562: ≠ 5AH), that is, the special variable winning device 42 Is not in operation and the special variable winning device 52 is not in operation, the process exits the maximum winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process without doing anything. The “when the special variable winning device 42 is not in operation and the special variable winning device 52 is not in operation” during the big hit game is during the pre-release interval time.

  When one of the special electric accessory 1 operation flag and the special electric accessory 2 operation flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH) (step S561: = 5 AH, or step S561: ≠ 5 AH, and step S562: = 5 AH), It is determined whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the big winning opening (step S563). A winning (winning ball) to the big winning opening is detected by the lower big winning opening sensor 42a or the right large winning opening sensor 52a. When no winning (winning ball) is detected at the big winning opening (step S563: NO), nothing is done without doing anything, and the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation processing is exited.

  When a winning is detected at the big winning opening (step S563: YES), a normal winning command transmission process is performed (step S564). In this normal winning command transmission process, when a winning is detected at the lower prize winning opening 40, the “large winning prize winning command 1” is designated as a normal big winning prize winning command for designating that the lower prize winning opening 40 has been won. ". On the other hand, when a winning is detected at the right big prize opening 50, the “large prize opening prize command 2” is transmitted as a normal big prize opening prize command for designating that the right big prize opening 50 has been won. The effect control unit 24 performs a winning effect process corresponding to the normal winning award winning command according to the normal winning award winning command.

  It should be noted that the determination of which command of the winning prize opening winning command 1 or 2 is to be transmitted can be made based on the detection information of the lower winning prize sensor 42a or the right winning prize sensor 52a. Specifically, when a detection is made by the lower prize winning opening sensor 42a, the “large winning prize winning prize command 1” is transmitted, and when there is a detection by the right big winning prize opening sensor 52a, the “large winning prize winning prize winning command” is transmitted. Command 2 'can be transmitted. In addition, based on the setting state of the special electric accessory actuating flag, it is possible to determine which normal big prize winning prize command is to be transmitted. Specifically, when the special electric accessory 1 operation flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the special variable winning device 42 is in operation, and therefore, the “special prize winning prize command 1” is transmitted, When the product 2 operation flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), since the special variable winning device 52 is operating, the “large winning opening winning command 2” is transmitted.

  During the process of confirming the maximum number of winning prizes, a “normal winning prize winning command” for each big winning prize is sent for each winning prize until the number of winning prizes reaches the maximum winning number. (Processing route of 'Step S563: YES to S566: NO'). In addition, since the over winning is the winning when the maximum number of winnings is exceeded, the target to be monitored in the large winning mouth maximum winning number confirmation process that monitors the winning balls until reaching the maximum winning number that does not become the over winning. It is not a winning ball. For over-winning balls, the “big winning opening over winning number confirmation process” in step S581 in the “special electric accessory operation continuation determination process (FIG. 21)” described later, which is executed after the big winning opening is shifted to the closed state. Is being monitored.

  When the normal winning command transmission process is finished, the winning prize winning counter corresponding to the winning prize detected for winning is incremented by 1 (step S565: winning prize winning counter adding process). Here, when a winning is detected at the lower major winning opening 40, one is added to the lower major winning opening winning counter, and when a winning is detected at the right major winning opening 50, one is added to the right major winning prize winning counter. .

  It is determined whether or not the large winning opening winning counter after the addition has reached the maximum number (for example, 9) (step S566). If the maximum number of winnings has been reached (step S566: YES), the special symbol accessory operation timer is cleared (step S567), and the maximum winning number maximum winning number confirmation process is exited, and the maximum number of winnings has not been reached. (Step S566: NO), nothing is done and the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation processing is exited.

  As described above, when the large winning opening maximum winning number confirming process is completed, the process proceeds to the large winning opening / closing operation setting process in step S552 of FIG.

(9-4. Special Electric Goods Operation Continuation Determination Process: FIG. 21)
Next, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508 in FIG. 16) will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process.

  In FIG. 21, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S571). In this special symbol accessory operation timer, the remaining ball discharge time set after the closing of the big prize opening is set (see step S555 of FIG. 19), so in the determination process of step S571, the remaining ball discharge is performed. It is determined whether time has passed.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer is not zero (step S571: NO), a “large winning mouth over winning number confirmation process” for confirming the winning ball of the big winning mouth within the remaining ball discharge time is performed (step S581). . Details of the large winning opening over winning number confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (remaining ball discharge time has elapsed) (step S571: YES), the continuous number counter is acquired and the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of specified rounds. It is determined whether or not (step S572).

  If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached (step S572: NO), the processing at the later-described steps S573 to S576 (round continuation processing) is performed as processing when the round game is continued. However, when the maximum number of rounds has been reached (step S572: YES), processing at steps S577 to S580 (round continuation end processing) is performed as processing at the time of ending the round game.

(Round continuation processing: steps S573 to S576)
When the current number of rounds has not reached the maximum number of rounds (step S572: NO), the processing route of steps S573 to S576 is performed as the round game continuation processing.

  First, in the process of step S573, 1 is added to the continuous number counter (+1) by the end of the current round game (step S573).

  Next, a special electric accessory end interval setting table (not shown) is acquired (step S574). With reference to the special electric accessory end interval setting table, the special symbol determination data and the continuous counter after the addition are obtained. The corresponding “interval before opening” is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer (step S575).

(T-8. Special electric accessory end interval setting table)
The pre-release interval time associated with the special symbol determination data (big hit type) and the continuous number counter is defined in the special electric accessory end interval setting table. Specifically, the pre-release interval time is determined according to the special symbol determination data and the current value of the continuous number counter (the continuous number counter value after the addition processing in step S573: the next round number). Yes.

  In the present embodiment, the interval time before opening set after each round game has the same time width (20 ms), but the present invention is not limited to this.

  During the interval before opening, the special electric accessory operation flag is set to the OFF state (= 00H) in the process of step S576 described later. Accordingly, the pre-opening interval time is a large winning opening prize invalid period in which the winning at the big winning opening is invalid (an illegal winning monitoring period during the big hit). There is no particular limitation on the interval time before opening, but since it is provided as an interval time between round games including the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms in this embodiment), the time is set to an extremely long time, for example, about several seconds. If this happens, the waiting time between round games increases and the player feels annoying. In particular, in a big hit game with a maximum number of rounds of 15R, the total waiting time between round games is several tens of seconds to nearly one minute, which is not preferable.

  Therefore, the interval time before opening in this embodiment is set to a short time of 20 ms. This is because when the game ball actually enters the winning opening and the ON signal of the winning detection switch is output, the output time (signal duration) is the longest although the rolling time of the winning ball is long or short. This is in consideration of about 20 ms. Goto action (for example, goto action (selgoto) aiming to win excessive prizes using plastic plates or piano wires at the big prize opening, or fraudulent misbehaving a switch using an illegal device (such as an illegal radio wave transmitter or magnet)) It is expected that ON signals from the large winning opening sensors 42a and 52a are frequently output when there is an illegal continuous winning due to a goto action that is activated to aim for excessive winning. Therefore, it is considered that there is no problem in monitoring illegal winnings between round games even if the interval time before opening is set to about 20 ms which is a proper ON signal signal duration. Preferably, it is considered that it is easier to detect fraud in the case of a longer time than that, but in consideration of the waiting time between round games, the interval time before opening is in the range of about 20 ms to several hundred ms. It is considered appropriate to set in However, the remaining ball discharge time may be set to a relatively short time depending on the form of the special winning opening (internal structure or the like). In this case, “remaining ball discharge time ≦ interval time before opening” may be set. For example, when the interval time between round games is set to 2000 ms, “the remaining ball discharge time is 1000 ms and the interval time before release is 1000 ms” or “the remaining ball discharge time is 500 ms and the interval time before release is 1500 ms”. May be.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 21 again, when the process of step S575 is completed, various setting processes for continuing the round are performed (step S576). Here, as a setting process for starting the next round game after the end of the current round game, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special electric accessory operation flag, and the special electric accessory operation status is set to “operation start process”. “Middle (01H)” (01H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status).

  When the above steps S573 to S576 (round continuation process) are finished, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(Round continuation end processing: steps S577 to S580)
On the other hand, when the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds (step S572: YES), the processing route of steps S577 to S580 is performed as round continuation termination processing.

  First, in the process of step S577, an accessory continuous operation device operation end interval setting table (not shown) is acquired (step S577), and this accessory continuous operation device operation end interval setting table (not shown) is referred to. Then, the “end interval time” corresponding to the special symbol determination data and the added continuous number counter is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer (step S578).

(T-9. Actor continuous operation device operation end interval setting table)
In the above-mentioned accessory continuous operation device operation end interval setting table, the special symbol determination data and the end interval time are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the end interval time is determined according to the special symbol determination data (big hit type). Is to be decided. This “end interval time” is an interval section from the end of the round game of the final round to the end of the jackpot game after the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed, and is a time that defines the section in which the ending effect is performed Refers to the width. During the end interval time, the special electric accessory actuating flag is set to the OFF state (= 00H) in the process of step S579 described later. Accordingly, during the end interval time, as in the interval time before opening, it becomes a large winning opening prize invalid period in which winning to the big winning opening is invalidated.

  When the process of step S578 is completed, various setting processes at the end of the round are performed (step S579). Here, as the setting process when reaching the maximum round, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special electric accessory operation flag, and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “ending process (04H)” (special electric accessory) 04H is stored in the operation status).

  Next, a “big hit end command” instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S580). This "hit end command" includes information regarding the current jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, that is, information that can specify the gaming state (including the internal gaming state) after the jackpot game is finished. It is also used when determining the effect mode after the big hit game on the control unit 24 side. Therefore, this “hit end command” has a role as a game state designation command for designating a game state since it can specify a game state after the end of the big hit game in addition to the role of instructing the start of the ending effect. Yes. The effect control unit 24 determines the effect mode based on the information included in the jackpot end command so that the game state after the jackpot end can be matched with the effect mode related to the game state. It has become.

  In addition, the information that can specify the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit may include information on the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) or information on the variation pattern allocation designation number and information on the internal gaming state. it can. The jackpot end command may be a single command or a plurality of commands. In the case of a plurality of commands, for example, information that makes it possible to specify the current jackpot type in one jackpot end command, and information that makes it possible to specify the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot in another jackpot end command These commands can be transmitted simultaneously or sequentially to the effect control unit 24 at a necessary timing. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of types of information are included in the effect control command and transmitted to the effect control unit 24, the information may be included in a single effect control command and transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The effect control unit is divided into an effect control command including one information and an effect control command including other information, and the role of the single effect control command is divided into a plurality of effect control commands. It is good also as a structure which transmits to 24.

  As described above, when the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is terminated, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(9-4-1. Large winning opening over winning number confirmation processing: FIG. 22)
Next, the process of confirming the number of winning prizes over winning prizes (step S581 in FIG. 21) will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing details of the big winning opening over winning number confirmation process. It should be noted that the process for confirming the number of winning prizes over the winning prize is similar to the process for confirming the number of winning prizes at the maximum winning prize (step S551 in FIG. 19, FIG. 20). The same processing contents as the confirmation processing will be described while being omitted as appropriate.

  In FIG. 22, first, the CPU 201 sequentially determines the state of the special electric accessory 1 operation flag and the state of the special electric agent 2 operation flag (steps S591, S592). When both the special electric accessory 1 operation flag and the special electric accessory 2 operation flag are in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S591: ≠ 5AH and step S592: ≠ 5AH), this grand prize is done without doing anything. Exit the over-winning number confirmation process.

  When either of the special electric accessory 1 operation flag and the special electric accessory 2 operation flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH) (step S591: = 5 AH, or step S591: ≠ 5AH, and step S592: = 5 AH), It is determined whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the big winning opening (step S593). When no winning (winning ball) is detected at the big winning opening (step S593: NO), nothing is done without doing anything, and the winning winning opening over winning number confirmation process is exited.

  When a winning is detected at the big winning opening (step S593: YES), the big winning opening winning counter is checked to determine whether or not the counter value exceeds the maximum winning number (step S594). Here, it is confirmed whether the counter for each big winning prize (the big winning prize winning counter for the lower big winning prize 40 and the big winning prize winning counter for the right big winning prize 50) is exceeded, and whether the maximum number of winnings is exceeded. Determine whether or not. Of the big hit types, there is a big hit type (special hit type) for executing a big hit game in which a plurality of types of big wins are controlled to open according to the number of rounds (for example, the lower big win 40 for the first to seventh rounds). In order to reduce the control burden, each prize winning port is simply set as shown in this embodiment. It is preferable to adopt a simple configuration in which each counter is confirmed.

  When the grand prize winning prize counter does not exceed the maximum number of winnings (step S594: NO), a normal winning command transmission process is performed (step S595). The case where the normal winning command transmission process is executed means that, in this round game, the winning ball is not reached the maximum winning number, and the big winning hole opening operation time elapses and the big winning hole is closed. This is the case. The normal winning command transmission process here has the same processing content as the process in step S564 in FIG.

  On the other hand, if the grand prize winning counter exceeds the maximum number of winning (step S594: YES), that is, if the currently detected winning ball is an over winning ball, an over winning winning command transmission process is performed (step S594). S597).

  In the over-winning winning command transmission process, an “OV winning big winning opening winning command” for an over-winning ball is transmitted. Here, when an over winning ball is detected at the lower major winning opening 40, the “large winning prize winning command 3” is designated as an OV winning major winning opening command for designating that an over winning has occurred at the lower major winning opening 40. ". On the other hand, when a winning is detected at the right big prize opening 50, a “large prize opening prize command 4” is transmitted as an OV winning big prize opening command specifying that an over winning has occurred at the right big prize opening 50. To do. In response to the OV winning big prize winning command, the effect control unit 24 performs over winning effect processing corresponding to the OV winning big prize winning command.

  The determination of which command of the big prize winning prize winning commands 3 and 4 is to be transmitted is the same as the transmission process of the normal big winning prize winning prize winning commands 1 and 2 already described. 42a or the right big prize opening sensor 52a can be determined based on the detection information of the special electric accessory actuated flag.

  During the process of confirming the number of over winning prizes, an “OV winning prize winning command” corresponding to each of the big winning openings is transmitted every time there is an over winning. On the side of the production control unit 24, it is understood that an over-winning has occurred by an OV winning big winning opening winning command, and the cumulative number of over winnings is counted by counting the number of times an OV winning big winning opening winning command is sent. I know. As described above, the over-winning cumulative number is notified by a clock-type accessory (number display unit 80 (number sector 80a), clock hand 97).

  When the normal winning command transmission process in step S595 or the over-winning winning command transmission process in step S597 is completed, the big winning opening prize counter corresponding to the big winning opening in which the winning is detected is incremented by 1 (step S596: Exit from the winning prize winning counter addition processing) and the winning prize over-number confirmation process.

  As described above, when the over-winning number confirmation process is exited, the special electric accessory continuation determination process (S509) is exited as it is until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero, that is, until the remaining ball discharge time elapses ( Step S571 of FIG. 21: NO), the large winning opening over winning number confirmation process is repeated. As a result, over-winning balls within the large winning opening effective winning period are monitored.

(9-5. Big hit end processing: FIG. 23)
Next, the big hit ending process (step S509 in FIG. 16) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit end process.

  In FIG. 23, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S591). Since the above-described end interval time is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here, it is determined whether or not the end interval time has elapsed in the determination process of step S591. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S591: NO), the jackpot end process is exited without doing anything.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (the end interval time has elapsed) (step S591: YES), it is set in the game state transition preparation process (step S411 in FIG. 15) as part of various settings at the end of the big hit. The values of the respective transition state buffers are stored in the respective state flags and counters shown (step S592). Thereby, the gaming state after the big hit game is designated.

  Subsequently, various setting processes at the end of the big hit are performed (step S593). Here, the various flags and buffers shown in the figure are cleared to zero (stores 00H) as various data used during the big hit game control process. Then, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “Starting process (00H)” (00H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status).

  Note that the special symbol determination data is not subject to clearing because it is used for final display on the special symbol display device until the symbol variation display game is started after the big hit game. The special symbol determination data is stored in the RAM 203 (special symbol determination) when the special symbol creation processing (step S410 in FIG. 12) during the special symbol variation start processing is performed after the current big hit game ends. There is no problem because the data storage area) is overwritten.

  Next, a game state notification information update process for updating the game state notification information is performed (step S594). In the present embodiment, in order to notify whether or not it is in the special figure short time state by the gaming state notification LED, in the game state notification information update process, the special symbol short time state flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) or in the OFF state. Whether or not (≠ 5AH) is confirmed, and in the case of the ON state, a predetermined gaming state notification LED output number for designating the special state short time state is stored as data for lighting the gaming state notification LED.

  Thus, a series of control processes related to the big hit game is completed. After exiting the big hit end process, the process proceeds to the right-hand notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

<Small hit game control processing>
(9-6. Small hit processing)
Next, the small hit process (step S504) will be described.

  In the small hit game, the “round game” like the big hit game is not executed. Therefore, as described above, the operation mode during the small hit game is “2R latent big hit game”, “2R normal big hit game A”, “2R normal big hit game B” (hereinafter, “2R series big hit game”). The process for controlling the opening / closing operation pattern of the big prize opening is performed so as to be substantially the same as the operation mode of “abbreviated“) ”. In the present embodiment, since the small hit is a big hit lottery object on the special figure 1 side, here, processing for controlling the opening / closing operation pattern of the lower big prize winning opening 40 is performed.

  When the small hit processing is entered, first, the “start interval time” in the small hit game is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and a “small hit start command” instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. . The “small hit start command” includes information on the type of small hit this time and game state information at the time of winning the small hit, and a series of hit effect modes developed during the small hit game on the effect control unit 24 side. It is used when determining (a series of hitting effect scenarios including an opening effect, a pseudo round effect, an ending effect, etc.).

  After the start interval has elapsed, a “small hit game state transition preparation process” for specifying a gaming state after a small hit game, which will be described later, is performed, and subsequently, the opening / closing operation of the lower big prize opening 40 is “2R system big hit. Solenoid control data for controlling the lower grand prize winning solenoid 42c is set so that the operation mode is the same as or very similar to “game”. As a result, the lower prize winning opening 40 is opened like a 2R system big hit game, and a pseudo round game during the small hit game is executed. It should be noted that the maximum number of winnings in the lower prize winning opening 40 during the small hit game is the same as that due to the big winning (for example, 9), and when the maximum winning number is reached, the lower winning prize opening 40 is closed. To be migrated. However, since the round game like the big hit game is not executed in the small hit game, the pseudo round game itself is ended when the maximum winning number is reached.

  If there is a prize at the lower big prize opening 40 during the small hit game, as in the case of the big hit game, until the maximum number of wins is reached, the “big big prize prize for regular use” is awarded for each small prize. Command (for example, a big prize opening prize command 5) "is transmitted, and when an over-winning occurs, a" OV big prize opening prize command (for example, a big prize opening prize command 6) "for a small hit is transmitted. .

  Therefore, the occurrence of an over win during the small hit game occurs when the maximum number of wins is exceeded throughout the small hit game. However, in the small hit game according to the present embodiment, since the lower large winning opening 40 is opened and closed with a short opening pattern, it is impossible to generate an over winning, and the transmission itself of the OV large winning opening winning command is restricted. Although configured, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, depending on the game performance, the operation mode during the small hit game may be different from the operation mode of the 2R system big hit game. In this case, in the pseudo round game, the lower large winning opening 40 is opened and closed in a long opening pattern so that an over winning can be generated in the small hit game. A configuration may be adopted in which a mouth winning command is transmitted and a predetermined over winning effect (for example, an over winning effect for small hits) is displayed.

  When a plurality of types of small hits are provided, in one small hit game (for example, a small hit game by small hit A), the big winning opening is opened and closed with a short opening pattern, and another small hit game (for example, a small hit game) In the small hit game by the hit B), the big winning opening may be opened and closed in a long open pattern, and when an over win is generated in the other small hit games, an over winning effect may be displayed. Also, in both the small win game and the other small hit games, the big prize opening is opened and closed with a long open pattern, and if an over win occurs during any of the small win games, an over winning effect can appear. You may comprise. In addition, in both one small hit game and the other small hit games, the big winning opening is opened and closed with a long open pattern, and if an over winning is generated during the other small winning games, an over winning effect is displayed. Alternatively, when an over winning is generated during another small hit game, an over winning effect may be displayed. With the configuration as described above, an over-winning effect can appear even during a small hit game, so that the fun of the small hit game can be improved.

  Returning to the description of the small hit processing again, when the series of opening / closing operations of the lower big prize opening 40 related to the small hit game is completed, a “small hit end command” instructing the start of the ending effect is sent to the effect control unit 24. Send. The “small hit end command” includes information that can specify the type of the small hit this time and the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit, and the effect control unit 24 determines the post-small hit effect mode. It is also used when Therefore, in addition to the role of instructing the start of the ending effect, this small hit end command also plays a role as a gaming state designation command for designating the gaming state, and an effect that functions in the same way as the “big winning end command” related to the big hit game Control command.

(9-6-1. Game state transition preparation process for small hits)
Next, the small hit game state transition preparation process will be described.

  In the small hit game state transition preparation process, a setting process for specifying the game state after the small hit game is performed in order to specify the game state after the small hit game. Specifically, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is acquired first, and then the gaming state transition table selection table for small hits (FIG. 30 (B)) is acquired. Then, referring to the gaming state transition table selection table for small hits, the gaming state transition table “JTTBL-8” or “JTTBL” based on the current variation pattern allocation designation number and the small hit type (special symbol determination data) -9 "is obtained, and the game state transition table is referred to, and the corresponding data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 (variation pattern allocation designation number storage area and special symbol variation number counter). Thereby, the game state after the small hit game is designated.

(T-10. Game state transition table selection table for small hits: FIG. 30 (b))
FIG. 30 (b) shows a small hit gaming state transition table selection table. The game state transition table selection table for small hits according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of small numbers associated with a variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) and a winning type (special symbol determination data: here, a small hit type). The winning game state transition tables “JTTBL-8” and “JTTBL-9” are defined. Specifically, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) and the special symbol determination data for identifying the small hit type Based on the above, one of the game state transition tables (game state transition table for small hits) is determined from among a plurality of types of game state transition tables.

(T-11. Game state transition table for small hits: FIG. 31 (b))
With reference to FIG. 31 (b), the small hit gaming state transition tables “JTTBL-8” to “JTTBL-9” will be described. These small hit gaming state transition tables include data for storing in the variation pattern allocation designation number storage area and the special symbol variation number counter as data for designating the gaming state to be transferred after the small hit game. It has been established. When these data values are stored in the variation pattern distribution designation number storage area and the special symbol variation number counter, the gaming state after the small hit game is identified. Here, in “JTTBL-8” to “JTTBL-9”, only the data to be stored in the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number buffer and the special symbol fluctuation number counter buffer is determined. However, there is no transition of the internal gaming state, and only the transition of the gaming state as the variation pattern selection mode (change of the variation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode)) is performed.

  In the small hit game state transition table selection table, the game state at the time of winning the small hit is the normal state (variation pattern distribution designation number 00H) or CZ (variation pattern distribution designation number 06H). Only in some cases, either the small hit game state transition table “JTTBL-8” or “JTTBL-9” is selected. That is, when the gaming state is a probability variation state (variation pattern allocation designation number 01H), a latent probability state (variation pattern allocation designation number 02H), and a short time state (variation pattern allocation designation number 03H), the gaming state transition No, the game state at the time of winning the small hit is continued, and if the small win is won during CZ, either the small hit game state transition table “JTTBL-8” or “JTTBL-9” is selected again Thus, the number of CZ continuations is reset according to the small hit type (see FIG. 31 (B)).

  After exiting the above small hit process, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

<Processing on the production control unit side: FIGS. 24 to 26>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26, the effect control processing on the effect control unit 24 side of the present embodiment will be described. The process on the side of the effect control unit 24 mainly includes a predetermined main process (effect control side main process: FIG. 24) and a timer interrupt process (effect control side timer interrupt process: FIG. 26) activated by a scheduled interrupt. It is comprised including.

<11. Production control side main processing: FIG. 24>
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a main process (effect control side main process) on the effect control unit side. The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) starts the main process on the effect control side shown in FIG. 24 when the gaming machine main body is turned on from the outside.

  In the main process on the effect control side, the CPU 241 first performs a necessary initial setting process before starting the game operation (step S071). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, moving object starting point return processing, CTC initial setting, timer interrupt permission, initial setting of CPU internal register values including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

  When the initial setting process in step S071 is completed, the main loop process in steps S073 to S078 is performed every predetermined time as a process during normal operation, and otherwise the effect soft random number update process in step S079 is repeated.

  In the process of step S072, the CPU 241 refers to the counter value for main loop update period and determines whether or not the main loop update period that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S072). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that is updated in a main loop update process (step S096 in FIG. 26) during an effect control side timer interrupt process described later. In the present embodiment, the main loop process is performed every 16 ms. Until the main loop update period arrives (step S072: NO), various effect lottery random numbers are updated (step S079: various effect soft random number update processing).

  When the main loop update period has arrived (step S072: YES), the CPU 241 performs a received command analysis process (step S073). In this received command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer. If an effect control command is stored, this command is read, and an effect control process corresponding to the read effect control command is read. I do. Among these production control commands, the hold addition command, hold subtraction command, variation pattern designation command, decoration symbol designation command, variation stop command, error command corresponding to each error (main error command), each error described above An error release command corresponding to is included.

  For example, when at least a variation pattern designation command is received and stored in the reception buffer (in this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command are received and stored in the reception buffer. In the case of command analysis processing, one or more types of effect patterns are determined based on information (variation pattern information and winning information (or winning type information)) included in the command. The effect pattern determined here works as a “part effect” as an element constituting the effect scenario. Next, determine the time schedule for how and at what timing the production pattern (parts production) determined above will appear, and compose the production scenario. The production scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. Various production patterns (part production) incorporated in this production scenario are developed one after another or simultaneously, thereby realizing an “production scenario” in a broad sense. Note that the above-described production scenario is rewritten to a different production scenario as necessary (for example, a part production for operation may be incorporated based on operation detection of the frame production button 13). In this case, the changed effect scenario data is reset in the scenario setting area, and an effect appears based on the changed effect scenario data.

  When the received command analysis process in step S073 is completed, a scenario update process is performed (step S074). In this scenario update process, the contents of the timer necessary for execution of the production pattern are updated. A typical example of the timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to the occurrence timing of the effect. For example, the time within the variation period (decoration symbol variation period) in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed is within the same period as the variation period (special symbol variation period) in which the special symbol is variably displayed. On this axis, a time schedule for what kind of production pattern is made to appear in the production means with what time width is managed by this timer. Such an effect scenario timer is also used in an effect process related to an LED data update process (step S075) and an effect agent control data update process (step S077) which will be described later. Here, this production scenario timer is monitored, and when the production time of one production comes, the sound data for the speaker 46 and the liquid crystal command for image display control are created and stored in the designated area of the RAM 243, respectively. . The LED data for the light display device is created by an LED data update process (step S075) described later, and the motor control data for the movable body accessory is created by an after-mentioned effect actor control data update process (step 077). The

  Next, LED data update processing is performed (step S075). In this LED data update process, LED data for a light display device such as a decorative lamp unit 45 or an LED is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer, and stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. The data created here is used in an effect LED management process (step S095 in FIG. 26) during a timer interrupt process to be described later.

  Next, sound output processing is performed (step S076). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process in step S074 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, a sound effect is output from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit (sound source LSI). Thereby, the sound production according to the production scenario is realized.

  Next, a production accessory control data update process is performed (step S077). In the effect accessory control data update process, drive control data for the movable object accessory motors 80c, 91c, 92c, 62c, and 73c is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer. The data created here is used in a director action operation management process (step S094 in FIG. 26) during a timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, error notification management processing related to error notification is performed (step S078). In this error notification management process, an error notification effect being executed is managed. The error notification effects include an error notification effect related to the main error for which the main control unit 20 is a determination subject and an error notification effect related to the sub-error for which the effect control unit 24 is a determination subject. It is managed by this error notification management process. In the error notification management process, the sub error (sound source IC error, sound source IC error, sound detection IC, position detection sensors 82a, 91a, 92a, RTC function unit) is detected based on the detection information from the switches connected to the effect control unit 24. It is determined whether or not a movable body accessory error and a production board error have occurred. When it is determined that a sub error has occurred, an error notification effect relating to the generated sub error is started.

  Further, in the management of the error notification effect, when a specified time (for example, 30 seconds) that is an end condition of the error notification effect being executed has elapsed, a process for ending the error notification effect is performed. However, errors that cause the error notification effect to end in this error notification management process are some types of errors, and for other types of errors, the error notification effect is maintained until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. May be continued, or may be terminated when an error cancel command corresponding to the main error is received. Details of the error notification management process (step S078) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(12. Command reception interrupt processing: FIG. 25)
Next, the command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing on the effect control side. This command reception interruption process is executed with higher priority than an effect control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 26) described later when an effect control command is received from the main control unit 20.

  First, when an interruption based on the strobe signal from the main control unit 20 occurs during execution of the main process shown in FIG. 24, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S081). The received effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243 (step S082), and the saved register contents are restored (step S083). Thereby, the command reception interrupt process is ended, the process returns to the effect control unit side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until an interrupt based on the next strobe signal is generated. As described above, when various effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 are received, this command reception interrupt process is executed, and when the effect control command is received, the command is stored in the command reception buffer. Is done.

(13. Production control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. 26)
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the timer interrupt process on the production control side will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the effect control-side timer interrupt process. This production control side timer interruption process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 1 ms), and is executed by interruption during execution of the production control side main process.

  In FIG. 26, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S091), and then performs an effect button input management process (step S092). In this effect button input management process, whether or not an operation (ON operation) detection signal is input from the frame effect button 13 is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243. To store. This information is used for the button notice effect.

  Next, a liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S093). In this liquid crystal command transmission process, when there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S074) in the effect control side main process of FIG. 24, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU). Thus, image display control for the liquid crystal display device 36 is executed. Thereby, the image production along the production scenario is realized.

  Next, directing action operation management is performed (step S094). In this stage actor operation management, the movable body accessory motors 80c, 91c, and 92c are passed through the drive control unit based on the motor control data for the movable body accessory created in the stage actor control data update process (step S077). , 62c and 73c. Thereby, the visual production | presentation by the movable body accessory (The clock type | mold actor 80, the flower type | mold accessory 90, the rotating light 62, the movable body 73) along a production scenario is implement | achieved.

  Next, effect LED management is performed (step S095). In this effect LED management, based on the LED data created in the LED data update process (step S075), the decorative lamp unit 45 and the LED are turned on and blinked through the light display control unit. Thereby, the light effect according to the effect scenario is realized.

  Next, a main loop update process for managing the main loop update period is performed (step S096). In this main loop update process, the main loop update cycle counter is updated for each interrupt (main loop update cycle counter + 1). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that circulates in a range of multiples of 16 (for example, 0 to 31) by increment processing, for example.

  After the processing of steps S091 to S096 is completed, the saved register contents are restored (step S097). As a result, the timer interruption process is terminated, the process returns to the effect control side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<Contents of received command analysis processing: FIGS. 27 and 28>
27 and 28 show processing closely related to the present invention among the processing executed in the received command analysis processing (step S073 in FIG. 20). Hereinafter, a case where an error command is received and a case where an error release command is received will be described.

<Error Command Reception Processing: FIG. 27>
First, with reference to FIG. 27, the received command analysis process executed when the production control unit 24 receives an error command (main error command) will be described in detail.

  FIG. 27 shows one of received command analysis processes performed when a main error command transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24 is received when a main error occurs on the main control unit 20 side. It is a flowchart figure which shows a certain error command reception process. This main error command is an effect control command transmitted in the error management process (step S055) of the main control side timer interrupt process in FIG.

  In FIG. 27, when receiving the main error command, the production control unit 24 (CPU 241) first executes an error type confirmation process (step S701). In this error type confirmation processing, first, the received main error command is analyzed, error type information (main error information) included in the command is acquired, and the main error type is acquired. The main error includes a magnetic sensor error, a radio wave sensor error, a vibration sensor error, a door opening error, a ball clogging error, a replenishment error, a payout shortage error, etc. as shown in FIG. 33 and FIG.

  In the error type confirmation process, an error flag corresponding to the acquired error type is set. In the present embodiment, the RAM 243 is provided with a plurality of error flag setting areas associated with the error type and the error notification priority, and based on the flag setting state in the error flag setting area, It is configured to be able to identify (specify) the type of error and the error notification priority. The error flag setting area will be described by taking as an example a gaming machine capable of monitoring all 25 types of errors shown in FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 to be described later, and corresponding error flag setting areas 1 to 25 corresponding to all 25 types of errors. (Error flag setting areas 1 to N corresponding to the first error notification priority order 1 to the Nth error are provided), and when an error occurs, the flag value of the error flag setting area corresponding to the error is turned ON ( 5AH), and when the error is released, it is set to OFF state (00H), and by determining what flag value is currently set in what error flag setting area, The type of error currently occurring and the error notification priority are identified.

  For example, a case where a movable body accessory error has occurred alone will be described as an example. A flag corresponding to a movable body accessory error (in the flag setting area of error notification priority No. 17) is generated along with the occurrence of a movable body accessory error. Flag) is set to ON. In this case, only the flag corresponding to the movable body accessory error is in the ON state and the other error flags are in the OFF state. Therefore, the effect control unit 24 (sub CPU 241) determines the error notification priority order. It can be identified that the 17th movable object error is occurring independently. Note that the error flag relating to the sub error is set in the process of step S722 during the error notification management process of FIG. 29 described later.

  Further, taking as an example a case where a door opening error has newly occurred while this movable body accessory error has occurred alone, the flag corresponding to the previously occurring movable body accessory error is in the ON state. In this state, the flag corresponding to the newly generated door opening error (the flag in the flag setting area of error notification priority 12) is set to the ON state. As a result, it is possible to identify that the movable body accessory error having the error notification priority of No. 17 and the door opening error having the error notification priority of No. 12 are currently occurring. This error flag is cleared based on the establishment of an error cancellation condition determined corresponding to the error type. This flag clear process is performed in steps S713 and S718 of FIG. 28 described later and step S734 of FIG.

  The effect control unit 24 manages the error flag as described above, and identifies a type (error type) of an error (main error and sub error) that is currently occurring (error type) and a function unit (sub-side error management means) ) To monitor and grasp what kind of error is currently occurring. The sub-side error management means is not particularly limited as long as it can determine the type of error currently occurring and its error notification priority. For example, it can be configured to include a first means for determining the type of error currently occurring and a second means for determining the error notification priority.

(Error judgment data management form)
Instead of managing the error type with the error flag as described above, the following determination data (hereinafter referred to as “error determination data”) is used to determine the type of error currently occurring and the error notification priority. May be specified (hereinafter, this configuration is referred to as “error determination data management form”).

  The error determination data is data for specifying (identifying) the type of error and the error notification priority. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has 25 types of errors shown in FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 described later. Taking a gaming machine whose type can be monitored as an example, all the 25 types of errors shown in the figure have data values related to error notification priority and error type. Specifically, “01H” to “19H” are assigned in descending order of error notification priority. Specifically, of “01H” to “19H”, the largest value “19H (first error notification priority)” is the highest error clearing priority RAM clear error, and the next highest value. “18H (second error notification priority)” is an incorrect winning prize winning error, and so on, “17H (third error notification priority)” is magnetic sensor error 2, “16H (fourth error notification priority)” ) "Is a radio wave sensor error 2, ...," 0EH (error notification priority 12th) "is a door opening error, ...," 09H (error notification priority 17th) "is a movable object error, ... "02H (error notification priority 24th)" indicates a probability variation area sensor error 2, and the smallest value "01H (25th lowest error notification priority)" indicates a non-probability variable V prize error. ShowBy using such determination data, the error control and the error notification priority order can be identified on the effect control unit 24 side.

  In the error determination data management form, when the effect control unit 24 receives the main error command, error determination data corresponding to the acquired error type is set in the process of step S701. The error determination data is set in the error determination data management area of the RAM 243, and is used on the effect control unit 24 side to specify the type of error currently occurring.

  When multiple types of errors have occurred, error determination data values corresponding to the respective errors are set and managed. For example, in the case where a door opening error (error determination data = 0EH) is newly generated while a movable body accessory error (error determination data = 09H) is independently generated, the previously generated movable body accessory error is designated. In addition to the error determination data “09H”, the determination data “0EH” for designating the door opening error is newly set, and based on these two data values, a movable object error and a door opening error are currently occurring ( It is possible to specify that duplication is occurring. In addition, the error determination data corresponding to the error is cleared based on the establishment of a predetermined error cancellation condition determined corresponding to the error type. For example, when the movable body accessory error and the door opening error are overlapped and the movable body accessory error release condition is satisfied, the error determination data “09H” is cleared and the remaining error determination data is “0EH”. Only the state is set. This clearing process may be performed in steps S713 and S718 in FIG. 28 described later and step S734 in FIG. Further, the error determination data related to the sub error may be set in the process of step S722 during the error notification management process of FIG. 29 described later.

  The effect control unit 24 manages the error determination data as described above, and identifies a type (error type) of an error (main error and sub error) that is currently occurring (error type) and a function unit (sub-side error management) Means). This is the same as the error flag management mode already described.

  Further, the configuration of the error determination data is not particularly limited as long as it is data that can specify the type of error currently occurring and the error notification priority. In addition, the error determination data may be configured by first data that can identify the type of error that is currently occurring, and second data that can identify the error notification priority of the currently occurring error.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 27 again, it is then determined whether or not a plurality of types of errors are occurring (step S702). If no error is occurring (step S702: NO), that is, if the error that has occurred this time (main error) is a single occurrence, error notification effect scenario creation processing is executed (step S703). In this error notification effect scenario creation process, an effect scenario of “error notification effect for single occurrence” corresponding to the main error type acquired in step S701 is created and set. Thereby, the error notification effect for single occurrence corresponding to the error is realized.

Note that an error image display effect (including an error notification effect for occurrence of duplication (see processing in step S707 described later)) is displayed at a normal display position (for example, the upper stage of the screen), the warning text is hidden. When there is a case, for example, an effect scenario for an image display effect in which a warning message is displayed at a specific display position that is not hidden (for example, the middle or lower part of the screen) instead of the normal display position. Create Also, if the error notification priority of the error that is occurring is higher (for example, No. 1 to No. 12), the decorative symbols and the hold display areas 77 and 76 are reduced in order to collect the attention of the player in the warning text. Production scenarios such as display, evacuation display, and non-display are created and set. As described above, the error notification (error notification effect) based on the error notification effect production scenario is terminated when the error release condition corresponding to each error is satisfied (step S717 in FIG. 28 described later). . However, when different errors occur repeatedly, the error notification with a relatively low notification order is terminated based on the error notification priority (steps S712 to S716 in FIG. 28 described later, steps S725 to S728 in FIG. 29). .

  On the other hand, when an error overlap is occurring (other error notification effects are being executed) (step S702: YES), an error notification effect for the occurrence of overlap (error sound effect, error light effect, error image at the time of overlap) Processing for creating and setting an effect scenario of (display effect) is performed (steps S705 to S707). In the following description of the processing in steps S705 to S707, for convenience of explanation, as an example of an error in which overlap has occurred, a movable body accessory error has occurred in advance, and the movable body accessory error is in progress. Next, a case where a door opening error occurs (a case where the main error command received this time is a command for specifying a door opening error) will be described.

  In the error notification priority determination process of step S705, each error flag that is currently ON is compared and determined based on the error flag, and an error having a relatively high error notification priority is extracted. In this example, it is determined which error notification priority is higher among the movable body accessory error of error notification priority No. 17 and the door opening error of error notification priority No. 12. Here, the 12th door opening error is determined to be the error with the highest notification ranking among the currently occurring errors. This determination result is set in the error notification priority order determination area of the RAM 243. When there are M types of errors to be determined (2 ≦ M), it is determined which error is the highest error notification priority among all M types of errors.

  Next, an error duplication sound effect production scenario creation process is executed (step S706). In this error duplication sound effect scenario creation process, an error sound effect scenario and an error light effect scenario corresponding to the error determined to have the highest error notification priority in the process of step S705 are created. And set. In this example, the production scenario for generating the “door opening warning sound” as the error sound production scenario corresponding to the door opening error determined in the process of step S705 is “red blinking red” as the error light production scenario. An effect scenario for causing light to be emitted is created and set (see the door opening error column in FIG. 33).

  Next, an error duplication image display effect scenario creation process is executed (step S707). In this error duplication image display effect scenario creation process, an image display effect for notifying information that can identify all errors for which the error flag value is set to ON, for example, warning messages for all errors are displayed. Create and set an error image display effect for display on the screen. In this example, since the movable body accessory error and the door opening error are duplicated, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), a warning message for each error (movable body accessory error and door opening error and A production scenario of an image display effect for error for displaying a warning sentence) is created. Thereby, from the error image display effect when the movable body accessory error as shown in FIG. 38A alone occurs, the error image display effect during the overlap occurrence as shown in FIG. 38B. Will be switched to. By the processing in steps S706 to S707, an error notification effect for occurrence of duplication corresponding to all errors is realized.

  In this example, the case where the door opening error and the movable body accessory error are duplicated has been described as an example, but the same processing as above is also performed when three or more types of errors are duplicated. Can be applied.

<Error Release Command Reception Processing: FIG. 28>
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a received command analysis process when an error cancel command is received will be described in detail. Note that the contents of substantially the same processes (steps S715 to S717) as the processes executed during the error command reception process will be omitted as appropriate in order to avoid duplication.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an error release command reception process executed when the main error that has occurred on the main control unit 20 side is resolved and the effect control command from the main control unit 20 is received by the effect control unit 24. FIG. The error release command is one of the effect control commands transmitted by the main control unit 20 in the error management process (step S055) of the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG.

  In FIG. 28, when receiving the error release command, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first determines whether or not an error overlap has occurred (error notification effect is being executed) (step S711).

  If the error overlap is not occurring (step S711: NO), the processing necessary to end the error notification effect during the single occurrence is executed (step S717), the error flag to be canceled is cleared (step S718), Exit the error cancel command reception process. Thereby, the error notification that is the target of error cancellation is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an error overlap is occurring (step S711: YES), an error notification effect for duplication occurrence currently occurring (error sound effect at the time of duplication, error light effect, error image display effect), Processing for creating and setting a new effect scenario due to occurrence of an error to be canceled is performed (steps S712 to S716). In the following description of the processing of Steps SS712 to S716, for convenience of explanation, as an example of an error occurring during duplication, a ball clogging error (main error, error notification priority number 22) and a movable body accessory error ( When the sub-error, error notification priority order 17) and the door opening error (main error, error notification priority number 12) are overlapping, the door opening error is resolved and the corresponding error release command is received ( The case where the error cancellation command received this time was a command for specifying a door opening error will be described.

  In the process of step S712, a cancellation target error type confirmation process is executed (step S712). In the cancellation target error type confirmation process, the received error cancellation command is analyzed, information included in the command is acquired, and main error information to be canceled is acquired.

  Next, the error flag of the door opening error that is the object of cancellation is cleared (OFF state) (step S713). As a result, the door opening error is eliminated, and the remaining errors are only the ball clogging error and the movable body accessory error.

  Next, error notification priority order determination processing is executed (step S714). In this error notification priority determination process, the error notification priority is determined based on the residual error flag. In this example, it is determined which error notification priority is higher among the error clogging error of error notification priority 22 and the movable body accessory error of error notification priority No. 17, The 17th movable body accessory error is determined to be the error with the highest notification rank among currently occurring errors.

  Next, a sound production effect scenario creation process for error cancellation is executed (step S715). The error canceling sound effect scenario creating process includes an error sound effect scenario and an error light effect scenario corresponding to the error determined to have the highest error notification priority in step S715. Create and configure. In this example, an effect scenario for generating a “movable object abnormality warning sound” as an error sound effect scenario corresponding to the movable object error determined in step S715 is “error light effect scenario”. A production scenario for causing “white blinking” to be emitted is created and set (see the column of movable object accessory error in FIG. 33). Thereby, for the sound effect and the light effect, an error notification corresponding to the movable object error is newly executed from the error notification corresponding to the door opening error.

  Next, an error cancellation use image display effect scenario creation process is executed (step S716). In this error release-time image display effect scenario creation process, as in the process of step S707 in FIG. 27, information for identifying all errors for which the error flag value is set to the ON state is notified. Create and set an image display effect. In this example, the door opening error is canceled and the ball clogging error and the movable body accessory error are duplicated, so the error message for displaying the warning text for the ball clogging error and the movable body accessory error is displayed. A production scenario for the image display production is created. By the processes in steps S712 to S716, an error notification effect for duplication corresponding to the remaining errors is realized.

<Error notification management processing: FIG. 29>
Next, the error notification management process (step S078) in FIG. 24 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing details of the error notification management processing in step S078. Note that the same processing contents as those described in the error command reception processing of FIG. 27 or the error release command reception processing of FIG. 28 will be omitted as appropriate in order to avoid duplication.

  In FIG. 29, the effect control unit 24 first determines whether or not a sub error has occurred (step S721). The sub error includes a sound source IC error, a movable body accessory error, and a production board error. Whether or not these errors have occurred is determined depending on whether the sound source IC of the switches connected to the production control unit 24, the position detection sensor 82a, 91a, 92a, based on detection information from the RTC function unit. If it is determined that no sub error has occurred (step S721: NO), then step S731 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a sub error has occurred (step S721: YES), an error flag corresponding to the generated sub error is set to ON (step S722). For example, if an abnormality that does not return to the origin position occurs in the flower-shaped accessory 90 and the effect control unit 24 determines that a movable accessory error has occurred, the movable accessory error (error notification priority 17). ) Is set to the ON state (5AH).

  Next, it is determined whether or not an error is occurring (step S723). If no error is occurring (step S723: NO), an effect scenario for error notification corresponding to the error flag set to ON in the process of step S722 is created and set (step S724). The content of this process is the same as the process in step S703 in FIG. When the process of step S724 is completed, the process proceeds to a determination process of step S728 described later.

  On the other hand, if an error overlap is occurring (step S723: YES), an effect scenario for generating an error notification effect (error sound effect, error light effect, error image display effect at the time of overlap) is created and set. The process for performing is performed (steps S725-S727). Note that the processing in steps S725 to S727 has substantially the same processing contents as the processing in steps S705 to S707 in FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S728, and it is determined whether or not an error cancellation condition is satisfied for the currently occurring sub error (step S728). If the release condition is not satisfied (step S728: NO), the error notification management process is exited without doing anything. On the other hand, when the cancellation condition is satisfied (step S728: YES), a setting process necessary for terminating the error notification of the sub-error to be canceled is performed (step S729), and the error notification management process is exited.

[Second Embodiment]
In the case of the first embodiment, when an error occurs, a sound effect, a light effect, and an image display effect are combined and notified as an error notification effect. The production means used in these productions were the speaker 46 for the sound production, the decorative lamp 45 for the light production, and the liquid crystal display device 36 for the image display production. Among these, in a normal light effect executed in the decorative symbol variation display game, in addition to the decorative lamp 45, various lamps provided on the board, a clock-type accessory 80, a flower-type accessory 90, a rotating lamp 62, a movable lamp A lamp provided inside a movable body accessory such as the body 73 and the frame effect button 13, a lamp provided inside the launch operation handle 15, and the like are used. Hereinafter, among the lamps other than the decorative lamp 45, the movable body accessory and the lamp provided inside the launch operation handle 15 are referred to as “special lamps”, and light effects using the special lamps (second embodiment). Will be described.

  When no error has occurred, these special lamps mainly provide a high expectation notice that informs that the winning expectation is high as one of the SP reach effects that increase the winning expectation and the notice effects related to winning fluctuations. The revolving lamp 62 of the third movable body accessory 73 is used only during the jackpot finalizing notice effect (during one announcement notification effect). Then, when an error occurs, if these special lamps are used for the light production for error, the player may be mistakenly confused with "Is the winning expectation high?" In particular, in the error light production, when the rotating lamp 62 of the third movable body accessory 73 emits a light by mistake, the player may make a big hit like “This game is a big hit!” There is a risk that it will be confused when it is confirmed. However, for errors with a high severity of damage to gaming machines, it is necessary to effectively notify the outside of the occurrence of the error. Therefore, in this embodiment, when an error occurs, the following effects are executed and controlled for the special lamp based on the error notification priority order to solve the above problems. In this example, the effect using the special lamp is referred to as “lamp notice effect”.

(Light effect by special lamp when RAM clear error occurs)
A case where a RAM clear error (error notification priority number 1) has occurred as the above-mentioned high-severity error will be described.

  The game situation when the RAM clear error occurs is a game preparation situation where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reset and the game is not progressing, and is not a situation where the symbol variation display game is started immediately. Accordingly, the player does not mistake that the winning expectation degree is high or that the big hit is confirmed. However, the RAM clear can be a target of fraud, and the RAM clear error caused by the RAM clear is an error that should be warned as an error having the highest severity of damage to the gaming machine.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to effectively notify the outside of the RAM clear error when it occurs, the light that causes the special lamp including the rotating lamp 62 of the third movable body accessory 73 to emit light in a predetermined mode. The production is executed. Since the RAM clear error occurs due to the operation of the RAM clear switch inside the gaming machine, the problem of illegal acts is considered as a problem rather than the above-mentioned problem of misunderstanding of the player. As in the case of an error other than the above, the special lamp is not kept off, but a light effect (special light effect) for emitting light in a predetermined mode is executed (“RAM clear error light effect“ Refer to “All white light”). As a result, when the light effect for the error by the special lamp is executed, the recognition that the RAM clear error has occurred is conspicuous, and the recognition that the severity for the pachinko gaming machine is relatively highest is visually recognized. It is possible from the point of view.

(Light production by special lamp when an error other than RAM clear error occurs)
Next, a case where an error other than the RAM clear error has occurred will be described.

  The game situation when an error other than the RAM clear error occurs mainly occurs in a playable state, for example, during a symbol variation display game (during special / decoration / normal symbol variation display game), during a big hit game, Various situations can be considered, such as in a demonstration screen waiting for a prize to 35. In particular, during the demonstration screen, the symbol variation display game is not being executed, but when the player starts playing, the game ball is won at the start openings 34 and 35 and the symbol variation display game is started. is there.

  Therefore, if an error occurs in such a game-ready state, and if an error light effect using a special lamp is executed, if the symbol variation display game is in progress, the winning expectation is not high. Regardless of this, there is a risk that the player may be mistaken for the occurrence of a “one-shot notification” that is a big win expectation even though the winning-winning expectation is high or the big hit is not decided. Even if it is in the demonstration screen, if the player starts the game, the symbol variation display game is in a situation to start, so that it is not possible to say that 100% of the players will not make a mistake. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when an error other than the RAM clear error (here, an error notification priority of error No. 2 or later: see FIG. 33) occurs, the execution of the lamp notice effect is limited. For example, when a special lamp in error is composed of a light effect and a sound effect, the special lamp is turned off (continues to be turned off), and the sound effect is not executed (silence) (the special lamp in error). If the lamp is composed only of light effects, the special light lamp is turned off). This will be described by taking as an example the case where a lamp notice effect using a special lamp is included in the effect scenario related to the symbol variation display game, and execution of the lamp notice effect is restricted as follows.

  If an error occurs before the lamp notice effect occurs, execution of the lamp notice effect is restricted until the error is canceled. That is, even if the stage scenario progresses and the timing for executing the lamp notice effect has arrived, if the error has not been canceled, the lamp notice effect is not executed and the special lamp remains off. Here, depending on the release timing of the error, there may be a timing during the lamp notice effect execution period in the effect scenario. In such a case, after the error is canceled, the original effect scenario may be executed to generate the lamp notice effect, but after the error is canceled, the original effect scenario is executed. Suddenly, an effect as if a lamp notice effect was generated (specifically, a situation where the lamp notice effect was started in the middle of the lamp notice effect scenario) is considered to cause confusion for the player. Therefore, when an error occurs before the lamp warning effect is generated, it is preferable to limit the lamp warning effect itself when the error is canceled during the lamp warning effect execution period.

  On the other hand, if the error is canceled before the timing to execute the lamp notice effect, the error factor has already been eliminated, and there is no need to restrict the execution of the lamp notice effect. The lamp notice effect is executed.

  If an error occurs during execution of the lamp notice effect, the execution of the lamp notice effect may be immediately terminated when the error occurs. However, even if the lamp notice effect is being executed suddenly, there is a risk of confusion for the player if the lamp notice effect is ended suddenly. There is a possibility of giving such an illusion. In consideration of such circumstances, even if an error occurs when the lamp notice effect is being executed, the lamp notice effect being executed may be continued as it is.

  Thereby, since the light effect by the special lamp is restricted during the error, the above-described problem that the player misidentifies does not occur.

  However, in the case of an error type that allows the game to continue even if an error occurs, for example, “ball clogging error (# 22 at the lowest error notification priority)” or “right / left strike warning notification (error notification priority # 21) In the case of an error with a low severity such as an error that can be canceled by the player, such as an error), it is not preferable for the progress of the game to uniformly limit the light effect by the special lamp. Therefore, in the case of such an error, the lamp notice effect need not be limited. In this case, the error may be classified as follows based on the error notification priority order, and it may be configured to be able to determine whether or not to restrict the lamp notice effect according to the error classification.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, in the image display effect for error, when the flower-shaped accessory 90 operates to hide a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, the warning text for the error is moved from the upper screen to the middle screen. It was displayed. The reason why the warning text is moved and displayed in this way is to prevent the warning text from being hidden by the flower-shaped accessory 90. However, if the warning text moves to various positions while maintaining the relationship that the warning text is not hidden by the movable object even at the destination, what kind of error is currently occurring because the viewpoint moves. It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is present.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the position of the movable body accessory is moved without moving the position of the warning sentence. To be specific, change the action pattern of the movable body accessory so that the warning text is not hidden when the movable object moves based on the set action pattern (production scenario). The movable body accessory is moved. In this way, since the warning text is not hidden, the warning text can be read, and it is possible to recognize what kind of error is currently occurring.

  Here, the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 mainly display a high expectation notice effect that informs that the winning expectation degree is high as one of the SP reach effect and the notice effect related to hit fluctuation. When doing so, the position moves as follows. That is, the first movable body 91 moves from the original position above the liquid crystal screen to the “upper position outside the liquid crystal screen or inside the liquid crystal screen” (solid line position: merged position in FIG. 2), and the second movable body 92 Projectingly moves from the original position on the right side of the liquid crystal screen to the “side position outside or inside the liquid crystal screen” (solid line position in FIG. 2: merged position), where the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 are moved. Unite to form a “flower-shaped part”. After that, the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 move from the combined position to the deepest position (broken line position in FIG. 2: operating position) deeper in the liquid crystal screen in the combined state, and temporarily stand by at the operating position. To do. Thereafter, the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 return to the above-mentioned combined position (solid line position in FIG. 2) in the combined state, and further return to the original position independently. Therefore, regarding the position movement, the section from the origin position to the merged position is the first stroke, the section from the merged position to the action position is the second stroke, the section from the action position to the merge position is the third stroke, from the merge position. Considering the section to the original position as the fourth stroke, the whole is divided into four strokes. If this is made correspond to the production scenario which moves a movable body accessory, the 1st process is the 1st production scenario (1st step) of the production scenario of a movable body accessory, and the 2nd process is the 2nd production scenario (2nd step). ), The third process corresponds to the third effect scenario (third step), and the fourth process corresponds to the fourth effect scenario (fourth step).

  FIG. 41 illustrates this. The first stroke from the original position p0 to the merge position pg, the second stroke until the action position (the deepest position) P1, and then the merge position pg. There is a third stroke until returning, and then a fourth stroke until returning to the original position p0. Through these steps in order, one cycle (unit movement) of the accessory action is completed. By performing the cycle, one rendering operation of the movable object is completed. In addition, it is grasped | ascertained from the encoder synchronized with the pulse motor which drives a movable body accessory which process is in these processes.

  Here, between the “original position p0” and the “combined position pg”, that is, in the section of the first stroke and the fourth stroke, the movable object (the first movable body and the second movable body is added to the warning message displayed in the liquid crystal screen). It is a section where the union of movable objects) does not overlap. Also, between the “merging position pg” and the “acting position P1”, that is, in the section of the second stroke and the third stroke, the movable body accessory (the first movable body and the first movable body and the first movable body) It is determined whether or not (2 movable bodies) overlap. That is, in the section A (Pg-P2 section) and the section D (P2-Pg section) on the original position P0 side from the midway position P2, the movable body accessory does not overlap the warning text, and the deepest part is placed from the midway position P2. In the section B (P2-P1 section) and the section C (P1-P2 section) on the P1 side, there is a relationship in which the movable body accessory overlaps the warning text.

  Therefore, when the movable body accessory is located in the section of the first stroke or the fourth stroke, or when the movable body accessory is located in the section A or D between the combined position pg and the intermediate position P2. When an error other than a movable body accessory error occurs, if the movable body accessory is moved back from the “current position” of the movable body accessory to the “original position p0”, the movable body accessory is a section. Since the movable body accessory does not go to B and C, that is, the movable body accessory does not move and overlap the display area of the warning text, the warning text is not covered by the movable body accessory.

  Further, when the movable body accessory is located between the middle position p2 and the action position P1 in the middle of the second stroke, or between the middle position p2 and the action position P1 in the middle of the third stroke, that is, movable. When the body accessory is in a position where it overlaps the warning text display area and an error other than the movable body accessory error occurs, the movable body accessory is moved from its current position to the original position P0. The movement control for pulling back is performed, or the movement control for temporarily moving from the current position to the working position P1 and then pulling back to the original position P0 is performed. In this way, at the time when the movable body accessory moves to at least the sections A and D or the sections of the first stroke and the fourth stroke, the movable body accessory has left the display area of the warning text. From this point on, the warning text will not be covered with the movable object.

  In the following, the winning prize incorrect prize error is the following seven timings: (0) before section A, (1) during section A, (2) during section B, (3) during operation position, (4) section C In the middle, (5) during the section D, (6) the case that occurs before the symbol variation display game will be described.

(0). In the case where an error occurs before the movement of the section A of the movable body accessory When the illegal winning prize error occurs in the flower-shaped accessory 90 before the operation of the section A, that is, when the position is in the merged position pg in FIG. If the warning text E of the big prize opening illegal prize error is displayed, the operation pattern (direction scenario) of the flower-shaped accessory 90 is changed as follows.

  As the operation pattern, the operation content (production content) for executing the sections A, B, C, and D in order before the change is changed, and the operation content with the operation content for executing the section D next to the section A after the change is changed. Change to a pattern. In other words, after moving the flower-shaped accessory 90 from the merged position pg to the midway position p2, the operation content is changed to return from the midway position p2 to the merged position pg. As a result, the flower-shaped accessory 90 does not move beyond the midway position p2, so that the warning sentence E for the big prize opening illegal winning error is not hidden by the flower-shaped accessory 90. In this case, the changed operation pattern may be an operation content in which the operation in the section A is not performed and the staying at the merged position pg is continued.

(1) In the case where an error occurs while the movable object is operating in the section A In the case where an illegal prize winning error occurs while the flower-shaped object 90 is operating in the section A, that is, the origin position in FIG. When the flower-shaped character 90 is moving from p0 toward the middle position p2, and the warning text E of the big prize mouth illegal winning error is displayed, the operation pattern (direction scenario) of the flower-shaped character 90 is as follows. It is changed as follows. The operation pattern before the change continues to execute the operation of the section A, and when the operation of the section A is finished, the operation contents (effect contents) for sequentially executing the operations of the sections B to D are changed. As an operation pattern, the operation content of the section A is continued to be executed, and when the operation of the section A is finished, the operation of the section D is executed next. In other words, after moving the flower-shaped accessory 90 from the merged position pg to the midway position p2, the operation content is changed to return from the midway position p2 to the merged position pg. As a result, the flower-shaped accessory 90 does not move beyond the midway position p2, so that the warning sentence E for the big prize opening illegal winning error is not hidden by the flower-shaped accessory 90. In this case, the operation content after the change may be changed to an operation content in which the operation in the section A is interrupted and returned from the interrupted position to the combined position pg.

(2) When an error occurs while the movable object is operating in the section B When an illegal prize winning error is generated while the flower-shaped object 90 is operating in the section B, that is, in the middle position of FIG. If the warning character E is displayed when the flower-shaped character 90 moves from p2 to the action position p1 and the big prize opening illegal winning error warning E is displayed, the operation pattern (direction scenario) of the flower-shaped character 90 is as follows. It is changed as follows.

  When the operation pattern before the change is followed, the operation of the section B is continuously executed as it is, and when the operation of the section B is finished, the operation contents (effect contents) are sequentially executed. As an operation pattern after the change, the operation content of the section B is interrupted in the middle, and the operation content of the section D is executed by returning from the interrupted position to the intermediate position p2. In other words, after the flower-shaped accessory 90 is immediately returned to the midway position p2, it is changed to the operation content of returning from the midway position p2 to the combined position pg. Since the flower-shaped accessory 90 moves beyond the middle position p2, a situation occurs in which the warning sentence E is hidden by the flower-shaped accessory 90, but since it is returned from the middle of the section B, the hidden time Can be shortened. At this time, when returning to the middle position p2, a warning sentence is made by returning the flower-shaped accessory 90 at a speed higher than the normal speed of moving in the section B or the section C or as fast as possible. The time for E to be hidden can be further shortened.

(3) When an error occurs while the movable body accessory is stopped at the action position p1 When an illegal prize opening error occurs while the flower-shaped accessory 90 is operating in the section X, that is, the operation of FIG. If the warning sentence E of the big prize opening illegal prize error is displayed while the flower-shaped handpiece 90 stays at the position p1, the operation pattern (direction scenario) of the flower-shaped handwork 90 is changed as follows. Is done. As in (2) above, as the changed operation pattern, the operation in the section X is interrupted in the middle, and the flower-shaped accessory 90 is immediately returned to the intermediate position p2, and then returned from the intermediate position p2 to the merged position pg. The operation content is as follows. As a result, similar to the above (2), the time during which the warning sentence E is hidden by the flower-shaped accessory 90 can be shortened, and the warning sentence 90 is returned at the fastest possible speed. The time for E to be hidden can be further shortened.

(4) In the case where an error occurs during the movement of the section C of the movable body accessory When an illegal prize winning error occurs during the operation of the section C of the flower-shaped accessory 90, that is, the action position p1 in FIG. If the warning character E is displayed for the illegal prize winning error when the flower-shaped handpiece 90 is moving toward the middle position p2, the operation pattern (direction scenario) of the flower-type handwork 90 is as follows. It is changed as follows. As an operation pattern after the change, the operation in the section C is interrupted in the middle, and the flower-shaped accessory 90 is immediately returned to the intermediate position p2 faster than the speed during the normal operation in the section C, and then merged from the intermediate position p2. The operation content is to return to the position pg. Thereby, similarly to the above (2), the time for which the warning sentence E is hidden by the flower-shaped accessory 90 can be shortened, and the time for which the warning sentence E is hidden can be further reduced. However, if the flower-shaped accessory 90 cannot be changed to a high speed, the operations in the sections C and D may continue to be executed without changing the operation pattern.

(5) When an error occurs during the movement of the movable body accessory in the section D When the flower winning combination 90 is in the operation of the section D, an incorrect prize winning error occurs, that is, in the middle position p2 in FIG. If the warning character E is displayed for the illegal winning prize error when the flower-shaped character 90 is moving from the position to the merged position pg, the operation pattern (direction scenario) of the flower-shaped character 90 is changed. Not. The reason for the change is that the flower-shaped handpiece 90 does not move beyond the position p2 after the occurrence of an illegal winning prize error, so the warning sentence E for the big winning mouth illegal winning error is hidden by the flower-shaped handpiece 90. That's because it will disappear. However, after that (after the occurrence of the big prize opening illegal prize error), another second action pattern is set in which the movable body accessory executes the actions in the sections A to D during the display of the symbol variation. In the same manner as in the case of (0), it is necessary to change the operation pattern to the operation content of executing the operation of the section D next to the operation of the section A. This is because when the next second operation pattern is executed, there is still a possibility that the big prize opening illegal prize error may remain without being solved. This change of the second operation pattern is also applied to the cases (0) to (4).

(6) When an error occurs before the symbol variation display game (when the symbol variation display game is started while the error occurs)
In addition to the case where the big prize opening illegal prize error occurs after the symbol variation display game is started (the above (1) to (5)), it may occur before the symbol variation display game is started.

  In such a case, the problem is that when the flower-shaped actor 90 moves according to the operation pattern, the big prize opening illegal prize error still remains, that is, a warning message is displayed on the screen. This is a case where the moving object is moved and the warning text is covered.

  At the start of the symbol variation display game, the contents of the effects of all effects such as the decorative pattern and the notice effect are determined, and the contents of the movable object are determined corresponding to the notice effect, etc. The action pattern must also be determined at the start of the symbol variation display game. Therefore, also in this case, the determination of the motion pattern of the flower-shaped accessory 90 is performed in the same manner as in the case (0) above, at the start of the symbol variation display game, “the motion in the section D next to the motion in the section A”. Is determined to be performed.

  As described above, if an error occurs during the symbol variation display game, the movement route of the movable object will be shortened or the same route for the movement of the movable object that will hide the warning text By moving the at a high speed, it is possible to reduce the time during which the movable body accessory hides the warning text. This avoids a situation in which the movable object conceals the warning text, so that it is easy for the player and the pachinko hall clerk to recognize what kind of error is currently occurring.

  Also, even if an error has occurred before the symbol variation display game is started, the moving range of the movable object is limited to a range where the warning text is not hidden, so the warning text may not be hidden. it can. Thereby, the player or the pachinko hall clerk can surely recognize what kind of error is currently occurring.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the control for changing the operation pattern of the movable body accessory to force the movable body accessory to return is performed at a higher order of error notification priority such as a magnetic sensor error or a door opening error ( For example, it may be executed only for errors No. 1 to No. 12) and may not be applied to other ball clogging errors (errors that allow the game to continue). The reason for this is that in the case of an error lower in the error notification priority (No. 13 or later), even if the game can be continued, if the action of the movable object performed in accordance with the notice effect is stopped, the player's game This is because there is a risk of a decline in interest.

  In the above description, the flower-shaped accessory 90 that may hide the warning message displayed on the screen has been described as an example. However, the present embodiment is limited to only the movable object that may hide the warning message. Instead, other clock-type objects 80, flower-type objects 90, rotating lamps 62, movable bodies 73, and frame effect buttons 13 may be included. Specifically, the operation pattern (production scenario) of those movable objects may be changed to operation contents (production contents) forcibly returning to the origin position or stopping at the origin position. . In general, the movable body accessory sometimes stays at a special position covering the liquid crystal display device 36 instead of staying at the origin position during the probability change or time reduction. In such a case, if an error having a higher error notification priority (for example, No. 1 to 12) occurs, the movable body accessory may be returned from the special position to the origin position while the error is being notified. Good. Further, the movable body accessory itself has an error (the movable body accessory starts to move from the first position (for example, the original position), and the movable body accessory reaches the second position (for example, the operation position) within a predetermined time. However, if the second position detection switch does not turn on even after a lapse of a predetermined time), the accessory may not move. In such a case, it is possible to quickly recognize that an error has occurred by performing an operation different from that of a normal movable body accessory.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, when an error occurs repeatedly, the error notification with the higher error notification priority order is performed using the masking action based on the magnitude relationship of the power of the notification effect (fourth embodiment). Will be described with reference to FIG. The difference from the first embodiment lies in whether or not an error notification sound effect or light effect is executed by an error having a high error notification priority. In the first embodiment, the sound effect and the light effect execute one error notification having the highest error notification priority, whereas in the present embodiment, the sound effect and / or the light effect are generated in a plurality. The error notification is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 42, when a movable body accessory error having a low error notification priority and a door opening error having a high error notification priority are duplicated, a mask opening action is used to notify the door opening error. The power of the message voice “The door is open” as the production is increased, and the warning sound “P˜” as the movable object error notification production is reduced.

  Similarly, the light effect is executed by increasing the power of the red blinking brightness as the door opening error notification effect and decreasing the power of the white blinking brightness as the movable object error notification effect.

  As described above, even when an error occurs repeatedly as in the first embodiment, error notification can be appropriately performed while making a difference in power to be generated in the error notification effect. Also, by making the error notification power of the error with the higher error notification priority higher than the error notification power of the error with the lower error notification priority, the higher error can be made conspicuous, This makes it possible to recognize from a visual and auditory point of view that the severity of pachinko machines is relatively high.

  In addition, when three or more different types of errors occur, the power of the sound production and the light production may be differentiated in descending order of the error notification priority, and the top two types (or three types) with the highest error notification priority. It is possible to make a difference in the power of production by limiting only to the error. Even in such a case, an error having a higher error notification priority can be made conspicuous, and a plurality of types of errors can be generated from the viewpoint of vision and hearing.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, regarding the image display effect for error, the display size and the display color are not particularly taken into consideration when displaying the warning text on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. In consideration of this, the present invention adopts a display mode in which the display size and display color of the warning text are changed based on the error notification priority. This will be described in detail below.

(Modification 1: Display size and color of warning text based on error notification priority)
For example, the display mode of the error image display effect in the first modification is a display mode in which the display size of the warning text is changed based on the error notification priority order. Specifically, “magnetic sensor error (rank: 7)”, “door open error (rank: 12)”, and “ball clogging error (rank: 22)” occur in descending order of error notification priority. Assuming that In this case, a warning message “Error 15 Magnetic sensor error” is displayed with the largest character size (for example, about 2 cm), and a warning message “Error 01 door is open” is displayed with a medium character size (for example, 1 .5 cm) and a warning message “please remove the sphere” is displayed in the smallest character size (for example, about 1 cm). In this way, warning messages for errors are displayed in different sizes based on the error notification priority, so when multiple errors are displayed, it becomes easier for players and pachinko hall clerk to recognize the error type, and the error Can be dealt with immediately. Moreover, since the error notification priority is set assuming the severity of damage to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game progress, it is possible to reduce the serious damage by dealing with the order of the displayed character size. Can do.

  Further, not only the display size of the warning text corresponding to the error but also the display color may be similarly changed based on the error notification priority. Specifically, in the same manner as described above, a case is assumed in which “magnetic sensor error”, “door opening error”, and “ball clogging error” are generated in descending order of error notification priority. In this case, the warning message “Error 15 Magnetic sensor error” is displayed in red, the warning message “Error 01 Door is open” is displayed in blue, and the warning message “Please remove the sphere” is displayed in white. indicate. In this way, the warning text for the error is displayed in different display colors based on the error notification priority, so when multiple errors are displayed, it becomes easier for the player or pachinko hall clerk to recognize the error type, and the error Can be dealt with immediately. In addition, since the error notification priority is set assuming the severity of damage to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game progress, it is possible to reduce enormous damage by dealing with the displayed display colors in order. .

  In addition, the display mode of the warning text is not limited to the display size and display color described above. The font of the text, the transparency of the text, the thickness of the text, the presence or absence of an underline, the presence or absence of a frame, the background color of the warning text (background image) ), A flashing display of a warning sentence, and the like may be a display mode that varies based on the error notification priority. Further, a combination of these display modes may be used to display a warning text for an error when a single occurrence or duplication occurs.

(Modification 2: Display order of warning texts based on error notification priority)
In the first modification, the display mode in which the display size or display color of the warning text is changed based on the error notification priority order is adopted. The second modification is a display mode in which the display order of a plurality of warning sentences is switched based on the error notification priority order.

  For example, in the display mode of the error image display effect of the second modification, the warning texts corresponding to the errors having the highest error notification priority are displayed in order from the top. Specifically, “magnetic sensor error (rank: 7)”, “door open error (rank: 12)”, and “ball clogging error (rank: 22)” occur in descending order of error notification priority. Assuming that In this case, warning messages such as “Error 15 Magnetic sensor error”, “Error 01 Door is open”, and “Please remove the ball” are displayed in order from the top of the screen.

  Since warning sentences for errors are displayed in order based on the error notification priority in this way, when multiple errors are displayed, it becomes easier for a player or pachinko hall clerk to recognize the error type, and for that error You can deal with it as soon as possible. Moreover, since the error notification priority is set on the assumption of the severity of damage to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game progress, it is possible to reduce enormous damage by dealing with the displayed order.

  In the present invention, warning texts corresponding to all errors are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. However, for example, seven or more different types of errors are duplicated, and warning texts for all errors are displayed on the screen. When the error message cannot be displayed, a predetermined number (for example, about five) of warning sentences may be displayed in order from the error having the highest error notification priority. When the displayed error is resolved, the warning text of the error to be canceled is deleted, and the warning text of the error notification priority higher in order from the remaining errors that are not displayed Good. As a result, it is possible to reduce enormous damage by dealing with the displayed order.

(Modification 3: Display position of warning text and decorative symbol variation display effect and reach effect)
In the first and second modifications, the example in which the display position of the warning text is not particularly considered has been described. In the third modification, the display position of the warning text is set based on the error notification priority order and the effect being executed. This is an embodiment. This will be described below.

  For example, in the display mode of the error image display effect of the third modification, the warning message for the error is displayed based on the error notification priority in consideration of the effect currently being executed, that is, the decorative symbol variation display effect and the reach effect. The position is set.

  If an error notification priority “high prize opening illegal prize error” or “magnetic sensor error” has occurred, “Error 19 Grand prize prize winning” is displayed at the middle position of the screen so as to cover the decorative design and reach production. "Please call an abnormal staff" or "Error 15 Magnetic sensor error" is displayed. On the other hand, if a low error notification priority “out of supply error” or “ball clogging error” has occurred, do not cover the decorative pattern or interfere with reach production. , “Error 02 Insufficient balls, please call a clerk” or “Please remove the ball” warning message is displayed.

  As a result, for errors with a high error notification priority, a warning message for the error is displayed in a state where it is covered with decorative symbols and reach production that the player pays attention to, indicating that a serious abnormality has occurred in the progress of the game The player can be immediately recognized. In addition, for an error with a low error notification priority, the warning text is displayed so as not to interfere with the decorative symbols and reach production, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest for the player.

  Further, the display position of the warning text for the error is displayed with a certain space (for example, about 3 to 5 characters) from the screen end (upper end, lower end, left end, right end) of the liquid crystal display device 36. The reason why the warning text is displayed in this way is to prevent the warning text from being hidden by the movable body accessory when the movable body accessory operates. In addition, since the design of the board surface of the pachinko gaming machine is changed for each model (each type), the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is always covered at the end of the screen depending on the arrangement position of the movable body accessory, A part of the screen may be hidden when the accessory moves in the vicinity of the origin position. In order to cope with this, it is difficult to adjust the display position of the warning text for each pachinko machine, so a certain amount of space from the screen end (upper end, lower end, left end, right end) of the liquid crystal display device 36 in advance. By providing the warning text (for example, about 3 to 5 characters), the compatibility of the pachinko gaming machine can be improved.

  In addition, when a plurality of warning texts are displayed, the warning text display positions for the errors are displayed by aligning the first characters of the warning text. However, the display position is not limited to the normal display mode in which a plurality of warning texts are arranged and displayed, and the display position may be changed based on the error notification priority order. For example, a warning text for an error having a high error notification priority can be displayed at the center of the screen (upper, middle, or lower, preferably middle). On the other hand, warning texts for errors with low error notification priority can be displayed at various positions such as the left and right edges of the screen, and in consideration of the decorative design and reach production, do not suffer from other productions. Can be displayed. As a result, for errors with a high error notification priority, a warning message for the error is displayed at the center position of the screen that the player pays attention to, and the player is immediately notified that a serious abnormality has occurred in the progress of the game. Can be recognized. Further, for errors with low error notification priority, the warning text is displayed so as not to interfere with other effects, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest for the player.

  In addition, in the display mode of the modified example 3, the decorative symbol is displayed with a warning text, or the decorative symbol is displayed without being covered on the upper or lower portion of the decorative symbol. A high error may be displayed by changing the size of the decorative symbol so that it does not cover the displayed warning text. For example, during super reach, the size of the decorative symbol is changed to a smaller size, and the display position of the decorative symbol is displayed at the edge of the screen. In order to make the image stand out, the decorative pattern may be displayed small on the screen edge. In this case, when the error command is received (when a sub error occurs), the effect control unit 24 not only creates and sets a scenario for the screen display effect for error, but also displays the effect scenario related to the decorative design in a small size at the screen end. A process of changing and setting the content production scenario is executed. When the error is canceled, the effect control unit 24 not only creates and sets a scenario for ending the error image display effect, but also executes a process of changing and setting the effect scenario related to the decorative design to the effect scenario of the normal display effect content. To do.

(Warning text display position and hold display areas 76 and 77)
Here, regarding the hold display areas 76 and 77 in which the operation hold ball is displayed, the warning text for the error is not displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77. Thereby, even if the image display effect for error is executed, the operation holding balls displayed in the holding display areas 76 and 77 are not hidden, and the player can check the number of the operation holding balls currently displayed. it can. However, when an error having a high error notification priority occurs, the operation hold ball in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is set to non-display. In this case, when the error command is received (when a sub error occurs), the effect control unit 24 not only creates and sets a scenario for the screen display effect for error, but also hides the effect scenario related to the operation holding ball. A process of changing and setting the production scenario is executed. In addition, when an effect scenario such as a pre-reading notice effect related to the operation holding ball is set, the effect control unit 24 executes a process of changing and setting the content not to execute the pre-reading notice effect for the effect scenario. Then, at the time of error cancellation, the effect control unit 24 not only creates and sets a scenario for ending the error image display effect, but also changes and sets the effect scenario related to the operation holding ball to the effect scenario of the normal display effect content. Execute.

(Warning text display position and 4th symbol display area)
In general, the fourth symbol (the fourth symbol for the special symbol 1, the fourth symbol for the special symbol 2) is displayed in synchronism with the variation display of the special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). Four symbol areas are provided in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. This 4th symbol is a symbol that can always be visually recognized because it is always displayed with a constant motion while the special symbol is changing, and it will not disappear from the screen or be shielded by a shield (such as an accessory). is there. Therefore, the error image display effect is executed so as not to cover the fourth symbol area where the fourth symbol is displayed.

(Variation 4: About the display position of the warning text and the effect during the big hit)
In the third modification, the display mode in which the display position of the warning text is set based on the error notification priority order and the effects other than the big hit is described, but in the fourth modification, the display position of the warning text is set to the error notification priority order and The display mode is set based on the performance during the big hit. This will be described below.

  For example, in the display mode of the image display effect for error of the modification 4, the display position of the warning text for the error is set based on the error notification priority order in consideration of the effect executed during the big hit. For example, the effect during the big hit is, for example, a round number effect that displays the current number of rounds, an award winning ball number effect that displays the number of winning balls won during the big hit, and a number of balls that display the number of entered balls during the round. There are an effect, an over-winning effect related to over-winning, a determination effect for determining whether or not to shift to a probable change state after the end of the big hit game.

  In this modified example, in the case of a “big prize opening illegal prize error” or “magnetic sensor error” with a high error notification priority, the “error 19 big prize mouth prize abnormality clerk” Please call me "or" Error 15 Magnetic sensor error ". On the other hand, in the case of a “replenishment error” or “ball clogging error” with a low error notification priority, the round effect, winning prize effect, winning number effect, over winning effect, or judgment effect In the upper and lower part of the screen, the warning message “Error 02 Calling a clerk” or “Pull out the ball” is displayed small at the top and bottom of the screen.

  In order to display the warning text in this way, when the production control unit 24 receives an error command or determines the occurrence of a sub-error, in order to create and set an error image display production scenario, first, A process of checking the error notification priority order and determining whether or not a big hit is being made is performed. If it is determined that a big hit is made, the production control unit 24 creates an production scenario with a content that displays a warning text in the center of the screen if the error notification priority is higher than a predetermined order (for example, No. 13). On the other hand, if the error notification priority order is equal to or lower than the predetermined order, processing for creating and setting an effect scenario that displays a warning text at a position that does not interfere with the effect during the big hit such as the lower part of the screen is performed.

  As a result, for errors with a high error notification priority, a warning message for the error is displayed in a state where the player is paying attention to the effect of the big hit that the player pays attention to, and it is immediately confirmed that a serious abnormality has occurred in the progress of the game. Can be recognized by the player. Further, for errors with low error notification priority, the warning text is displayed so as not to interfere with the performance during the big hit, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest for the player.

(Modification 5: Display position of warning text of main error and sub error)
In the modified examples 1 to 4, no special consideration is given to whether the warning text is for the main error or the sub error. In view of this, the fifth modification is a display mode in which the display position of the warning text is set based on whether it is a main error or a sub error. This will be described below.

  For example, in the display mode of the image display effect for error of the modified example 5, the main error that the main control unit 20 is the determination subject is displayed at the upper position of the screen, and the sub error that the effect control unit 24 is the determination subject is the lower part of the screen. It is a mode to display at the position. Thus, by separating the display positions of the main error and the sub error, it is possible to make it easier for the player and the pachinko hall clerk to recognize the error type.

(About the display text when the power is turned on)
Here, although it is not a warning text for an error, a display text such as “POWER ON” or “Please wait” displayed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on and started up is displayed at the middle position of the screen. It has become. In addition, a display sentence such as “Recovered from a power failure, please resume the game” displayed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from a power failure is displayed at the middle position of the screen. In order to distinguish between these display texts and warning texts for errors, the display texts can be distinguished from each other by displaying the head characters shifted from the warning text.

(Modification 6: Warning message display using a plurality of liquid crystal display devices)
In the first to fifth modifications, an example in which a warning text is displayed on one liquid crystal display device has been described. However, the sixth modification has a display mode in which a warning text is displayed using a plurality of liquid crystal display devices. . This will be described below.

  Although one liquid crystal display device 36 is used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, a plurality of liquid crystal display devices can be used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case of using a plurality of liquid crystal display devices, a main liquid crystal display device that displays a main effect that the player always wants to pay attention to, such as a decorative display variation display effect and a reach effect, and a conversation effect and operation A case is assumed in which a distinction is made between sub-liquid crystal display devices that display sub-effects that the player wants the player to pay attention to temporarily, such as effects related to the holding ball.

  Thus, in a pachinko machine using two main liquid crystal display devices and a sub liquid crystal display device, when warning messages for a plurality of errors are displayed, the main liquid crystal display device displays warning messages for all the errors that have occurred. However, the sub liquid crystal display device may display only the warning text of the error having the highest error notification priority. In addition, the main liquid crystal display device displays an error with an error notification priority higher than a predetermined order (for example, No. 13), and the sub liquid crystal display device has an error notification priority with a predetermined order (for example, 13). Error) may be displayed. Thus, by properly using the liquid crystal display device that displays an error, it is possible to emphasize and report an error having a high error notification priority.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the large winning opening having the same function is described in which one of the large winning openings is controlled to open and close according to the hit type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can also be applied to the following pachinko gaming machine with a probability variation determination device (hereinafter abbreviated as a gaming machine with a probability variation determination device). This will be described below.

(About game machines with a probability variation determination device)
A gaming machine with a probability variation determination device allows a player to enter a certain probability state by passing through a specific area (V zone) formed in a special prize opening (V attacker) during a big hit game. (Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-13586: paragraphs 0067 and 0074, FIG. 11)). The game balls won in the special prize winning opening (V attacker) are distributed by a sorting device provided in the special prize winning opening and detected by a specific area detection switch provided in a specific area (V zone), Alternatively, it is detected by a non-specific area detection switch provided in the non-specific area, and finally detected by a discharge detection switch and discharged from the special prize winning opening. When a detection signal from the specific area detection switch is input to the main control unit 20, the main control unit 20 gives a probability change state after the big hit game ends. In this sorter distribution control, a specific area is opened for a long time only during a specific round in a specific jackpot game (for example, it is opened for about 10 seconds), and the specific area is closed during other rounds (non-specific) The area is controlled to be released) or to be opened for a short time (for example, about 0.1 second). The specific jackpot is a jackpot that allows a special jackpot to be opened for a long time during the jackpot game, and can be granted a right to shift to a promiscuous state after the jackpot. On the other hand, a big hit that is not a specific big hit (ordinary big hit) is a big hit that does not open the special big prize winning opening for a long time during the big hit game, and almost never shifts to a probable state after the big hit (0%) Rather, there is a slight chance of migrating).

  Under such a configuration, in order to illegally acquire the probability variation state, it is conceivable that the detection signal is output by malfunctioning a fraudulent act or a specific area detection switch. For example, by forcibly operating the sorting device (moving the sorting device to open a specific area using a cell plate or wire) and illegally passing a game ball to the specific area (so-called sergot, wire goto) In other words, the game ball is illegally passed to a specific area using a magnet (so-called magnet goto), or the specific area detection switch is erroneously operated using a radio wave generator (so-called radio goto). If such a goto action is performed, it eventually leads to illegally acquiring a large number of prize balls, and therefore error types (details will be described later) for these goto actions are preferentially required for error notification. The

(Specific errors and error notifications in gaming machines with a probability variation determination device)
Next, details of errors belonging to the main error and the sub error in the gaming machine with a probability variation determination device will be described with reference to the table of FIG. The error notification priority order of FIG. 34 is not the priority order of error commands transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, as in the first embodiment, but the main control unit 20 is the determination subject. This is a priority order for errors including a main error and a sub-error for which the effect control unit 24 is a determination subject. As shown in FIG. 34, the error notification priority numbers are skipped because the error notification priority order for errors occurring in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is excluded.

(1) Magnetic sensor error 2 (error notification priority 3)
The magnetic sensor error 2 is an error for which an error notification is issued when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor for sorting apparatus, and is one of main errors. The magnetic sensor for the sorting device is provided at a position where the magnetism around the sorting device and the sorting device can be detected in order to detect illegal passing of the game ball to the particular region in the special prize winning opening by the “magnet goto”. It is a sensor. Moreover, the magnetic sensor for distribution apparatus may be used as the magnetic sensor, or may be newly provided separately from the magnetic sensor. This magnetic sensor error 2 is an error provided to prevent a “magnet gotten” action during a big hit. If a magnetic abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor for the sorting device during a big hit, this is reported as an error. To do. Specifically, when the magnetic sensor for the sorting device detects a magnetic abnormality for 1 second during the big hit, this magnetic sensor error 2 is reported and reported as an error. If the magnetic sensor for the sorting apparatus detects abnormal magnetism except during the big hit, the magnetic sensor error (error notification priority order 7) is generated, and this is notified as an error.

  When the magnetic sensor error 2 occurs, the magnetic sensor error 2 command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as the main error command corresponding to the magnetic sensor error 2 from the main control unit 20 that monitors the magnetic sensor for the sorting device. The When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts error notification corresponding to the magnetic sensor error 2. This error notification is continuously performed until the power is turned off (the error cancel command is not transmitted). The main power source of the gaming machine with a probability variation determination device is operated by a pachinko hall clerk, and when the power is cut off by the pachinko hall clerk, the magnetic sensor error 2 is canceled (about radio sensor error 2 described later) The same). In this case, the big hit game is started again after the power is restored.

(Error notification mode of magnetic sensor error 2)
The error notification based on the magnetic sensor error 2 is performed by a combination of the light effect, the sound effect, and the image display effect for the error. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 45 blinks red at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms. The sound effect is performed in such a manner that a magnetic sensor error sound is emitted from the speaker 46. Further, the image display effect is performed in such a manner that a warning message “Error 18 Magnetic sensor error 2 Please call a staff member” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. The error information is transmitted to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21.

(2) Radio wave sensor error 2 (error notification priority 4)
The radio wave sensor error 2 is an error in which an error notification is issued when an abnormality is detected by the radio wave sensor for the sorting apparatus, and is one of main errors. The radio wave sensor for the sorting device is a sensor provided at a position where an illegal radio wave around the specific area can be detected in order to detect a malfunction of the specific area detection switch in the special prize winning opening due to the “radio wave”. In addition, the radio wave sensor for the sorting apparatus may be used as the radio wave sensor or may be newly provided separately from the radio wave sensor. This radio wave sensor error 2 is an error that is provided to prevent a “radio wave” action during a big hit. If an illegal radio wave is detected by a radio wave sensor for a sorting device during a big hit, this is reported as an error. To do. More specifically, when the radio wave sensor for the sorting device detects an illegal radio wave during a big hit, this radio wave sensor error 2 is reported and this is reported as an error. When the sorting device radio wave sensor detects an illegal radio wave except during the big hit, it reports that the radio wave sensor error (error notification priority 8) has occurred, as an error.

  When the radio wave sensor error 2 occurs, the radio wave sensor error 2 command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as a main error command corresponding to the radio wave sensor error 2 from the main control unit 20 that monitors the radio wave sensor for the sorting device. The When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts error notification corresponding to the radio wave sensor error 2. This error notification is continuously performed until the power is turned off (the error cancel command is not transmitted). The main power supply of the gaming machine with a probability variation determination device is operated by a pachinko hall clerk, and when the power is cut off by the pachinko hall clerk, the radio wave sensor error 2 is canceled. In this case, the big hit game is started again after the power is restored.

(Error notification mode of radio wave sensor error 2)
The error notification based on the radio wave sensor error 2 is performed by a combination of the light effect, the sound effect, and the image display effect for the error. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 45 blinks red at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms. The sound effect is performed in such a manner that a radio wave sensor error sound is emitted from the speaker 46. Further, the image display effect is performed in such a manner that a warning message “Error 17 radio wave sensor error 2 Please call a staff member” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. The error information is transmitted to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21.

(3) Probability change area sensor error 1 (error notification priority 5)
Probability change area sensor error 1 is an error that is issued when an abnormality is detected by the specific area detection switch when a special game is not being played (when the special electric accessory is not in operation). one of. This probability variation area sensor error 1 is reported as an error when a specific area detection switch malfunctions due to a radio wave transmitter or the like in order to prevent a “radio wave” action when not hitting a game. In addition, in order to prevent `` Selgoto '' and `` Wire Goto '' acts, when a game ball passes through a specific area in the special prize winning opening and the specific area detection switch is activated when not playing a game, This is reported as an error.

  When the probability variation region sensor error 1 occurs, the probability variation region sensor error 1 command is transmitted to the effect control portion 24 as the main error command corresponding to the probability variation region sensor error 1 from the main control unit 20 that monitors the specific region detection switch. Is done. On the side of the effect control unit 24, when this command is received, error notification corresponding to the probability variation region sensor error 1 is started. This error notification is performed until an error cancellation command is received by the effect control unit 24, and the error cancellation command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 30 seconds after the abnormality detection by the specific area detection switch is lost. It has become. The error notification is terminated after 30 seconds in this way, even after the go-to action (“radio wave goto”, “selgoto”, “wire goto”, etc.) is finished, the notification of the probability variation area sensor error 1 is continued. This is to make the pachinko hall clerk who has discovered the error notification recognized that the goto action was being executed. Accordingly, the eyes of the pachinko hall clerk are strict and it is difficult to execute various goto acts.

(Error notification mode of probability variation area sensor error 1)
Error notification based on the probability variation area sensor error 1 is performed by a combination of the light effect and the sound effect for the error. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 45 blinks red at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms. The sound effect is performed in such a manner that an error sound of probability variation area sensor error 1 is emitted from the speaker 46. On the other hand, the image display effect is not performed. The error information is transmitted to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21.

  Here, the reason for not performing the image display effect is as follows. In order to activate the specific area detection switch when not hitting the game, in order to illegally pass the game ball to the specific area in the special prize winning opening, the distribution device that first closed the specific area is illegally It is necessary to open a specific area by an operation (an illegal act by “selgoto”, “wire goto”, etc.). In other words, if the sorting device is illegally operated when the winning game is not being played, an error notification based on the following sorting device error 1 is performed prior to the probability variation area sensor error 1. Therefore, it can be said that the sorting apparatus error 1 and the probability variation area sensor error 1 are closely related errors (errors having an organic relation). Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the image display effect for error, an image display effect for informing the preceding sorting device error 1 is performed regardless of the error notification priority order, and the error due to the image display effect for the probability variation area sensor error 1 is intentionally performed. Error notification is performed only by sound production and light production without notification. When errors with organic relevance occur in this way, only error image display effects for errors that may occur earlier in time series are performed, and errors for all errors are targeted. By not performing the image display effect for the image, it is possible to prevent the information amount due to the image display from increasing darkly, to easily check the error notification, and to contribute to the reduction of the control burden. . As for the probability variation area sensor error 1, since error information is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the hall computer HC, there is no particular problem even if no error image display effect is provided.

(4) Sorting device error 1 (error notification priority 6)
The sorter error 1 is detected when an abnormality is detected by the sorter position detection sensor disposed in the sorter when the big hit game is not being played (when the condition unit is not activated) This is an error for which an error notification is issued when the reference position is not allocated to a specific area, and is one of sub-errors. The sorter error 1 is a position state of the sorter output from the sorter position detection sensor to the effect control unit 24 when the big hit game is not being performed in order to prevent the “selgot” or “wire goto” action. Is indicated as an error, the signal indicating that is not the reference position. Specifically, when it is not during the big hit game, the distribution device position detection sensor detects that the distribution device has been displaced to a position that opens the probability variation area for about 0.2 seconds. If device error 1 has occurred, this is reported as an error. In addition, when it is not during the big hit game, the distribution device position detection sensor detects that the distribution device is displaced about 3 times to the position where the probability variation area is opened within 3 seconds. If device error 1 has occurred, this is reported as an error. It is to be noted that the sorting device operates only during the test operation when the power is turned on except during the winning game. Therefore, if an error notification of the sorting device error 1 is made at a timing other than the test operation, it is considered that the error is due to fraud.

  When the sorting device error 1 occurs, the production control unit 24 notifies the error corresponding to the sorting device error 1 based on the fact that a signal indicating the abnormality is output from the sorting device position detection sensor to the production control unit 24. To start. This error notification is continued until the power is turned off. The main power supply of the gaming machine with a probability variation determination device is operated by a pachinko hall clerk, and when the power is cut off by the pachinko hall clerk, the sorting device error 1 is canceled.

(Error notification mode of sorting device error 1)
The error notification based on the sorting device error 1 is performed by a combination of the light effect, the sound effect, and the image display effect for the error. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 45 blinks red at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms. The sound effect is performed in such a manner that the error sound of the sorting device error 1 is emitted from the speaker 46. Further, the image display effect is performed in such a manner that a warning message “Please call an error 40 error apperer” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36.

(5) Discharge error (error notification priority 11)
The illegal emission error is a total of the number of times that the specific area detection switch and the non-specific area detection switch detect the ON state and the number that the discharge detection switch detects the ON state during the big hit game, for example, 2 This is an error for which an error notification is issued when different for over a second), and is one of main errors. For example, an illegal discharge error is an error provided to prevent an illegal benefit due to clogging of a ball at a special prize opening, and a detection switch in the special prize opening has a signal indicating that the number of balls entered and discharged are different. Is continuously output as an error. Since the illegal discharge error is often caused by a clogged ball inside the special prize winning opening, the cause is basically solved by a pachinko hall clerk.

  When an illegal discharge error occurs, an abnormal discharge error command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24 as a main error command corresponding to the abnormal discharge error. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts an error notification corresponding to an illegal discharge error. This error notification is performed until an error cancel command is received by the effect control unit 24, and the error cancel command includes the total number of detected ON states of the specific area detection switch and the non-specific area detection switch, and discharge. When the number of detection switches detected to be ON is the same (the number of balls entered into the special prize winning opening = the number of discharges from the special prize winning opening), it is transmitted from the main control unit 20. Yes. Here, when this discharge fraud error occurs during the big hit game, the process does not proceed to the next round until the error cancel command is transmitted.

(Error notification mode for incorrect discharge error)
The error notification based on the illegal discharge error is performed by a combination of the light effect, the sound effect, and the image display effect for the error. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 45 blinks red at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms. The sound effect is performed in such a manner that a discharge error error sound is emitted from the speaker 46. In addition, the image display effect is performed in such a manner that a warning message “Please call an error 20 big prize exit illegal error clerk” is displayed on the liquid crystal display of the liquid crystal display device 36. The error information is transmitted to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21.

(6) Distributor error 2 (error notification priority 23)
The sorter error 2 is for the sorter arranged in the sorter between the start of the big hit game (conditional device operation) and the start of a specific round (for example, the second round). This error is an error that is issued when an abnormality is detected by the position detection sensor (when the sorting device is not displaced to the open position for sorting to a specific area), and is one of the sub-errors. The sorter error 2 is from the sorter position detection sensor to the effect control unit 24 from the start of the big hit game until a specific round in order to prevent the jamming device operation from being blocked by ball clogging or foreign matter. If the output signal indicating the position state of the sorting device indicates that the sorting device is not displaced to the open position, this is reported as an error.

  Here, as an error relating to the sorting apparatus, there is the above-mentioned sorting apparatus error 1 with the error notification priority level 6, and the error reporting priority order of this sorting apparatus error 2 is defined as 23, and the same type of error relating to the sorting apparatus is set. However, depending on whether the gaming state is a winning game or not, another error type is set, and the priority is made different. As for the priority order, the above-mentioned sorting device error 1 is an error that occurs outside of the hit game, and is an error that occurs due to fraudulent behavior. Therefore, the priority order is increased, and the sorter error 2 is normal during the hit game. Since this is an error that occurs when playing with the game method, the priority is lowered.

  When the sorting device error 2 occurs, the production control unit 24 notifies the error corresponding to the sorting device error 2 based on the fact that a signal indicating the abnormality is output from the sorting device position detection sensor to the production control unit 24. To start. This error notification is continued until the power is turned off. The main power supply of the gaming machine with a probability variation determination device is operated by a pachinko hall clerk, and when the power is cut off by the pachinko hall clerk, the sorting device error 2 is canceled. In this case, the big hit game is started again after the power is restored.

(Error notification mode of sorting device error 2)
The error notification based on the sorting device error 2 is performed by the light effect for the error. The light effect is performed in such a manner that a special lamp other than the decoration lamp 45 (for example, a lamp arranged around the speaker 46 on the right front side of the gaming machine: not shown) is lit in red. Also, no sound effect or image display effect is performed, and the sound effect produced by the speaker 46 and the image display effect produced by the liquid crystal display device 36 appearing during the game are given priority, so that direct transmission to the player is possible. No warning is given, and the error notification of the sorter error 2 is performed mainly by a method that can be recognized by a pachinko hall clerk. As described above, the reason that the error notification based on the sorting device error 2 is performed only for the light effect is that the sorting device error 2 is not caused by an illegal act but is caused by a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Because it is an error.

(7) Probability change area sensor error 2 (error notification priority 24)
Probability change area sensor error 2 is an error that is issued when an error is detected by the specific area detection switch during the invalid period of the probability change area detection switch during the big hit game (when the condition device is activated). One. The probability variation area detection switch invalid period is a period in which the distribution device is closing the probability variation area (a certain period after the probability variation area is opened (a time for discharging the game ball that has entered the probability variation area, for example, about 1 to 2 seconds) ) Is a period excluding), and even if the probability change region switch outputs an ON signal, the main control unit 20 invalidates the signal. This probability change area sensor error 2 is caused when a specific area detection switch malfunctions due to these goto actions in order to prevent, for example, “radio goto”, “selgoto” or “wire goto” actions during the probability change area switch invalid period. This is reported as an error.

  When the probability variation area sensor error 2 occurs, the probability variation area sensor error 2 command is transmitted to the effect control section 24 as a main error command corresponding to the probability variation area sensor error 2 from the main control section 20 that monitors the specific area detection switch. Is done. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts error notification corresponding to the probability variation region sensor error 2. This error notification is performed until a predetermined release condition is confirmed by the effect control unit 24. For example, when the production control unit 24 confirms that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted, when the production control unit 24 receives a jackpot start command due to the start of the next jackpot game, the probability change state (or the time-short state). When the effect control unit 24 receives a time-short end command due to the end of the error notification, the error notification ends.

(Error notification mode of probability variation area sensor error 2)
The error notification based on the probability variation area sensor error 2 is performed by the light effect for the error. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 45 blinks red at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms. Also, no sound effect or image display effect is performed, and the sound effect or image display effect by the speaker 46 or the liquid crystal display device 36 that appears during the game is given priority. Even if the game ball passes through the specific area during the specific area detection switch invalid period, the main control unit 20 disables the ON signal by the specific area detection switch, so that the probability change state is given after the big hit game ends. There is no. Therefore, since it does not benefit from the probability variation state illegally, the probability variation area sensor error 2 does not execute a prominent production such as an error sound production or an image display production, and directly warns the player. There is no such thing.

(8) Uncertain change V winning error (error notification priority 25)
The non-probability variable V winning error is an error that is issued when an abnormality is detected by the specific area detection switch during the normal big hit game, and is one of main errors. This non-probable variation V winning error is reported as an error when a specific area detection switch malfunctions due to a radio wave transmitter or the like in order to prevent a “radio wave” action during a normal jackpot game. In addition, in order to prevent `` Selgoto '' and `` Wire Goto '' acts, when the game ball passes through a specific area in the special prize winning opening and the specific area detection switch is activated during the probability change area switch invalid period This is reported as an error.

  When a non-probability variable V prize error occurs, a non-probability variable V prize error command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as a main error command corresponding to the non-probability variable V prize error from the main control unit 20 that monitors the specific area detection switch. Is done. When the effect control unit 24 receives this command, it starts error notification corresponding to the non-probable variation V winning error. This error notification is performed until a predetermined release condition is confirmed by the effect control unit 24. For example, when the production control unit 24 confirms that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted, when the production control unit 24 receives a jackpot start command due to the start of the next jackpot game, the probability change state (or the time-short state). When the effect control unit 24 receives a time-short end command due to the end of the error notification, the error notification ends.

(Error notification mode for non-probability variable V prize error)
The error notification based on the non-probable variation V winning error is performed by the light effect for the error. The light effect is performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 45 blinks red at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms. Also, no sound effect or image display effect is performed, and the sound effect or image display effect by the speaker 46 or the liquid crystal display device 36 that appears during the game is given priority. In this way, the reason for not performing outstanding effects such as error sound effects and image display effects is that, during a normal big hit game, a specific area in the special prize winning opening is opened for a short time, but a goto action etc. This is because even if a game is played with the correct game method, there is a possibility that it will pass through a specific area fortunately, and this non-probability variation V winning error will occur, and this will not be reported as an error. However, since there is a possibility of cheating, the pachinko hall clerk can be alerted by performing an inconspicuous light effect.

[Seventh Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, a description has been given of a mode in which a sound effect and / or a light effect corresponding to an error having a high error notification priority is executed when an error overlap occurs. However, when error overlap occurs, a special sound effect or light effect dedicated to error overlap may be executed regardless of the error notification priority. This will be described in detail below.

  Among the plurality of types of errors, there is an error that is specified so that when an error occurs alone, either or both of the sound production and the light production for the error corresponding to the error are not executed. For example, an error sound effect is not executed for a payout control board error or a main board error, and an error light effect is not executed for a right / left strike warning notification or a ball clogging error. When such an error occurs as an error with the highest error notification priority, and other types of errors overlap as errors with a relatively low error notification priority, in the first embodiment, an error occurs. In the notification effect, the effect sound effect or the error light effect is not executed by the effect control unit 24. For this reason, despite the occurrence of duplicate errors, it is not possible to appeal to the visual or auditory sense of human perception, making it difficult for players and pachinko hall clerk to notice the duplicate error. , It may take longer than usual to resolve multiple errors.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when error overlap occurs, a special sound effect or light effect dedicated to error overlap is executed instead of the error sound effect or light effect that is not executed. For example, if a ball clogging error that does not execute an error light effect becomes an error with a high error notification priority when an error overlaps, the sound effect corresponding to the ball clogging error (for example, “ball For example, in the case of an error light effect, an effect that causes the decoration lamp 45 to blink green at an ON / OFF repetition interval of 200 ms is executed as a light effect dedicated to error overlap. To do. Also, if a payout control board error that does not execute the error sound effect becomes an error with a high error notification priority when an error overlap occurs, the light effect corresponding to the payout control board error is executed for the error light effect. On the other hand, for the sound production for error, for example, a sound production such as “An error has occurred redundantly” is executed as a dedicated sound production at the time of error duplication.

  As described above, basically, as in the first embodiment, when an error overlap occurs, the sound effect and the light effect corresponding to the error with the highest error notification priority are executed. If no sound effect or light effect is specified, a special error sound effect dedicated to error overlap or a special error light effect dedicated to error overlap is executed instead of the sound effect or light effect not to be executed. Thereby, the pachinko hall clerk can recognize that the error has occurred before the error is recognized for the first time when the image display effect is seen. When an error overlap occurs, unlike the first embodiment, the sound effect and the light effect for the error may be executed even if the sound effect and the light effect dedicated to the error overlap are executed regardless of the error notification priority order. Good. Thereby, it can be made easy for a player or a pachinko hall clerk to recognize that an error has occurred.

  In each of the embodiments described above, a pachinko gaming machine using a game ball as a game medium has been described. However, the gaming machine is not particularly limited as long as it can achieve the object of the present invention. For example, a revolving game machine that can use a game medal or a game ball may be used, or an electromagnetic recording (an electronic method, a magnetic method, or a recording that is not recognized by human perception) It may be a gaming machine that uses a gaming medium that uses a computer provided for information processing by an electronic computer). Further, as a gaming machine using a game medium using electromagnetic recording instead of a real game medal or a real game ball, for example, a so-called “enclosed game machine” may be used. Further, in each of the embodiments described above, depending on the configuration, it is possible to reduce the game operation control burden, or to reduce the control burden and to enrich the variations of the performance without impairing the freedom of the performance, or to produce the performance. There is an effect that it can be various.

  The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine using a game medium.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Game board,
3a gaming area,
4 outer frame,
5 ball guide rail,
6 Glass door,
7 Front operation panel
8 Upper tray unit,
9 Top saucer,
11 Ball rental button,
12 Card return button,
13 Frame production button,
14 Ball release button,
15 Launch control handle,
19 game ball dispensing device,
19a Replenishment detection sensor,
19b ball counting sensor,
19c payout motor,
20 Main control unit,
21 External concentration terminal board for frame,
24 production control unit,
28 Launch control board,
29 payout control board,
32 launcher,
34 Upper starting port,
34a Upper start sensor,
35 Lower starting port,
35a Lower start sensor,
36 liquid crystal display devices,
37 Normal design starting port,
37a Normal design start sensor,
38a, 38b Special symbol display device,
40, 50 Big prize opening,
41 Ordinary variable winning device,
41c Ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
42,52 Special variable prize device,
42a, 52a Big prize opening sensor,
42b, 52b open door,
42c, 52c
43 General prize opening,
43a General prize opening sensor,
44 Windmill,
45 Decorative lamp,
45a optical display device,
46 Speaker,
46a sound generator,
47 Movable wing pieces,
48 Center decoration,
49 Out mouth,
80c, 91c, 92c, 62c, 73c Movable body accessory motor,
82a, 91a, 92a position detection sensors,
98 Fraud detection sensor 201 Main control CPU,
202 main control ROM,
203 main control RAM,
241 Production control CPU,
242 Production control ROM,
293 payout control RAM.

Claims (2)

Main control means for controlling game operation;
Based on a control command from the main control means, the production control means for managing the production operation control for the production means,
In a gaming machine configured to be able to execute an error notification related to a gaming machine by the rendering means,
The effect means includes a plurality of kinds of effect means including sound effect means for executing sound effect, light effect means for executing light effect, and image display means for executing image display effect,
The main control means includes
Main control side error determination means for determining whether or not an error relating to the gaming machine has occurred;
An error command transmission means for transmitting an error command capable of specifying an error type relating to the gaming machine as the control command based on the determination result by the main control side error determination means;
The production control means includes
Based on the error command, comprising error notification control means for controlling execution of error notification according to the type of error relating to the gaming machine,
The error notification control means includes
When at least two types of errors are duplicated, execution control of error notification for each error that is occurring is performed based on an error notification priority that is previously associated with each error that is occurring. Including priority error notification control means;
The priority error notification control means includes
When performing the error notification, the sound effect and the light effect related to the error notification are error notifications corresponding to errors having a relatively high error notification priority among the errors that are occurring in the overlap. Preferentially executed, the image display effect related to the error notification is configured to display on the image display means error information that can identify each error during the occurrence of duplication,
About the error notification priority order related to the error relating to the gaming machine determined by the main control side error determination means,
Rather than using the sound effect, the sound effect, the light effect, and the image display effect are used rather than the first error type in which the error notification is executed using the light effect and the image display effect. In the second error type in which error notification is executed, the error notification priority is relatively high ,
In addition, the first error type and the second error type are more than the third error type in which error notification is performed using the sound effect and the image display effect without using the light effect. The error notification priority is set relatively high,
A gaming machine characterized by that. The production control means includes
It further includes an effect control side error determination means for determining whether an error relating to the effect operation control has occurred,
The error notification control means includes
Based on the determination result by the effect control side error determination means, further comprises effect operation error notification control means for executing and controlling error notification according to the type of error related to the effect operation control,
The error notification priority of the error related to the effect operation control which is determined by the performance control side error determining means,
Rather than using the sound effect, the sound effect, the light effect, and the image display effect are used rather than the fourth error type in which the error notification is executed using the light effect and the image display effect. In the fifth error type in which error notification is executed , the error notification priority is relatively high,
The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images